Canon Copier Canon Plain Paper Copier User Manual

SERVICE  
MANUAL  
REVISION 0  
FEB. 1998  
FY8-13F4-000  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This Service Manual provides basic facts and figures you will need to service the plain paper copier  
NP6621 in the field.  
The NP6621 is designed to enable automated copying work and may be configured with the following  
accessory; for servicing information on the sorter, ADF, and control card, see their respective Service  
Manuals:  
1. Cassette Feeding Module-B2  
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2  
3. Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
4. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
5. Control Card IV N  
6. ADF-E1  
7. RDF-F1  
8. Stapler Sorter-D1  
9. Sorter 10-B1  
10. Remote Diagnostic Device II  
ThisServiceManualcontainsdescriptionsonthe1-CassetteFeedingUnit-B1andthe2-CassetteFeeding  
Unit-A2.  
Note:  
The Cassette Feeding Unit-B2, the Cassette Feeding Unit-A2 the cassette feeding Unit K1, the Paper  
Deck Pedestal-K1 and Remote Diagnostic Device II may not be available for sale in some areas.  
This Service Manual is organized as follows:  
CHAPTER 1, “General Introduction,” explains the NP6621’s features, specifications, and step-by-step  
instructions on how to operate the copier.  
CHAPTER 2, “Copying Processes,” shows how the NP6621 generates copies while discussing each of  
the steps involved.  
CHAPTER 3, “Operations and Timing,” explains the NP6621’s mechanical system by function and  
principles behind its electrical system in relation to timing of each operation.  
CHAPTER 4, “Mechanical System,” provides instructions on how to disassemble/assemble and adjust the  
NP6621.  
CHAPTER 5, “Installation,” provides points to note when selecting the site of installation and instructions  
on how to install the NP6621.  
CHAPTER 6, ‘Maintenance and Inspection,” gives tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/  
durables as well as a scheduled servicing chart.  
APPENDIX contains a general timing chart, general circuit diagrams, and PCB diagrams.  
This Service Manual is accompanied by the Service Handbook, which provides information on how to  
maintain and inspect the NP6621 through adjustment and troubleshooting work.  
Information found in this manual may be updated from time to time for product improvement, and major  
updates are communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.  
All service persons are expected to be thoroughly familiar with this Service Manual, the Service Handbook,  
and Service Information bulletins and be ready to respond to the needs of the user.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
RDF-F1 (Recirculating Document Feeder)  
Automatically feeds a set of up to 100 originals to the  
platen glass for copying. The RDF can also turn over  
two-sided originals for automatic two-sided copying.  
MS-B1 (10 bins)  
Automotically sorts and groups sets of up to  
10 copies.  
ADF-E1 (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Automatically feeds sets of up to 30 originals to  
the copyboard for copying.  
Control Card IV N  
Allows you to monitor the number of  
copies made by each card holder.  
Stapler Sorter-D2 (10 bins)  
Automatically sorts or groups copies  
into 10 bins at (30 pages per set).  
Staples sets of up to 20 copies  
each.  
Cassette Feeding Module-B2  
Allows you to increase your paper supply  
through the addition of one paper cassette.  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2  
Allows you to increase your paper supply  
through the addition of two paper cassettes.  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
Allows you to increase your  
paper supply through the addition  
of three paper cassettes.  
Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
Holds up to 1500 sheets of one type of paper.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
I. FEATURES................................................ 1-1  
IV. BASIC OPERATION................................ 1-13  
A. Control Panel ..................................... 1-13  
B. Making Copies................................... 1-16  
C. Using the Stack Bypass .................... 1-17  
D. User Mode ......................................... 1-19  
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ................... 1-26  
A. Jam Indicator ..................................... 1-26  
B. Cleaning the Static Charge  
II. SPECIFICATIONS..................................... 1-2  
A. Copier .................................................. 1-2  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2/Cassette  
Feeding Unit-K1 .................................. 1-5  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 1-6  
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................................... 1-7  
A. Exterior ................................................ 1-7  
B. Cross Section ...................................... 1-8  
Eliminator........................................... 1-33  
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING ............................. 1-34  
CHAPTER 2 COPYING PROCESS  
G. Step 5 (transfer) .................................. 2-5  
H. Step 6 (separation) .............................. 2-6  
I. Step 7 (fixing) ...................................... 2-7  
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning) ........................ 2-7  
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS ............................. 2-8  
A. Blank Exposure ................................... 2-8  
I. IMAGE FORMATION ................................ 2-1  
A. Outline ................................................. 2-1  
B. Latent Static Image Formation Block .... 2-2  
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure) ......................... 2-3  
D. Step 2 (primary charging) .................... 2-3  
E. Step 3 (image exposure) ..................... 2-4  
F. Step 4 (development) .......................... 2-4  
CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ............................... 3-1  
A. Functional Construction....................... 3-1  
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ............... 3-2  
C. Inputs to the DC Controller .................. 3-3  
D. Outputs from the DC Controller........... 3-8  
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB ........ 3-13  
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB ........ 3-14  
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB ............. 3-16  
H. Main Motor Control Circuit................. 3-21  
I. Basic Sequence of Operations  
(2 copies, continuous, AE) ................ 3-22  
J. Original Size Detecton Control .......... 3-23  
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM ............................. 3-27  
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ........ 3-27  
B. Lens Drive System ............................ 3-27  
C. Scanner Drive System....................... 3-31  
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page  
III. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM .............. 3-35  
A. Outline ............................................... 3-35  
B. Sequence of Operations  
(image formation system) .................. 3-36  
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp ......... 3-37  
D. Controlling the Primary Charging  
Roller ................................................. 3-38  
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias .... 3-41  
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator  
Bias.................................................... 3-44  
G. Controlling the Developing Bias ........ 3-46  
H. Copy Density Automatic Control ....... 3-48  
I. Developing/Cleaning Assembly ........ 3-50  
J. Blank Exposure Control..................... 3-53  
K. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning  
Control ............................................... 3-55  
L. Transfer Roller Locking/Releasing  
Control ............................................... 3-56  
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 3-57  
A. Pick-Up from the Machine ................. 3-57  
B. Making Two-Sided Copies (1copy) ... 3-61  
Separation Mode ............................... 3-34  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C. Duplexing Unit ................................... 3-63  
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding  
Module-A2 ......................................... 3-72  
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding  
VI. SERVICE MODE ................................... 3-105  
A. Outline ............................................. 3-105  
B. Using Service Mode ........................ 3-105  
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’) ............... 3-107  
D. I/O Mode (‘2’) ................................... 3-110  
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’) ..................... 3-114  
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’) ...... 3-117  
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)............ 3-118  
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)........................... 3-120  
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS................................. 3-121  
A. Copier Self Diagnosis ...................... 3-121  
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding  
Unit .................................................. 3-124  
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis ................. 3-125  
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis....................... 3-126  
VIII.STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .... 3-127  
A. Electrical .......................................... 3-127  
Unit-K1............................................... 3-74  
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 3-76  
G. Multifeeder ......................................... 3-82  
H. Identifying the Size of the Cassette... 3-85  
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .................. 3-87  
J. Detecting Jams.................................. 3-92  
V. POWER SUPPLY .................................. 3-101  
A. Outline of Power Distribution........... 3-101  
B. Power Supply Circuitry .................... 3-102  
C. Detecting Errors on the Power Supply  
PCB ................................................. 3-103  
D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power  
Supply Circuit .................................. 3-104  
CHAPTER 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
I. EXTERNALS ............................................. 4-1  
A. External Covers ................................... 4-1  
B. Control Panel ....................................... 4-2  
C. Removing the Display Panel ............... 4-2  
D. Fan ...................................................... 4-3  
E. Counter ................................................ 4-4  
II. DRIVE SYSTEM ........................................ 4-5  
A. Scanner Drive System......................... 4-5  
B. Lens Drive Assembly......................... 4-10  
C. Main Motor......................................... 4-14  
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 4-15  
A. Pick-Up Assembly ............................. 4-15  
B. Multifeeder Assembly ........................ 4-17  
C. Registration Roller Assembly ............ 4-20  
D. Feeding Assembly ............................. 4-22  
E. Delivery Assembly ............................. 4-22  
F. Duplexing Assembly .......................... 4-23  
G. Cassette Unit ..................................... 4-24  
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 4-27  
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM............................. 4-34  
A. Illuminating Assembly........................ 4-34  
V. CHARGING SYSTEM ............................. 4-38  
A. Drum Unit .......................................... 4-38  
B. Primary Charging Assembly.............. 4-39  
C. Transfer Charging Assembly............. 4-40  
D. Drum Heater ...................................... 4-41  
VI. DEVELOPING SYSTEM ......................... 4-42  
VII. FIXING SYSTEM ..................................... 4-45  
VIII.ELECTRICAL........................................... 4-50  
A. DC Controller PCB ............................ 4-50  
B. Composite Power Supply PCB ......... 4-50  
C. AE Sensor PCB ................................. 4-51  
CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION  
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-16  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-16  
B. Installation (to copying machine)....... 5-17  
C. Installation (to a Cassette Feeding Module-  
A2/B2/Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)....... 5-20  
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-24  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-24  
B. Installation ......................................... 5-25  
C. Attaching the Ratings Label .............. 5-27  
VIII.INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC  
DEVICE II ................................................ 5-28  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-28  
B. Installation to the Copier.................... 5-28  
I. SELECTING THE SITE ............................. 5-1  
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE  
COPIER ..................................................... 5-2  
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings....... 5-2  
B. Turning On the Copier ......................... 5-5  
C. Checking the Images and  
Operations ........................................... 5-7  
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ...................... 5-8  
E. Changing the Cassette Size................ 5-9  
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER .................. 5-11  
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .............. 5-12  
V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL  
CARD IV N............................................... 5-14  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS....... 6-1  
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ................ 6-1  
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES .......... 6-2  
A. Copier .................................................. 6-2  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2,  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 6-3  
III. BASIC SERVICING ................................... 6-4  
IV. SERVICING CHART ................................. 6-5  
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work ............ 6-5  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2,  
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 ............ 6-3  
APPENDIX  
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2  
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-37  
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2  
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..................... A-1  
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ........... A-2  
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............... A-5  
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..... A-7  
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-21  
F. CONTROL PANEL KEY PCB ................ A-27  
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......... A-31  
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-32  
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-33  
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2  
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-38  
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-41  
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 ............ A-42  
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-45  
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 DRIVER  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-46  
R. SPECIAL TOOLS ................................... A-47  
S. SOLVENTS/OILS ................................... A-48  
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-34  
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2  
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-35  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
I. FEATURES................................................ 1-1  
II. SPECIFICATIONS..................................... 1-2  
A. Copier .................................................. 1-2  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/  
IV. BASIC OPERATION................................ 1-13  
A. Control Panel..................................... 1-13  
B. Making Copies................................... 1-16  
C. Using the Stack Bypass .................... 1-17  
D. User Mode ......................................... 1-19  
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ................... 1-26  
A. Jam Indicator ..................................... 1-26  
B. Cleaning the Static Charge  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2/Cassette  
Feeding Unit-K1 .................................. 1-5  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 1-6  
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................................... 1-7  
A. Exterior ................................................ 1-7  
B. Cross Section ...................................... 1-8  
Eliminator........................................... 1-33  
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING ............................. 1-34  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
I. FEATURES  
When fitted with options, it provides a maximum of four paper sources.  
1. Multiple front loading and multifeeder for space saving.  
• The cassette may be slid out to the front for paper supply work.  
• With the adjustable cassette and the multifeeder, various types of paper may be used.  
2. Office conveniences and ecology.  
• The copier is designed compact, enabling effective use of office space.  
• The use of roller charging has proved to reduce the generation of ozone significantly.(1/100 to 1/1000  
compared to other Canon copiers)  
• As the pick-up mechanism, center-reference is adopted in consideration of the use of recycled paper.  
• A significant number of parts are made of plastic in an effort to promote recycling.  
• The copier is designed as a clamshell type to facilitate clearing of jammed paper.  
3. Dependable high image quality.  
• The new HQ (high-quality) toner ensures faithful reproduction of solid black, text, and photos.  
• In addition to Canon’s own single-component toner projection development method, the use of auto  
image control (AIC) ensures stable reproduction of images.  
4. Practical basic features.  
• As many as 21 copies (A4/Letter, horizontal) may be made per minute.  
• Copies may be as large as A3/11×17 or as small as A5/STMT, accommodating postcards.  
• The AE mechanism promises enhanced reproduction of newspapers or diazo originals.  
• Using page separation mode, a book may be copies with its lift and right pages processed separately.  
• Copies may be made in zoom between 49% and 204%.  
• The zoom fine-adjustment mechanism ensures better control for faithful reproduction of originals.  
• The auto energy saver mechanism helps further saving of energy.  
• The interrupt mechanism enables cutting in on a continuous copying session.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
II. SPECIFICATIONS  
A. Copier  
1. Configuration  
Specifications  
Item  
Desktop  
Body  
Copyboard  
Light source  
Lens  
Fixed  
Halogen lamp  
Zoom lens  
OPC  
Photosensitive medium  
2. Type  
Item  
Specifications  
Indirect electrostatic photography  
Roller (direct charging)  
Slit (moving light source)  
Automatic (AE) or manual  
Dry (toner projection)  
2 cassettes  
Copying  
Charging  
Exposure  
Copy density adjustment  
Development  
Automatic  
Pick-up  
Multifeeder  
Manual  
Transfer  
Separation  
Cleaning  
Fixing  
Roller  
Curvature + static eliminator  
Cleaning blade  
Heat roller, 900W  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
3. Performance  
Item  
Specifications  
Original type  
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg/2.204 lb. max.)  
A3 (297 x 420 mm)  
Maximum original size  
Reproduction ratio  
DIRECT, 2R2E (Table 1-1);  
zoom between 49% and 204% (fine zooming provided)  
Wait time  
30 sec  
First copy time  
Continuous copying  
9.7 sec (approx.; A4, DIRECT, non-AE, cassette 1)  
100 copies (max.; upper limit may be changed in service  
mode)  
Copying speed  
Copy size  
See Table 1-202.  
Cassette: A3 to A5  
Manual:  
A3 to postcard  
Plain paper (64g to 80 g/m2), tracing paper*1, colored paper*1,  
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2)  
Cassette  
Manual  
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper*1, colored paper*1,  
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2 *1), trans-  
parency*3, postcard, label sheet*1, Thick paper (81 to 128 g/m2)  
Two-sided/overlay copying*2  
Cassette  
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper, postcard, recycled  
paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2)  
34 mm deep (approx.; about 250 sheets of 80 g/m2); no claw,  
front loading (center reference)  
5 mm (max. stacking height; i.e., about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2);  
no claw (center reference)  
Multifeeder  
100 sheets (approx.: A3, 80 g/m2)  
Copy tray  
Non-image width  
One-sided  
Multifeeder  
2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge); 2.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)  
2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge); 3.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)  
Auto clear  
Auto power-off  
Options  
Provided (2 min standard; may be varied in 1-min increments  
between 1 and 9 min; may be deactivated)  
Provided (5 min standard; 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, or 120 min;  
may be varied in user mode)  
Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2,  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1, Control Card IV N, Stapler Sorter-  
D2, Sorter 10-B1, ADF-E1, RDF-F1, Paper Deck Pedestal-  
K1, Remote Diagnostic Device II  
*1 Canon recommended paper.  
*2 If in manual mode, remove curling before second feeding.  
*3 Fan out sheets before setting to eliminate adhesion.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4. Others  
Item  
Temperature  
Specifications  
7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5 to 90.5°F  
5% to 85%  
Operating environment Humidity  
Atmospheric pressure 810.6 hPa to 10313.3 hPa (0.8 to 1 atm)  
Serial numbers  
Power supply  
230 V (50Hz)  
Standby  
QBSxxxxx, UDNxxxxx, SBExxxxx, TBHxxxxx, UDPxxxxx  
0.042 kwh (reference only)  
Power consumption  
Continuous copying 0.663 kwh (reference only)  
Copying  
Standby  
66 dB or less (1m front)  
40 dB or less (1m front)  
0.02 ppm or less  
585 mm  
By ISO sound power level  
measurement  
Noise  
Ozone (avr over 8 hr)  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Dimensions  
640 mm  
624 mm  
Weight  
77 kg/169.8 lb (approx.)  
Copy paper  
Cartridge  
Keep wrapped; store avoiding humidity.  
Consumables  
Avoid direct sunshine; store at 40°C/104°F, 85% or less.  
1: 1 (±0.5%)  
DIRECT  
230V  
1: 0.500  
REDUCE I  
1: 0.707  
Reproduction ratio REDUCE II  
ENLARGE I  
1: 1.414  
1: 2.000  
ENLARGE II  
49% to 204 % (1% increments)  
ZOOM  
Table 1-201 Defaults Reproduction Ratio  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Q’ty  
11  
21  
21  
12  
21  
16  
18  
18  
20  
15  
17  
12  
12  
14  
Reproduction ratio  
Copy size  
(297 × 420)  
A3  
A4  
A5  
B4  
B5  
(210 × 297)  
(148 × 210)  
(257 × 364)  
(182 × 257)  
DIRECT  
1: 1 (±0.5%)  
A4R (297 × 210)  
A5R (210 × 148)  
B5R (257 × 182)  
1: 0.500 (+1.0%)  
1: 0.707 (+1.0%)  
A3  
A5R  
A4R  
B5R  
A3  
REDUCE  
A3  
B4  
1: 2.000 (+1.0%)  
1: 1.414 (+1.0%)  
A5R  
A4R  
B5R  
ENLARGE  
A3  
B4  
Table 1-202 Copying Speeds  
Specifications subject to change without notice.  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2/  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
Copy paper type  
Same as copier.  
Cassette specifications  
Power supply  
Same as copier  
34 VDC, 24 V, 5 V (supplied by copier)  
Dimensions (WxDxH; mm/in)  
Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 585 × 622 × 105/23.0 × 24.5 × 4.1  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 585 × 622 × 210/23.0 × 24.5 × 8.3  
Cassette Feeding Unit-KI:  
585 × 622 × 384/23.0 × 24.5 × 15.1  
Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 9 kg/19.8 lb  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 16 kg/32.3 lb  
Weight  
Cassette Feeding Unit-KI:  
29.6 kg/65.3 lb  
Table 1-203  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
Method of pick-up  
Loading method  
Type of paper  
Clawless  
Front loading  
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), Colored paper*  
A4 (landscape), B5 (landscape), LTR (landscape)  
Size of paper  
162 mm high (one side; equivalent of 1500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)  
Partitioning plate (incremental)  
Capacity  
Switching (size)  
Control panel  
Display  
No (use copier' s control panel)  
No (see copier' s display)  
34 VDC, 24 V, 5 V (supplied by copier)  
31.7 kg/70.0 lb  
Power supply  
Weight  
Dimensions (W × D × H; mm/in) 610 × 583 × 414/24.0 × 21.4 × 16.3  
Table 1-204  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
III. NAMES OF PARTS  
1
A. Exterior  
7
2
6
5
3
4
q Copyboard cover  
w Power switch  
e Multifeeder  
t Front door  
y Control panel  
u Copyboard glass  
r Cassette  
Figure 1-301  
1
6
2
5
3
4
r Static eliminator  
t Copy tray  
y Anti-condensation heater switch (rear)  
q Body open/close lever  
w Copy density correction volume  
e Static eliminator cleaner  
Fluorescent heater switch (front)  
Figure 1-302  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
B. Cross Section  
1. Cross Section of the Body  
1
4
6
7
8
9
10  
2
3
5
11  
13  
12  
14  
15 16 17  
23  
20  
22  
21  
19  
18  
q No. 3 mirror  
w No. 2 mirror  
e No. 1 mirror  
r Scanning lamp  
t Fixing unit  
y Feeding assembly  
u Copyboard glass  
i Drum unit  
!
!
!
@
@
@
@
7
Cassette 1 pick-up roller  
Vertical path roller 2  
Vertical path roller 1  
Cassette 2 pick-up roller  
Duplexing unit  
o Lens  
8
9
0
1
2
3
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Primary charging roller  
Transfer roller  
No. 6 mirror  
Developing assembly  
No. 4 mirror  
No. 5 mirror  
Delivery paper deflecting plate  
Delivery roller  
Multifeeder pick-up roller  
Figure 1-303  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2  
1
4
2
3
5
6
q Cassette 3  
w Cassette 4  
r Cassette 4 pick-up roller  
t Drive roller  
e Cassette 3 pick-up roller  
y Feeding roller  
Figure 1-304  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
3. Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
1
4
2
3
5
6
9
8
7
q Cassette 3  
w Cassette 4  
y Vertical path roller 3  
u Vertical path roller 5  
e Cassette 3 pick-up roller  
r Cassette 4 pick-up roller  
t Vertical path roller 4  
i Cassette 5 pick-up roller  
o Cassette 5  
Figure 1-305  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
t Deck separation roller  
y Lifter  
u Deck  
q Deck pick-up roller  
w Deck vertical path roller  
e Vertical path roller 3  
r Deck feeding roller  
Figure 1-306  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IV. BASIC OPERATION  
A. Control Panel  
1
2
3
7
8
9 10 11  
15  
20 21  
22  
23  
4
5
6
12  
13 14 16 17 18  
19  
24  
25  
26  
Figure 1-401  
Flashes when the original size needs to be selected.  
* Select the original size with the paper select key, and then press the OK  
key.  
q Sorter key  
Press to set or cancel the Sort, Staple Sort, and Group modes.  
Sort mode: When copying a multi-page document, copies are automatically sorted into  
sets arranged in page order.  
Flashes when the copy size needs to be entered.  
* Enter the copy size with the Number keys, and then press the Ok key.  
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter, Sorter,  
or ADF/RDF.  
Flashes when the control card is not properly inserted.  
i Check Control Card indicator  
o Paper Jam indicator  
Staple Sort mode: When copying a multi-page document, copies are automatically sorted  
into sets arranged in page order and then stapled.  
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter.  
Group mode: When copying a multi-page document, all copies of the same original page  
are grouped together, and output into different bins.  
1 2 3  
Flashes when a paper jam occurs.  
Flashes when the paper supply in the cassete or stack bypass tray runs out, and when the  
cassette is not properly set.  
Flashes when the toner runs low and must be replaced with a new one.  
!
!
!
0
1
2
Add Paper indicator  
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter or Sorter.  
Replace Toner Cartridge  
indicator  
Paper Supply/Jam Location  
indicator  
w Two-sided key (left side)  
Press to set or cancel the following two-sided copy modes: 1 2-sided, 2 2-sided, 2 1-sided, Book 2-sided.  
1
2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from one-sided originals.  
2
Lights to indicate the selected paper cassete or stack bypass. When a paper jam occurs, the location of the paper  
jam flashes. It also lights when the Sorter or right door needs to be inspected, or when a paper jam occurs in the  
ADF/RDF.  
When you do not know the total page number of the original, the copier automatically  
counts the original.  
A
Press to select Auto Paper selection, a paper cassette, or the stack bypass.  
The size of the original/copy paper selected with the Paper select key lights.  
Displays the entered copy quantity copy ratio, and Additional Functions settings.  
!
!
!
3
4
5
Paper select key  
Select paper size indicator  
Copy quantity/copy ratio  
display  
OK key  
Auto Zoom key  
Select when you know beforehand that there is an odd number of originals. This will save  
the time spent on counting the original.  
Select this when you know beforehand that there is an even number of originals.  
This will save the time spent on counting the original.  
3 · 5····  
2 · 4····  
2
Press to confirm items and functions that have been selected when setting modes.  
Press to set or cancel the Auto Zoom mode. Auto Zoom automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio, based on  
the size of the originals and the selected copy paper.  
!
!
6
7
e Two-sided key (right side)  
2
2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from two-side originals.  
2
2
1-sided: Makes one-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
2
Press to set or cancel the Zoom mode. Zoom mode allows you to specify a copy ratio from 49 to 204% in 1%  
increments. Continue pressing for fast selection.  
Press to display the selected copy ratio.  
Press to return the settings to standard mode.  
Press to stop the coper before copying is completed.  
Press the enter copy quantity and other numerical values when setting a mode.  
Press to turn the power ON and OFF.  
Press to begin copying.  
Press to return the copy quantity to one, or to clear an incorrectly entered value when setting a mode.  
Press to temporarily stop the current copy job to make priority copies.  
!
8
Zoom key  
Book 2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from facing pages in a book.  
2
!
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
% key  
Reset key  
Stop key  
Number keys  
Power switch  
Start key  
Clear key  
Interrupt key  
r AE key  
Press to set or cancel the AE (Automatic Exposure) mode.  
Press to manually adjust the copy exposure.  
Press to enlarge or reduce using a preset copy ratio, or to return the copier to 100% copying (1:1).  
Place originals in feeder  
t Copy exposure key  
y Reduce/1:1/Enlarge key  
u Message display  
Flashes when the original in the feeder needs to be reloaded.  
Flashes when the width of the edges to be erased or the margin needs to be  
specified.  
* Enter the measurement with the Number keys and then press the OK key.  
Flashes when the first original copied needs to be replaced with the next one.  
Flashes when the copy ratio needs to be specified.  
Enter frame erase/margin size  
Replace originals  
Set copy ratio  
Table 1-402  
* Enter the copy ratio with the preset copy ratio key, the reduce/1:1/enlarge  
keys, or the Zoom key, and then press the OK key.  
Select paper size  
Enter original size  
Flashes when the paper size needs to be specified.  
* Select a paper size with the paper select key, and then press the OK key.  
Flashes when the original size needs to be specified.  
* Enter the original size with the Number keys and then press the OK key.  
Table 1-401  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
w
e
q
Figure 1-402  
q Transparency Interleaving key  
Press to set or cancel the Transparency Interleaving mode.  
The interleaf sheets are printed with the same images as the transparencies.  
The interleaf sheets are left blank.  
w Two-page Separation/Image  
Copies facing pages in a bound original onto two copy sheets.  
2 ON 1: Reduces two originals to fit on one side of a single copy sheet.  
2 ON 1/2 Sided: Reduces four originals to fit on two sides of a single copy sheet.  
Combination key (left side)  
2
e Additional Functions key  
Press to set or change standard settings and custom settings according to specific user needs, and when  
adjusting and cleaning the copier.  
Table 1-403  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
3) Press the  
key.  
B. Making Copies  
a. After copying begins, you cannot change the  
number of copies, paper size, copy ratio or  
other copy settings.  
b. The copier’s counter automatically counts up  
one as each copy is output to the copy tray.  
1) Place your originals.  
a. Placing originals on the platen glass  
• Lift the platen glass cover.  
• Place your original on the platen glass. The  
surface that you want to copy must face  
down. Aligntheedgeoftheoriginalwiththe →  
mark in the centre of the platen glass.  
• Gently lower the platen glass cover.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
7
C
Figure 1-405  
c. If you want to stop the copier before copying is  
complete, press the  
key.  
Figure 1-403  
Reference:  
Pressing the  
settings. To clear the copy settings, press the  
key.  
b. Placing originals in the ADF or RDF (option)  
• Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your  
originals.  
key will not clear the copy  
• Neatly stack your originals face up in the  
original tray.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
7
Figure 1-406  
Figure 1-404  
2) Programme the copy settings.  
0
9
• Press the  
-
keys to enter the number of  
copies.  
• Press the  
exposure.  
Pressthe  
• Press the  
copy ratio.  
-
keys to adjust the copy  
keytoselectthecopypapersize.  
keys to select a preset  
-
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1) Place your originals.  
C. Using the Stack Bypass  
You can place up to 50 sheets of copy paper (a  
stack approximately 5 mm high) in the stack bypass  
tobeautomaticallyfedintothecopier. Usethestack  
bypass when you want to copy on special stock,  
suchastransparenciesorlabels, orwhenthepaper  
sizethatyouwanttocopyonwillnotfitinacassette.  
Note:  
Note the following points when using the stack  
bypass:  
Figure 1-407  
a. Paper size: A5 (horizontal placement) to A3  
b. Paper weight: 64 to 128 g/m2  
c. Acceptable paper  
• Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2)  
• Coloured paper  
• No. 2 master drawing paper  
• Labels  
• Transparencies  
• Postcards  
Figure 1-408  
• Recycled paper  
d. Curl down copy stock before use.  
e. There are some types of copy stock which meet  
the above specifications but which cannot be  
fed in the stack bypass.  
2) Programme the copy settings.  
3) Open the stack bypass.  
Notes:  
1. Do not use the sort/staple-sort/group mode  
when copying postcards as it may result in  
a paper jam.  
2. A5R-size copy paper cannot be used to  
make two-sided or overlay copies.  
3. Insert A4-size labels horizontally.  
4. If you want the copy stock placed in the  
stack bypass to be selected when using  
Auto Paper Selection, specify the size.  
Figure 1-409  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4) Adjust the slide guides to fit the size  
of the copy stock.  
5) Align the required number of sheets  
of copy stock with the slide guides.  
The surface that you want to copy on  
must face up. Insert the copy stock  
into the copier until it stops.  
Reference:  
1. Be sure to adjust the slide guides to fit the  
size of the copy stock.  
2. When feeding A4R or A3-size copy stock,  
pull out the auxiliary tray.  
Notes:  
1. Make sure that the height of the paper is not  
higher than the limit mark on the inside of  
the slide guides.  
2. If the Stack Bypass Size Entry in Custom  
Settings is ON, select a paper size at this  
point.  
Figure 1-410  
Maximum  
level  
Slide guides  
Limit mark  
Figure 1-412  
6) Press the  
key until the stack  
bypass lights on the Paper Supply  
indicator.  
mm  
%
Auxiliary tray  
Autom.Paper  
A3  
A4  
Figure 1-411  
OK  
A4 R  
A5  
A5 R  
%
Autom.Zoom  
ZOOM  
Figure 1-413  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
7) Press the  
key.  
D. User Mode  
If you set the Two-sided, Two-page separation,  
Overlay, Image Separation or Transparency  
Interleaving modes in step 1 for stack bypass  
feeding, and you have not selected the size of the  
paper to be fed, the Paper Size indicator flashes.  
1. Outline  
You can change or adjust the factory settings for  
various functions to meet your specific copying  
needs. It is also possible to perform cleaning and to  
make adjustments to the copier.  
You can change or adjust the settings for the  
following items:  
1
4
2
5
8
0
Function  
01 Auto Clear Time  
Initial setting  
2 min.  
5 min.  
0%  
7
02 Auto Energy Saver Time  
03 Zoom Fine Adjustment  
04 Auto Cassette Selection ON/OFF  
05 Stack Bypass Size Specification ON/OFF  
06 Auto Sort ON/OFF  
C
ON  
OFF  
ON  
07 Feeder Cleaning  
Figure 1-414  
key to select the size of the paper to  
08 Standard Copy Settings  
09 Input Unit mm/Inch Selection  
2 min.  
00 Initializing Additional Functions NP Drum Cartridge Counter  
Press the  
be fed into the stack bypass.  
Table 1-404  
mm  
%
Autom.Paper  
A4  
2. The Use of Keys and Displays That  
Appear When Changing the Settings  
OK  
A
A5 R  
%
Autom.Zoom  
a. The Use of Keys  
Aditional  
Function  
key : Press this key to set or cancel the  
Additional Functions and return to  
the normal copying mode.  
key : Press this key to indicate the item  
that you want to change.  
key : Press this key to clear any mistakes  
thatyouhavemadewhenchanging  
the settings. Also press this key to  
return to the last previous setting  
that you had entered.  
ZOOM  
OK  
Figure 1-415  
C
OK  
Then press the  
key. If the size you want cannot  
key so that the Stack  
Bypass Size Entry display disappears, then press  
be selected, press the  
OK  
the  
key.  
• Copy Quantity/Copy Ratio Display  
3  
mm  
%
Autom.Paper  
A3  
A4  
OK  
Press the  
key.  
OK  
A4 R  
A5  
The number for a function that can be set.  
The present setting for a certain function.  
A5 R  
Autom.Zoom  
Figure 1-417  
ZOOM  
Figure 1-416  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Reference:  
3. Auto Clear Time  
1. The initial setting for the Auto Clear Time is  
2 minutes.  
2. You can set Auto Clear Time from 1 to 9  
minutes, in one-minute increments.  
Ifthecopierisnotoperated(nokeysarepressed)  
for a certain period of time, the copier automatically  
returns to the standard copy settings. This time  
period is called the “Auto Clear Time.” You can  
cancel or freely change the Auto Clear Time.  
Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes  
in one-minute increments.  
0
3. To cancel this function, press the key.  
4. If you make a mistake while entering a  
value, enter the correct value and it will  
Aditional  
Function  
replacetheincorrectonethatwaspreviously  
1) Press the  
key.  
C
entered, or press the  
key and after the  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
display clears, enter the correct value.  
ratio display.  
TocontinuesettingotherAdditionalFunctions,  
1
press the  
key.  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
The Auto Clear Time is changed and “U01” is  
displayed.  
Reference:  
Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
Reference:  
cannot be initiated.  
OK  
If the  
key is pressed before the  
key is  
pressed, the Auto Clear Time that was set is  
cleared and the copier returns to the normal  
copying mode.  
2) Check the Copy quantity/Copy ratio display.  
If “U01” is displayed, proceed to the next step.  
Reference:  
IfU01isnotdisplayedorifyoumakeamistake  
while entering a value, press either the key or  
4. Auto Energy Saver Time  
Aditional  
Function  
1) Press the  
key.  
1
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
C
1
press the key and then the key.  
2
2) Press the  
3) Press the  
key.  
key.  
OK  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
• The possible settings for Auto Clear Time  
appear in the Copy quantity / Copy ratio  
display as follows:  
The possible settings for Auto Energy Saver  
Time appear in the Copy quantity / Copy ratio  
display as follows:  
Auto Clear Time (min.)  
Settings  
–0  
Auto Energy Saver Time (min.)  
Settings  
–1  
0
1
2
3
2
5
–1  
–2  
–2  
10  
–3  
–3  
–4  
15  
30  
–4  
4
5
6
7
8
9
–5  
–6  
–7  
–5  
–6  
–7  
–8  
–9  
60  
120  
Table 1-406  
4) Enter the Auto Energy Saver Time with the  
7
1
Table 1-405  
Number keys (  
-
).  
• The setting time is displayed in the Copy  
4) Enter the Auto Clear Time with the Number  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
OK  
0
keys (  
-
).  
5) Press the  
key.  
9
• The setting time is displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
• The Auto Energy Saver Time is changed and  
“U02” is displayed.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
a. Zoom Fine Adjustment (Reduction): Press the  
key.  
5. Zoom Fine Adjustment  
• If there is a slight difference in size between the  
original and output copy images when the copy  
ratio is set to 100% (direct), use this function to  
correct the error. Adjustments can be made  
independentlyintheX(horizontal)andY(vertical)  
directions.  
Initial  
setting  
(±0%)  
You can make adjustments from –1% to +1%, in  
0.2% increments.  
(–0.2%)  
• Press the  
keys to adjust the copy ratio for  
Zoom Fine Adjustment. The zoom fine  
adjustments can be confirmed by looking at the  
copy exposure display.  
• Confirm fine adjustments by making copies and  
comparing them with the original.  
(–0.4%)  
(–0.6%)  
(–0.8%)  
• Even if you press the  
key, the zoom fine  
adjustments made in the Additional Functions  
mode will not change.  
• The zoom fine adjustments are also effective  
when making reduced/enlarged copies.  
Aditional  
Function  
1) Press the  
key.  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
(–1.0 %)  
cannot be initiated.  
3
2) Press the  
key.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
3
C
b. Zoom Fine Adjustment (Enlargement): Press  
press either the key or press the key and  
3
the  
key.  
then the key.  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
Initial  
setting  
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display, and the current setting in the X  
direction is displayed in the copy exposure  
display.  
(±0%)  
• TheX,YdirectionsappearintheCopyquantity/  
Copy ratio display as follows:  
(+0.2%)  
Adjustment Directions  
Settings  
X direction  
Y direction  
–1  
–2  
(+0.4%)  
(+0.6%)  
(+0.8%)  
(+1.0 %)  
Table 1-407  
• Fine adjustments ratios are displayed in the  
copy exposure display as follows:  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4
4) Make fine adjustments to the copy ratio in the X  
direction.  
2) Press the  
key.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
C
• Press the Exposure keys (  
adjust the copy ratio.  
• TheinitialsettingforZoomFineAdjustmentis  
0%.  
) to  
press either the START key or press the  
4
key and then the key.  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
• The Paper Supply/Jam Location indicator for  
the upper cassette of the copier main unit light  
continuously.Thecurrentsettingfortheupper  
cassette of the copier main unit is displayed in  
the Copy quantity/Copy ratio display.  
The ON/OFF settings for the Auto Cassette  
Switching function are as shown in the table  
below.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
C
press the key and then re-enter the value.  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
• The fine adjustments to the copy ratio in the X  
direction are made.  
• Then “–2” is displayed in the Copy quantity/  
Copy ratio display and the current setting for  
the Y direction is displayed in the copy  
exposure display.  
Auto Cassette Switching  
Settings  
–1  
ON  
6) Adjust the copy ratio in the Y direction.  
OFF  
–0  
• Press the Exposure keys (  
adjust the copy ratio.  
• TheinitialsettingforZoomFineAdjustmentis  
0%.  
) to  
Table 1-408  
4) Press the Number keys (  
0
,
) to select Auto  
1
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
Cassette Switching ON or OFF for the top  
cassette in the copier main unit. The current  
setting is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
C
press the key and then re-enter the value.  
OK  
7) Press the  
key.  
• TheZoomFineAdjustmentissetandU03is  
displayed.  
• The initial setting for Auto Cassette Selection  
is ON.  
OK  
• If the  
key is pressed before the key is  
pressed, the Zoom Fine Adjustment that was  
set is cleared and the copier returns to the  
normal copying mode.  
• If coloured paper or another type of special  
copy stock of the same size is loaded in one  
of the paper cassettes, then you may not want  
the copier to automatically switch the paper  
cassette. Select OFF.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
enter the correct value and it will replace the  
incorrect one that was previously entered, or  
6. Auto Cassette Switching ON/OFF  
• Auto Cassette Switching ON/OFF  
This function sets Auto Paper Selection and Auto  
Cassette Switching for each cassette.  
(Auto Paper Switching automatically selects the  
appropriate copy paper (cassette) according to  
thesizeoftheoriginalandtheselectedcopyratio.  
Auto Cassette Switching automatically supplies  
paper from another paper cassette loaded with  
thesamepapersizeiftheselectedpapercassette  
runs out during continuous copying.)  
C
press the key and after the display clears,  
enter the correct value.  
5) Press the  
key.  
• The bottom cassette of the copier main unit  
lights.  
0
6) Press the Number keys (  
,
) to select Auto  
1
Cassette Switching ON or OFF for the bottom  
cassette in the copier main unit.  
• Repeat steps and to select the Auto  
Cassette Switching for all of the cassettes.  
• This procedure is the same when the copier  
is equipped with the optional Cassette Feed-  
Auto Cassette Switching can be set individually  
for each cassette.  
ON:  
Cassettes are selected automatically.  
OFF: Cassettes are only selected manually.  
• The initial setting for Auto Cassette Switching is  
ON.  
ing Module or Cassette Pedestal.  
Aditional  
Function  
OK  
7) Press the  
key.  
1) Press the  
key.  
• Auto Cassette Switching ON or OFF is set  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
and “U04” is displayed.  
OK  
• If the  
key is pressed before the key is  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
cannot be initiated.  
pressed,thechangedAutoCassetteSwitching  
ON/OFF setting is cleared and the copier  
returns to the normal copying mode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
OK  
• If the  
key is pressed before the key is  
7. Stack Bypass Size Entry ON/OFF  
• When making two-sided and overlay copies, etc.  
on copy paper placed in the stack bypass, you  
must specify the size of the paper.  
pressed, the changed Stack Bypass Size  
Entry ON/OFF setting is cleared and the  
copier returns to the normal copying mode.  
OFF: The “SELECT PAPER SIZE” display  
flashes and the stack bypass paper size  
8. Auto Sort ON/OFF (When equipped  
withtheADF/RDFandStaplerSorter/  
Sorter (options))  
• AutoSortisafunctionwhichautomaticallyoutputs  
copies in the Non-Sort mode if your copier is  
equipped with the ADF/RDF and Stapler Sorter/  
Sorter (options) and the original is only one sheet  
or one set of copies, or in the Sort mode if the  
original is more than one sheet or one set of  
copies.  
is specified when the  
key is pressed  
only if necessary according to the set  
copy mode.  
ON:  
The “SELECT PAPER SIZE” display  
flashes and the stack bypass paper size  
is specified when copy paper is placed in  
the stack bypass.  
Likethepapercassettes,thestackbypass  
can also be selected during Auto Paper  
and Auto Zoom.  
When Auto Sort is OFF, copies are output in the  
mode indicated by the Sorter indicator.  
• The initial setting for Stack Bypass Size  
Specification is OFF.  
ON:  
Copies are automatically output in the  
Sort mode  
Aditional  
Function  
1) Press the  
key.  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
OFF: Copies are output in the mode indicated  
by the Sorter indicator.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
cannot be initiated.  
The Sort mode is selected with the Sorter  
key.  
• The initial setting for Auto Sort is ON.  
Aditional  
Function  
5
2) Press the  
key.  
1) Press the  
key.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
cannot be initiated.  
C
5
press either the key or press the key and  
5
then the key.  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
6
2) Press the  
key.  
• TheStackBypassSizeEntryON/OFFsettings  
appear as follows.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
C
6
press either the key or press the key and  
6
then the key.  
Stack Bypass Size Entry ON/OFF  
Settings  
–1  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
ON  
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
The settings for the Auto Sort appear in the  
Copy quantity/Copy ratio display as follows:  
OFF  
–0  
Table 1-409  
0
4) Press the Number keys (  
,
) to select stack  
1
Auto Sort  
ON  
Settings  
–1  
bypass Size Entry ON or OFF. The current  
setting is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
OFF  
–0  
• The initial setting for Stack Bypass Size Entry  
is OFF.  
Table 1-410  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
enter the correct value and it will replace the  
incorrect one that was previously entered, or  
C
press the key and after the display clears,  
enter the correct value.  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
• Stack Bypass Size Entry ON or OFF is set  
and “U5” is displayed.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4) Press the Number keys (  
Sort ON/OFF.  
,
) to select Auto  
0
1
10. Standard Copy Settings (Store/Ini-  
tialize)  
• The Standard Copy Settings which are set when  
• The settings are displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
the  
key is pressed can be changed and  
• The initial setting for Auto Sort is ON.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
enter the correct value and it will replace the  
incorrect one that was previously entered, or  
stored as desired. In addition, the changed  
Standard Copy Settings can be returned to initial  
settings.  
• The factory-preset (initial) standard copy settings  
are as follows:  
C
press the key and after the display clears,  
enter the correct value.  
• Copy exposure  
Automatic  
Control  
Exposure  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
• Auto Sort ON or OFF is set and “U06” is  
• Paper selection  
Auto Paper Selection  
displayed.  
• Number of copies 1  
OK  
• If the  
key is pressed before the key is  
• Copy output  
• Copying  
Non-Sort  
1 1 Sided  
pressed, the changed setting is cleared and  
thecopierreturnstothenormalcopyingmode.  
• Copy ratio  
Direct (100%)  
Aditional  
Function  
1) Press the  
key.  
9. Feeder Cleaning (When equipped  
with the ADF/RDF (options))  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• This function automatically cleans the ADF/RDF  
(option) Feeding Roller when it becomes dirty  
with pencil lead, etc. If your originals have black  
streaks or appear dirty after feeding them into the  
ADF/RDF, perform Feeder Cleaning. Cleaning is  
accomplished by repeated feeding of blank  
originals (copy sheets) through the ADF/RDF.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
cannot be initiated.  
8
2) Press the  
key.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
C
8
press either the key or press the key and  
8
then the key.  
Aditional  
Function  
OK  
1) Press the  
key.  
3) Press the  
key.  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
Ratio display.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
• ThesettingsforStandardCopySeetingStore/  
Initialize are as shown in the table below.  
cannot be initiated.  
Standard Copy Setting Store/Initialize  
Settings  
–1  
7
2) Press the  
key.  
Store  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
Initialize  
–0  
C
7
press either the key or press the key and  
then re-enter the value.  
Table 1-411  
3) Place about 10 blank A4-size originals (copy  
sheets) in the ADF/RDF. Then, press the  
key.  
0
4) Press the Number keys (  
,
) to select  
1
Standard Copy Settings Store or Initialize.  
• The settings are displayed in the Copy  
quantity/Copy ratio display.  
• Feeder Cleaning begins.  
• To stop Feeder Cleaning before it is com-  
pleted, press the  
• To use this function, your copier must be  
equipped with the ADF/RDF.  
key.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
enter the correct value and it will replace the  
incorrect one that was previously entered, or  
C
• Use blank A4-size originals to perform  
cleaning.  
• Dirt will be picked up on the blank originals  
used for cleaning.  
press the key and after the display clears,  
enter the correct value.  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
• The Standard Copy Settings are stored or  
• During feeder cleaning, “U08” flashes in the  
copyquantitydisplay. Afterfeedercleaningis  
finished , “U08” stops flashing and lights.  
initialized and “U08” is displayed.  
OK  
• If the  
key is pressed before the key is  
pressed, the changed settings for Standard  
Copy Setting Store/Initialize are cleared and  
thecopierreturnstothenormalcopyingmode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
11. Initializing User Mode  
• The settings that were changed in the Additional  
Functions mode can be restored to their initial  
settings.  
Aditional  
Function  
1) Press the  
key.  
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,  
the key turns red and copying operations  
cannot be initiated.  
0
2) Press the  
key twice.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
C
0
presseitherthe keytwiceorpressthe key  
0
and then press the key twice.  
OK  
3) Press the  
key.  
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
0
4) Press the  
key.  
• “–0” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy  
ratio display.  
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,  
enter the correct value and it will replace the  
incorrect one that was previously entered, or  
C
press the key and after the display clears,  
enter the correct value.  
OK  
5) Press the  
key.  
• The Additional Functions are initialized and  
“U00” is displayed.  
Note:  
If the  
OK  
key is pressed before the  
key is  
pressed, theAdditionalFunctionsarenotinitial-  
ized, and the copier will return to the normal  
copying mode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
V. WARNINGS AND  
ACTIONS  
A. Jam Indicator  
1. WhenqFlashesontheControlPanel  
1) Open the front door.  
Drum  
Figure 1-504  
Caution:  
1. The area surrounding the fixing assembly  
gets hot during copying. When clearing a  
paper jam in that area, be careful. Do not  
touch any part of the fixing assembly,  
because you could burn yourself.  
2. Whenremovingjammedpaperorotherwise  
inspecting the inside of the copier, do not  
allow necklaces, bracelets or other metal  
objects to touch the inside of the copier, as  
this may result in burns or electrical shock.  
3. When removing copy paper which has  
become jammed from inside the copier,  
take care not to allow the toner on the  
jammed copy paper to come into contact  
with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty  
your hands and clothing. If they become  
dirty, wash them immediately with cold  
water. Washing with warm water will set the  
toner and make it impossible to remove  
toner stains.  
Figure 1-501  
2) Lift the green lever on the left side to open the  
top of the main unit.  
Figure 1-502  
4. When removing copy paper which has  
become jammed from inside the copier,  
remove the jammed copy paper gently to  
prevent the toner on the paper from  
scattering and entering your eyes or mouth.  
If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash  
immediately with cold water and consult a  
physician.  
3) Slowly remove any jammed paper, taking care  
not to tear it.  
• If a paper jam occurs in a location similar to  
that shown in the picture to the lower, slowly  
turn the green knob in the direction of the  
arrows and remove the jammed paper.  
Notes:  
1. If the jammed paper tears while removing it,  
be sure to remove any pieces remaining  
inside the copier.  
2. Do not touch the purple colored surface of  
the drum; doing so will adversely affect the  
copy quality.  
!
Fixing assembly  
Knob  
Figure 1-503  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4) Gently close the top of the main unit.  
• If a paper jam occurs in a location similar to  
that shown in the picture to the lower, slowly  
pull the paper out in the direction of the  
arrows, taking care not to tear it.  
Figure 1-509  
5) If a paper jam occurs while using the stack  
bypass, remove paper placed there and then  
gently remove any paper jammed in the stack  
bypass so that it does not tear.  
Figure 1-505  
Figure 1-506  
Figure 1-510  
• If you cannot find the jammed paper, lift the  
lever as shown in the picture. If paper is  
jammed here, gently remove the paper so  
that it does not tear.  
6) Close the stack bypass, then open the right  
door of the copier main unit cassette.  
Lever  
Figure 1-511  
Figure 1-507  
Figure 1-508  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
7) Place your finger on the inner guide.  
• Push the inner guide down towards you and  
gently pull out any jammed paper so that it  
does not tear.  
• After inspecting all areas that appeared on  
the control panel, and removing all jammed  
paper, close the front door.  
If the Sorter/Stapler Sorter (options) is  
attached, after closing the main unit, return  
theSorter/StaplerSortertoitsoriginalposition.  
If a paper jam occurred while using the ADF/  
RDF (options), after clearing the paper jam,  
place the first page of the original back in the  
ADF/RDF and press the  
key. The copier  
will make the remaining copies.  
• It is not necessary to enter the number of  
copies again after removing jammed paper.  
The copier automatically senses the number  
of jammed sheets, and adjusts the number of  
copies accordingly.  
Figure 1-512  
Figure 1-513  
Figure 1-515  
8) Securely close the right door of the cassette.  
• When using the stack bypass, place the copy  
paper in the stack bypass.  
2. WhenwFlashesontheControlPanel  
• If q and w both flash at the same time, check q  
first before checking w.  
1) Open the front door.  
Figure 1-514  
Figure 1-516  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
2) Open the right door of the cassette.  
• Place your finger on the green finger grip and  
pull open the inner guide for the copier main  
unit cassette. If the Cassette Feeding Module  
or Paper Deck (options) is attached, open  
both doors.  
4) If you cannot clear the paper jam after following  
steps  
and , then pull out the cassette.  
Note:  
If you cannot see the cassette because the  
front door is in the way, close the front door.  
After you have cleared the paper jam, open and  
close the front door once again.  
Figure 1-517  
3) Gentlypulloutanyjammedpapersothatitdoes  
not tear.  
Figure 1-520  
• If a paper jam is located in the Paper Deck  
(options), then pull the green grip and pull out  
any jammed paper.  
5) Remove any paper that is sticking out of the  
cassette.  
Figure 1-521  
Figure 1-518  
6) Return the cassette to its original position and  
securely close the inner guide and right door for  
the copier main unit cassette, or the right door  
of the Paper Deck (options).  
Figure 1-519  
Figure 1-522  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
7) After inspecting all jam location areas that  
appeared on the control panel, and removing  
any jammed paper, close the front door.  
2) If the indicator e lights, close the Stapler Sorter  
cover and return the Sorter/Stapler Sorter to its  
original position.  
If a paper jam occurred while using the ADF/  
RDF (options), after clearing the paper jam,  
place the first page of the original back in the  
If the indicator e lights after making copies,  
remove any copy paper that is located in the  
Sorter bins.  
ADF/DRF and press the  
key. The copier will  
make the remaining copies.  
4
1
3
2
2
Figure 1-526  
Figure 1-523  
3. If  
Lights (Checking the Right  
Door/Sorter/Stapler Sorter)  
1) If the w indicator lights, then check to make  
surethattherightdoorofthecassetteissecurely  
closed.  
If not, close it securely.  
Figure 1-527  
4
1
3
2
2
Figure 1-524  
Figure 1-528  
Figure 1-525  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
4. If  
Flashes (Replacing the Toner  
Cartridge)  
• If the toner has run low, the Replace Toner  
Cartridge indicator ( ) will flash.  
Followtheproceduredescribedbelowandreplace  
the used toner cartridge with a new one.  
1) Open the front door.  
Lever  
Note:  
Do not lift the green lever on the left side to open  
the top of the main unit. Some toner may spill  
out of the toner cartridge opening.  
Figure 1-530  
Figure 1-531  
Figure 1-529  
3) Prepare a new toner cartridge.  
2) Grip the handle of the toner cartridge.  
Pushinthecartridgeleverandturnthecartridge  
clockwise until it reaches a horizontal position.  
When the handle is at a horizontal position pull  
out the toner cartridge.  
Caution:  
When removing used toner cartridges from the  
copier,removethecartridgescarefullytoprevent  
toner from scattering and entering your eyes or  
mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash  
immediately with cold water and consult a  
physician.  
Figure 1-532  
4) Hold the new toner cartridge level.  
• Shake the cartridge to evenly distribute the  
toner within the cartridge.  
Warning:  
Do not throw toner cartridges into open fires, as  
this may cause the toner to ignite and result in  
burnsorfire.Whendisposingoftonercartridges,  
place them in a bag to prevent toner from  
spattering, and dispose of them as unburnable  
garbage.  
Note:  
Take care when replacing the toner cartridge  
because some toner may spill out of the toner  
cartridge opening. Also, some toner may stick  
to the toner cartridge, so be careful not to get  
toner on your clothes.  
Figure 1-533  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
5) Set the new toner cartridge.  
• Gently insert it into the copier as far as it will  
go.  
• Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted  
all the way into the copier.  
Figure 1-536  
8) Securely close the front door.  
• You cannot close the front door until the main  
unit is closed.  
• Youcannotoperatethecopierifthefrontdoor  
is open.  
Figure 1-534  
6) Pull the toner cartridge sealing tape off.  
• Pressingdownonthetonercartridge, gripthe  
orange sealing tape tab and pull the sealing  
tape straight out of the cartridge.  
• Pullthetonercartridgesealingtapeoffstraight.  
Caution:  
Some toner may stick to the toner cartridge  
seal, so be careful not to get toner on your  
clothes.  
Figure 1-537  
Sealing tape  
Figure 1-535  
7) Grip the toner cartridge handle. Turn the car-  
tridgecounter-clockwiseuntilitlocksintoplace.  
Note:  
Be sure to turn the cartridge until it locks into  
place. If it does not lock into place, toner may  
spill out.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
B. Cleaning the Static Charge  
Eliminator  
1) Open the front door.  
• Remove any originals that have been placed  
on top of the copier so that they do not fall off  
when you open the main unit.  
2) Lift the green lever on the left side to open the  
top of the main unit.  
3) With two fingers, grip the finger grip located on  
the front part of the static charge eliminator.  
Liftandpulloutthestaticchargeeliminatorfrom  
the copier.  
Figure1-540  
5) With two fingers grip the finger grip of the static  
charge eliminator.  
Insert the static charge eliminator back into the  
copier until you hear a click.  
Note:  
Do not touch the purple coloured surface of the  
drum; doing so will adversely affect the copy  
quality.  
Note:  
Becarefulnottotouchthepurple-coloredsurface  
on the drum of the main unit as doing so will  
prevent clear copies from being made.  
Drum  
Figure1-538  
Figure1-541  
4) Usingthestaticchargeeliminatorcleaningbrush  
(attached to the back side of the front door),  
sweep clean the slot on the static charge  
eliminator.  
6) Securely close the top of the main unit.  
• You cannot close the front door until the main  
unit is closed.  
7) Securely close the front door.  
• If the Sorter or Stapler Sorter (options) is  
attached, after closing the main unit, return it  
to its original position.  
• The static charge eliminator cleaning brush is  
very small and easy to lose, so it is  
recommended that you return it to its storage  
locationonthebacksideofthefrontdoorafter  
you have finished cleaning the slot on the  
static charge eliminator.  
• You cannot operate the copier if the front door  
is open.  
Cleaning brush  
Figure1-539  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING  
Clean the following parts once a week or when-  
ever copies appear dirty.  
Warning:  
1. When cleaning the copier, first turn OFF the  
power switch and unplug the power plug.  
Failure to observe these items may result in  
fire or electrical shock.  
2. Clean the copier using a firmly wrung-out  
cloth dampened with a mild cleansing  
detergent. Do not use alcohol, benzene,  
paint thinner, or other inflammable  
substances. If inflammable substances  
come into contact with a high-voltage area  
inside the copier, it may result in fire or  
electrical shock.  
1. Platen glass  
• Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened  
with water or a mild cleaning agent. Then,  
wipe with a dry cloth.  
2. Underside of the platen glass cover  
• Clean the underside of the platen glass cover  
with a cloth dampened with water or a mild  
cleaning agent. Then, wipe with a dry cloth.  
3. Bottom of the ADF/RDF (Accessory)  
• Move the feeding belt with your hand as you  
wipe it with a cloth dampened with water or a  
mild cleaning agent. Then, wipe with a dry  
cloth.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
1–34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 2  
COPYING PROCESS  
G. Step 5 (transfer) .................................. 2-5  
I. IMAGE FORMATION ................................ 2-1  
A. Outline ................................................. 2-1  
B. Latent Static Image Formation Block .. 2-2  
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure) ......................... 2-3  
D. Step 2 (primary charging) .................... 2-3  
E. Step 3 (image exposure) ..................... 2-4  
F. Step 4 (development) .......................... 2-4  
H. Step 6 (separation) .............................. 2-6  
I. Step 7 (fixing) ...................................... 2-7  
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning) ........................ 2-7  
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS ............................. 2-8  
A. Blank Exposure ................................... 2-8  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
I. IMAGE FORMATION  
A. Outline  
Copyboard glass  
Scanning lamp  
Lens  
Primary corona roller  
Pre-exposure lamp  
Cleanig roller  
Fixing roller  
Developing cylinder  
Cleaning assembly  
Copy paper  
Transfer roller  
Static eliminator  
Pressure roller  
Copy paper  
Figure 2-101  
Static latent image formation block  
Primary  
Image exposure  
Pre-exposure  
Development  
Drum  
Transfer  
Manual feeding  
Delivery  
Separation  
Registration  
Cassette  
Fixing  
flow of copy paper  
rotation of drum  
Figure 2-102  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
The copier forms images through the following  
steps, and each of the steps functions as described  
below.  
B. Latent Static Image  
Formation Block  
The block consists of three steps; at the end of  
the block, areas of the drum corresponding to the  
black areas of the original are left with negative  
chargesandtheareasofthedrumcorrespondingto  
the white areas of the original are rid of negative  
charges.  
The images formed on the drum by the pres-  
ence and absence of negative charges are not  
visible to the human eye and, therefore, the term  
latent static images.  
step 1  
step 2  
step 3  
step 4  
step 5  
step 6  
step 7  
step 8  
pre-exposure  
primary charging (negative DC)  
image exposure  
development (AC and negative DC bias)  
transfer (negative DC)  
separation (curvature + static eliminator)  
fixing  
drum cleaning  
The photosensitive drum consists of a  
photoconducting layer on the outside and an alumi-  
num base on the inside; the photoconducting layer  
is made of organic photoconductor (OPC), and the  
aluminum conductor is a photoconductor.  
Time (t)  
Light area  
-500  
Photo conducting layer  
Base  
Primary  
Dark area  
corona  
charg  
Pre-ex  
posure  
(step1)  
ing  
Figure 2-103  
Image exposure  
(step 3)  
-1000  
(step 2)  
Figure 2-104  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure)  
D. Step 2 (primary charging)  
Pre-exposure lamp  
Primary charging roller  
Figure 2-105  
Figure 2-106  
Before primary charging takes place, the light of  
the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the photosen-  
sitive drum to eliminate the residual charges on the  
drum, thereby preventing uneven density.  
The copier uses what is termed primary charg-  
ing, in which a charging roller made of conducting  
material directly charges the photosensitive drum.  
Compared to the conventional corona charging  
method, direct charging provides such advantages  
as a low application voltage and virtual absence of  
ozone.  
The primary charging roller is a special roller  
and possesses different characteristics from the  
transfer roller.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
F. Step 4 (development)  
E. Step 3 (image exposure)  
Toner  
Blade  
Optical image  
Cylinder  
Magnet  
Developing  
cylinder  
Dark  
Light area  
Figure 2-108  
Figure 2-107  
As shown in Figure 2-108, the developing as-  
sembly consists of a fixed magnet, a cylinder that  
rotates around the magnet, and a rubber blade.  
The toner is a one-component toner whose  
main ingredient is magnetic resins.  
In this step, the optical image of an original is  
projected on the photosensitive drum to neutralize  
the charges in the light areas.  
The toner has insulating characteristics and  
becomes positively charged by friction against the  
rubber blade, which remains in contact under pres-  
sure with the cylinder; the toner is evened out to  
form a thin layer on the cylinder owing to the  
elasticity of the rubber.  
Blade  
Toner  
Magnet  
Magnet  
Figure 2-109  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
An AC bias and DC bias (negative component)  
are applied simultaneously* to the developing cylin-  
der and the blade.  
G. Step 5 (transfer)  
* Termed development bias, whose negative com-  
ponent is larger than that of the positive compo-  
nent.  
Positive  
component  
0V  
Transfer  
guide plates  
Transfer  
roller  
Negative  
component  
DC bias  
Figure 2-110  
During copying operation, the drum surface  
potential and development bias (at time of positive  
component) draw toner to the photosensitive drum  
to turn the latent static image into a visible image.  
The excess toner is drawn away from the photosen-  
sitivedrumbytheworkofthedrumsurfacepotential  
andthedevelopingbias(attimeofnegativecompo-  
nent).  
The AC bias (frequency, in particular) mainly  
affects gradation; a lower frequency improves the  
gradation, but tends to result in fogging. The DC  
bias relates to copy density and fogging; a higher  
bias, that is closer to 0 V, darkens the image but in  
turn could lead to fogging.  
Figure 2-111  
The transfer roller deposits negative charges  
on the back of copy paper to attract toner from the  
drum surface to the copy paper.  
The copier uses a roller transfer method, which  
requires a lower transfer voltage compared to co-  
rona transfer methods and generates virtually no  
ozone.  
To prevent transfer failure or soiling of the back  
of copy paper, the transfer guide is grounded  
through a varistor.  
Reference:  
If the transfer guide was grounded, the charges  
that should be on the back of copy paper would  
escape, causing transfer failure; by the same  
token, if the transfer guide is not grounded at  
all, it would become charged and soiled with  
deposits of toner, soiling the back of copy  
paper.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
Reference:  
H. Step 6 (separation)  
If the image on the photosensitive drum fails to  
transfer to copy paper because of a jam or the  
like, the transfer charging roller could become  
soiled with toner.  
To prevent such a problem, the copier uses a  
positive transfer voltage when the scanner is  
movinginreverseorduringpostrotation,thereby  
returning the positively charged toner on the  
transfer roller to the photosensitive drum.  
Transfer roller  
Static eliminator  
Transfer roller  
Figure 2-113  
Thecopierusesacurvatureseparationmethod,  
which separates copy paper from the photosensi-  
tive drum by the rigidity of the paper. However, thin  
paper could at times fail to separate from the drum  
because of its low rigidity. To prevent such a prob-  
lem, a positive charge is applied to the separation  
static eliminator, thereby weakening the static  
attraction for better separation.  
Figure 2-112  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
I. Step 7 (fixing)  
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning)  
Oil application roller  
Cleaning blade  
Upper fixing roller  
Tungsten-halogen  
heater (900W)  
Toner  
Blade  
Scoop-up sheet  
Copy paper  
Figure 2-115  
Lower fixing roller  
In this step, the cleaning blade scrapes off the  
tonerremainingonthephotosensitivedruminprepa-  
rationforthenextcopyrun. Thetonerisgatheredby  
the scoop-up sheet and collected at the rear by a  
blade.  
Figure 2-114  
In this step, the copy paper is pressed between  
two heated rollers to make the toner image  
permanent.  
Topreventthecopypaperfromwrappingaround  
the roller and toner offsetting (adhesion of toner to  
the roller and transfer of the toner to the next copy),  
the surface of the upper fixing roller is cleaned with  
the cleaning roller.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING PROCESS  
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS  
A. Blank Exposure  
Blank exposure is executed to remove the drum  
surface potential of the non-image area that occurs  
as a result of the difference among copy sizes or  
when making copies in Reduce mode.  
The light from the pre-exposure lamp is re-  
flected by the reflecting plate and directed to the  
photosensitive drum.  
The non-image area between sheets of copy  
paper is created by reflecting the light from the pre-  
exposure lamp by a separate reflecting plate,  
exposing the whole area.  
Reflecting  
plates  
Pre-exposure lamp  
Blank exposure  
light path  
No. 6 mirror  
Shutter  
Reflecting plate  
Blank exposure light path  
(for area between sheets)  
Pre-exposure  
light path  
Photosensitive drum  
Figure 2-201  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
2–8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 3  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Inoutlinediagrams,  
signal paths.  
representsmechanicaldrivepaths, and  
indicateselectrical  
Signals in digital circuits are identified as ‘1’ for High and ‘0’ for Low. The voltage of signals,  
however, depends on the circuit.  
Nearly all operations of the product are controlled by a microprocessor; the internal workings  
of the processor are not relevant to the service person’s work and, therefore, are left out of the  
discussions. By the same token, no repairs are prescribed for the PCBs at the user’s premises; for  
this reason, PCBs are discussed by means of block diagrams rather than circuit diagrams.  
Forthepurposeofexplanation, discussionsaredividedintothefollowing:fromsensorstomain  
PCB input ports; from main output ports to loads; and minor control circuits and functions.  
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ............................... 3-1  
A. Functional Construction....................... 3-1  
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ............... 3-2  
C. Inputs to the DC Controller .................. 3-3  
D. Outputs from the DC Controller........... 3-8  
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB ........ 3-13  
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB ........ 3-14  
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette  
Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB ............. 3-16  
H. Main Motor Control Circuit................. 3-21  
I. Basic Sequence of Operations  
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp ......... 3-37  
D. Controlling the Primary Charging  
Roller ................................................. 3-38  
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias .... 3-41  
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator  
Bias.................................................... 3-44  
G. Controlling the Developing Bias ........ 3-46  
H. Copy Density Automatic Control ....... 3-48  
I. Developing/Cleaning Assembly ........ 3-50  
J. Blank Exposure Control..................... 3-53  
K. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning  
Control ............................................... 3-55  
L. Transfer Roller Locking/Releasing  
(2 copies, continuous, AE) ................ 3-22  
J. Original Size Detecton Control .......... 3-23  
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM ............................. 3-27  
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ........ 3-27  
B. Lens Drive System ............................ 3-27  
C. Scanner Drive System....................... 3-31  
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page  
Separation Mode ............................... 3-34  
III. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM .............. 3-35  
A. Outline ............................................... 3-35  
B. Sequence of Operations  
Control ............................................... 3-56  
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 3-57  
A. Pick-Up from the Machine ................. 3-57  
B. Making Two-Sided Copies (1copy) ... 3-61  
C. Duplexing Unit ................................... 3-63  
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding  
Module-A2 ......................................... 3-72  
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding  
Unit-K1............................................... 3-74  
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 3-76  
G. Multifeeder ......................................... 3-82  
H. Identifying the Size of the Cassette... 3-85  
(image formation system) .................. 3-36  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .................. 3-87  
J. Detecting Jams.................................. 3-92  
V. POWER SUPPLY .................................. 3-101  
A. Outline of Power Distribution........... 3-101  
B. Power Supply Circuitry .................... 3-102  
C. Detecting Errors on the Power Supply  
PCB ................................................. 3-103  
D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power  
Supply Circuit .................................. 3-104  
VI. SERVICE MODE ................................... 3-105  
A. Outline ............................................. 3-105  
B. Using Service Mode ........................ 3-105  
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’) ............... 3-107  
D. I/O Mode (‘2’) ................................... 3-110  
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’) ..................... 3-114  
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’) ...... 3-117  
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)............ 3-118  
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)........................... 3-120  
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS................................. 3-121  
A. Copier Self Diagnosis ...................... 3-121  
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding  
Unit .................................................. 3-124  
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis ................. 3-125  
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis....................... 3-126  
VIII.STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .... 3-127  
A. Electrical .......................................... 3-127  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
I. BASIC OPERATIONS  
A. Functional Construction  
The machine can be divided into four functional blocks: pick-up/feeding system, exposure system, image  
formation system, and control system.  
Control system  
Control panel  
Copyboard  
Exposure system  
Illuminating  
assembly  
Optical  
path  
Control circuit  
assembly  
Image formation  
system  
Primary corona  
assembly  
Drum  
cleaning  
assembly  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Developing  
assembly  
Fixing  
assembly  
Separation  
Transfer  
Tray  
Manual feeding  
assembly  
Pick-up  
control  
assembly  
Feeding  
assembly  
Duplexing  
unit  
Cassette 1  
Pick-up/feeding  
system 1  
Cassette 2  
Cassette  
Unit  
Pick-up/feeding  
system 3 (accessory)  
Cassette  
Unit  
Cassette  
Unit  
Flow of high voltage/toner  
Flow of paper  
Flow of light  
Flow of electrical signals  
Figure 3-101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
its pre-programmed instructions and sends signals  
to drive such loads as motors, solenoids, and lamps  
as necessary.  
B. Outline of Electrical Cir-  
cuitry  
The machine’s microprocessor is capable of  
reading analog signals as well as digital signals  
using its A/D converter.  
The machine’s most electrical mechanisms are  
controlledbythemicroprocessoronitsDCcontroller  
PCB. The microprocessor reads the input signals  
from the sensors and operation keys according to  
Fixing roller  
DC controller PCB  
heater  
Heater driver PCB  
RDF (accessory)  
Sorter (accessory)  
Composite power supply  
CPU  
+5V  
+24V  
+34V  
Q301  
CPU  
Scanning lamp  
Sensor  
Toner level  
detection  
High-  
voltage  
circuit  
Q307  
ROM  
Developing cylinder  
Bias PCB  
HV  
AE sensor PCB  
Transfer charging  
Static eliminator  
Primary charging  
Q308  
RAM  
Main thermistor  
Sub thermistor  
Main motor  
driver PCB  
M1  
Main motor  
Pre-exposure lamp  
LA  
Scanner motor  
Lens motor  
Duplexing motor  
Motor  
Fan  
SL  
Q311  
IPC  
Control panel  
Heat exhaust fan, Feeding fan,Scanner cooling fan  
Change solenoid  
Multifeeder holding plate solenoid  
Blanking shutter solenoid  
Primary charging roller cleaning solenoid  
Transfer charging roller release solenoid  
Duplexing change solenoid  
Registration clutch  
Duplexing registration clutch  
Pick-up clutch 1, 2  
CL  
Multifeeder pick-up clutch  
Control card (accessory)  
Sensor  
(accessory)  
Cassette unit motor  
Paper deck motor  
Motor  
CL  
Cassette driver PCB/  
Paper deck driver PCB  
Cassette pick-up clutch  
Deck pick-up clutch  
Figure 3-102  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
C. Inputs to the DC Controller  
1. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/5)  
DC controller PCB  
5V  
J 315B- 3  
- 4  
- 5  
Scanner home  
position sensor  
SCHP  
When the scanner is at home position, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS1, '1')  
PS 1  
PS 2  
PS 3  
5V  
J 310A- 3  
- 2  
- 1  
Lens home  
position sensor  
When the home position sensor detects lens, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS2, '1')  
LHP  
5V  
J 315A- 6  
- 5  
- 4  
Blanking shutter  
home position  
sensor  
BSHP  
When the home position sensor detects the  
blanking shutter, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS3, '1')  
5V  
J 309- 7  
- 8  
Cassette 1 paper  
sensor  
CPD1* When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS4, '0')  
- 9  
PS 4  
PS 5  
PS 6  
PS 7  
PS 8  
PS 10  
5V  
J 316- 11  
- 10  
Multifeeder paper  
sensor  
MFPD* When paper is present in the multifeeder assembly, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS5, '0')  
- 9  
5V  
J 316- 12  
- 13  
Registration  
sensor  
RPD  
When PS6 detects paper, '1'.  
- 14  
(when the light blocking-plate is at PS6, '1')  
5V  
J 316- 5  
- 4  
Separation  
sensor  
When PS7 detects paper, '0'.  
SPD*  
- 3  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS 7, '0')  
5V  
J 309- 15  
- 14  
Delivery sensor  
DPD*  
When PS8 does not detect paper, '0'.  
- 13  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS8, '0')  
5V  
J 309- 10  
- 12  
Right door sensor  
RDOP* When the right door opens, '0'.  
- 11  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS10, '0')  
Figure 3-103  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Inputs to the DC Controller (2/5)  
DC controller  
5V  
J 310A- 12  
- 11  
- 10  
Copyboard cover  
sensor  
CVOP  
When the copyboard cover is open, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS24)  
PS 11  
5V  
J 309- 6  
- 5  
Vertical path roller 2  
paper sensor  
When PS12 detects paper, '1'.  
VP2P  
PS 12  
PS 13  
PS 14  
PS 15  
PS 16  
- 4  
5V  
J 309- 1  
- 3  
Cassette 2 paper  
sensor  
CPD2*  
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS13, '0').  
- 2  
5V  
J 325- 3  
- 2  
Duplexing unit outlet  
paper sensor  
DUEX  
When paper is present at the duplexing unit outlet, '1'.  
- 1  
5V  
J 320- 1  
- 2  
Duplexing unit inlet  
paper sensor  
DUIN  
When paper is present at the duplexing unit inlet, '1'.  
- 3  
5V  
J 314- 12  
- 13  
Vertical path roller 1  
paper sensor  
VP1P  
When paper is present at the vertical  
path roller 1 sensor, '1'.  
- 14  
Figure 3-104  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Inputs to the DC controller (3/5)  
DC controller  
J 310B- 8  
- 7  
- 9  
Original size sensor 2  
SIZE2  
Varies according to paper size.  
PS 21  
5V  
J 310B- 2  
- 1  
- 3  
SIZE1  
Varies according to paper size.  
Original size sensor 1  
PS 23  
Figure 3-105  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (4/5)  
DC controller PCB  
+24V  
J 601  
- 1  
J 310A  
- 9  
- 8  
- 7  
- 6  
- 2  
AE  
- 3  
AE sensor  
(1/2)  
AEREF  
- 4  
See p. 3-48.  
J 651  
- 6  
J 318  
- 1  
CS  
- 5  
- 2  
CSZ1  
CSZ2  
CSZ3  
CSZ4  
- 4  
- 3  
Cassette size  
sensor 1  
- 3  
- 4  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 5  
- 1  
- 6  
J 801  
J 802  
J 803  
Control panel  
J 305  
J 306  
Keys and LEDs are wired in the form of  
a matrix on the control panel PCB, and  
the DC controller turns on the LEDs and  
reads key inputs.  
J 316B  
- 6  
5V  
- 7  
Detects the width of the copy  
paper stacked in the multifeeder.  
MFPWD  
VR1  
- 8  
J 324A  
- 1  
TH1  
Main thermistor  
(TH1)  
-2  
J 324A  
- 5  
See p. 3-87.  
TH2  
Sub thermistor  
(TH2)  
-6  
J 651  
- 6  
J 318  
- 7  
CS  
- 5  
- 8  
CSZ1  
CSZ2  
CSZ3  
CSZ4  
- 4  
- 9  
Cassette size  
sensor 2  
- 3  
- 10  
- 11  
- 12  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 1  
Figure 3-106  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
5. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (5/5)  
Service switch PCB  
Service switch  
DC controller PCB  
When the switch turns on, '0'.  
(starts service mode)  
SRSW  
SW850  
Density correction volume  
VR850  
+5V  
J306-7  
-8  
CDC  
Adjusts the developing DC bias  
-9  
AE sensor  
adjustment volume  
VR851  
AE sensor (2/2)  
Figure 3-107  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
D. Outputs from the DC Controller  
1. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/5)  
Main switch  
ON  
DC controller PCB  
Door switch  
Cassette heater (H4)  
Drum heater (H3)  
Cassette heater (H5)  
Composite power  
supply PCB  
+5V  
Anti-condensation  
switch (SW1)  
RL101  
When '0' RL101 turns ON.  
(ON when the power is OFF)  
EHTRL*  
Lens heater (R1)  
Lens heater (R2)  
When RL101 is ON and SW1  
is ON, the heater (R1, R2)  
turns ON.  
24V  
When '0', RL103 turns ON.  
(ON when the power is ON)  
Fuse (FU1)  
RL103  
ACOFF  
J319  
–4  
+5V  
Fixing heater  
(H1)  
–1  
B
–2  
HTON* When the heater is ON, '0'.  
Fixing  
A
heater  
–3  
A
driver  
B
HTRD  
See p. 3-89.  
Fluorescent heater  
switch (SW2)  
Fluorescent lamp  
heater (H2)  
Fluorescent lamp  
(LA1)  
Scanning  
lamp control  
circuit  
Communicates with the composite  
power supply PCB.  
Microprocessor  
Primary charging roller  
Developing cylinder  
Transfer roller  
High-voltage  
circuit  
Static eliminator  
Toner level  
detection  
sensor  
When '0', "ADD TONER"  
TEP*  
is indicated.  
Antenna Sensor  
Figure 3-108  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/5)  
DC controller PCB  
+24V  
J312A- 5  
- 6  
Registration  
clutch  
When '0', the registration clutch turns ON.  
(registration roller rotates)  
CL1  
CL2  
CL3  
CL4  
CL5  
CL6  
RGCLD*  
+24V  
J312A- 3  
- 4  
Cassette 1  
pick-up clutch  
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.  
(pick-up roller rotates)  
PUCLD1*  
+24V  
J312A- 1  
- 2  
Multifeeder  
pick-up clutch  
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.  
(multifeeder pick-up roller rotates)  
MFPUCLD*  
+24V  
J312B- 9  
- 10  
Duplexing unit  
outlet clutch  
When '0', the duplexing unit outlet  
clutch (CL4) turns ON.  
CL4D*  
+24V  
J312B- 5  
- 6  
Cassette 2  
pick-up clutch  
When '0', the cassette 2 pick-up  
clutch (CL5) turns ON.  
CL5D*  
+24V  
J312B- 3  
- 4  
When '0', the Slip roller clutch (CL6) turns ON.  
Slip roller clutch  
CL6D*  
+5V  
+36V  
J501 J206  
- 1  
- 2  
- 1  
- 2  
Main motor  
J502  
- 4  
J312A  
- 10  
- 7  
M1  
See p. 3-21.  
- 1  
MLOCK*  
MMD  
- 2  
- 8  
Main motor  
drive PCB  
- 3  
- 9  
J302  
J324B  
J324A  
Scanner motor  
Lens motor  
See p. 3-33.  
See p. 3-29.  
M2  
M3  
Figure 3-109  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (3/5)  
DC controller PCB  
J326- 1  
COM A  
- 2  
- 3  
- 4  
- 5  
- 6  
COM B  
While M5 is rotating, alternates  
between '1' and '0.  
(pulse signal)  
A
Duplexing  
unit motor  
M5  
A*  
B
B*  
Figure 3-110  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (4/5)  
DC controller PCB  
+24V  
When '1', the solenoid turns OFF.  
(blanking shutter width control)  
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.  
(lens mount moved)  
J324B- 7  
- 8  
Change solenoid  
SL1  
SL2  
SL3  
SL4  
SL5  
SL6  
SL 8  
CHSLD*  
+24V  
J312B- 7  
- 8  
Multifeeder holding  
plate solenoid  
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.  
(holding plate released)  
MFSLD*  
+24V  
J315A- 8  
- 7  
Blanking shutter  
solenoid  
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.  
(blanking shutter opened)  
BSSLD*  
+24V  
J324A- 8  
- 7  
Primary charging roller  
cleaning solenoid  
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.  
(cleaning pad locked)  
PCLSLD*  
+24V  
J316- 2  
- 1  
Transfer charging roller  
releasing solenoid  
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.  
(transfer roller lowered)  
TRSLD*  
24V  
J324B- 3  
- 4  
When '0', the oil application  
solenoid (SL6) turns ON.  
(sensor drive)  
Oil application solenoid  
SL6D*  
24V  
J320- 5  
- 4  
Paper deflecting  
plate solenoid  
When '0', the paper deflecting plate  
solenoid (SL8) turns ON.  
SL8D*  
(duplexing unit inlet opened)  
Figure 3-111  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
5. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (5/5)  
DC controller PCB  
+24V  
J 310A- 4  
Scanner cooling fan  
When '0', the Scanner cooling fan turns ON.  
(Scanner cooling fan rotates)  
- 5  
(FM2)  
FM2D  
+24V  
J 315B- 2  
Heat exhaust fan  
When '0', the heat exhaust fan turns ON.  
(heat exhaust fan rotates)  
- 1  
(FM1)  
HEFD*  
+24V  
J 314A- 7  
Feeding fan  
When '0', the feeding fan turns ON.  
(feeding fan rotates)  
- 8  
(FM4)  
FDFD*  
+24V  
J307  
J12-4  
-3  
Power supply  
cooling fan  
(FM3)  
Composite power  
supply PCB  
When '1', the power supply cooling fan turns ON.  
PSCFD  
-2  
+24V  
J 401  
- 1  
J 315A  
- 10  
Pre-exposure  
lamp  
When '0', the pre-exposure lamp  
turns ON.  
- 2  
- 9  
PEXP*  
+24V  
J 315B  
- 9  
When changes from '0' to '0', the  
count is incremented.  
Total copy counter  
- 8  
TCNTD*  
+5V  
J 306A- 11  
- 13  
CCD*  
When '0', the count is incremented.  
When '0', the control card is present.  
- 12  
Control Card N  
CCDT*  
- 10  
5V  
J 311A- 7  
- 8  
Remote  
Diagnostic  
Device II  
- 6  
- 5  
- 4  
When '0', a copy is counted.  
AST-CNTP*  
AST-TXD  
AST-RXD  
Transmission data (IPC communication)  
Reception data (IPC communication)  
24V  
- 2  
- 3  
Figure 3-112  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-B2  
Driver PCB  
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB (1/1)  
DC controller PCB  
Cassette driver PCB  
5V  
J 110- 1  
- 3  
Cassette 3  
vertical path  
sensor  
When PS1 detects paper, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate  
is at PS1cu, '1')  
C3VPD  
PS1cu  
- 2  
5V  
J 110- 4  
- 6  
Cassette 3  
paper sensor  
When paper is present in the  
cassette, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate  
is not at PS2cu, '0')  
C3PD  
PS2cu  
- 5  
J 651  
- 6  
J 110  
- 7  
CS2  
- 5  
- 8  
C2SZ1  
C2SZ2  
C2SZ3  
C2SZ4  
- 4  
- 9  
Cassette 3  
size detection  
- 3  
- 10  
- 11  
- 12  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 1  
+24V  
J 115- 1  
- 2  
Cassette 3  
pick-up clutch  
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.  
(pick-up roller rotates)  
CL1cu  
RGCLD*  
+24V  
J 114- 1  
- 2  
CMA  
While M1cu is rotating, alternates  
- 3  
+24V  
CMA*  
between '1' and '0'.  
(pulse signal)  
Cassette  
unit motor  
- 4  
M1cu  
- 5  
CMB  
- 6  
CMB*  
Figure 3-113  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2  
Driver PCB  
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB (1/2)  
DC controller PCB  
Cassette driver PCB  
5V  
J 110- 1  
- 3  
Cassette 3  
vertical path  
sensor  
When PS1cu detects paper, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is  
at PS1cu, '1')  
C3VPD  
PS1cu  
- 2  
5V  
J 110- 4  
- 5  
Cassette 3  
paper sensor  
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is not  
at PS2cu, '0')  
C3PD*  
PS2cu  
PS3cu  
- 6  
5V  
J 120- 13  
- 15  
Cassette 4  
vertical path  
sensor  
When PS3cu detects paper, '1'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is  
at PS3cu, '1')  
C4VPD  
- 14  
5V  
J 120- 10  
- 12  
Cassette 4  
paper sensor  
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking pale is not  
at PS4cu, '0')  
CS4PD*  
PS4cu  
PS5cu  
- 11  
5V  
J 120- 1  
- 3  
Cassette right  
door sensor  
When the right door is open, '0'.  
(when the light-blocking plate is not  
at PS5cu, '0')  
CRDOP*  
- 2  
J 651  
- 6  
J 110  
- 7  
CS3  
- 5  
- 8  
C3SZ1  
C3SZ2  
C3SZ3  
C3SZ4  
- 4  
- 9  
Cassette 3  
size detection  
- 3  
- 10  
- 11  
- 12  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 1  
J 651  
- 6  
J 120  
- 4  
CS4  
- 5  
- 5  
C4SZ1  
C4SZ2  
C4SZ3  
C4SZ4  
- 4  
- 6  
Cassette 4  
size detection  
- 3  
- 7  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 8  
- 1  
- 9  
Figure 3-114  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB (2/2)  
DC controller PCB  
Cassette driver PCB  
+24V  
When '0', the pick-up clutch  
turns ON.  
(pick-up roller rotates)  
J 125- 1  
- 2  
Cassette 3  
pick-up clutch  
CL1cu  
CL2cu  
C3PUCLD*  
+24V  
When '0', the pick-up clutch  
turns ON.  
(pick-up roller rotates)  
J 125- 3  
- 4  
Cassette 4  
pick-up clutch  
C4PUCLD*  
+24V  
J 114- 1  
- 2  
CMA  
While M1cu is rotating,  
- 3  
+24V  
CMA*  
alternates between '1' and '0'.  
(pulse signal)  
Cassette  
unit motor  
- 4  
M1cu  
- 5  
CMB  
- 6  
CMB*  
Figure 3-115  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
Driver PCB  
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (1/3)  
DC controller PCB  
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB  
5V  
J 110- 1  
Cassette 3 vertical  
path detection  
- 3  
- 2  
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.  
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)  
C3VPD  
PS1cu  
5V  
J 110- 4  
- 6  
Cassette 3 paper  
detection  
When paper is present in the cassette, '1'.  
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)  
C3PD*  
PS2cu  
PS3cu  
- 5  
5V  
J 120- 13  
- 15  
Cassette 4 vertical  
path detection  
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.  
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)  
C4VPD  
- 14  
5V  
J 120- 10  
- 12  
Cassette 4 paper  
detection  
When paper is present in the cassette, '1'.  
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)  
C4/5PD  
PS4cu  
- 11  
5V  
J 120- 1  
- 3  
When the right door is open, '1'.  
(the light-blocking plate is not at the sensor)  
CRDOP*  
5V  
Right door detection  
PS5cu  
PS6cu  
- 2  
J 130- 1  
- 3  
Cassette 5 vertical  
path detection  
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.  
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)  
C5VPD  
- 2  
J 130- 4  
- 6  
Cassette 5 paper  
detection  
PS7cu  
- 5  
Figure 3-116  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (2/3)  
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB  
DC controller PCB  
J 218  
- 6  
J 110  
- 7  
- 8  
CS3  
- 5  
C3SZ1  
C3SZ2  
C3SZ3  
C3SZ4  
- 4  
- 9  
Cassette 3 size  
detection PCB  
- 3  
- 10  
- 11  
- 12  
See p. 3-85.  
- 2  
- 1  
J 228  
- 6  
J 120  
- 4  
CS4/CS5  
- 5  
- 5  
C4SZ1/C5SZ1  
C4SZ2/C5SZ2  
C4SZ3/C5SZ3  
C4SZ4/C5SZ4  
- 4  
- 6  
Cassette 4 size  
detection PCB  
See p. 3-85.  
- 3  
- 7  
- 2  
- 8  
- 1  
- 9  
J 238  
- 6  
J 130  
- 7  
- 5  
- 8  
- 4  
- 9  
Cassette 5 size  
detection PCB  
- 3  
- 10  
- 11  
- 12  
- 2  
- 1  
Figure 3-117  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (3/3)  
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB  
DC controller PCB  
24V  
J135  
- 1  
- 2  
Cassette 3  
pick-up clutch  
CL1cu  
C3PUCLD*  
24V  
When '0', CL1cu turns ON.  
J135  
- 3  
Cassette 4  
pick-up clutch  
- 4  
CL2cu  
CL3cu  
C4/5PUCLD*  
24V  
When '0', CL2cu/CL3cu turns on.  
J135  
- 5  
Cassette 5  
pick-up clutch  
- 6  
J114- 1  
- 2  
COM A  
A
- 3  
While M1cu/M3cu is rotating,  
alternates between '1' and '0'.  
(pulse signal)  
A*  
- 4  
Pick-up  
motor 1  
M1cu  
COM B  
- 5  
B
- 6  
B*  
J134-1  
-2  
-3  
-4  
Pick-up  
motor 2  
M2cu  
-5  
-6  
J103-6  
J1-26  
*When '0',  
SELECT  
of CL2cu/CL3cu, CL2cu is selected.  
of M1cu/M2cu, M1cu is driven.  
The cassette size is of cassette 4.  
of PS4/PS7cu, PS4cu is detected.  
*When '1',  
of CL2cu/CL3cu, CL3u is selected.  
of M1cu/M2cu, M1cu/M2cu is driven.  
The cassette size is of cassette 5.  
of PS4/PS7cu, PS7cu is detected.  
*When '0', cassette 4 input/output is  
selected; when '1', cassette 5  
input/output is selected.  
Figure 3-118  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Inputs to Paper Deck-K1 Controller (1/2)  
Pedestal controller PCB  
5V  
J 111- 6  
- 5  
Right door open  
sensor  
RDOP*  
When "0", right door is open.  
(light-blocking plate is not at PS5)  
- 4  
PS 5  
PS 2  
PS 1  
PS 3  
PS 4  
PS 6  
5V  
J 112- 3  
- 2  
Deck vertical path  
roller paper sensor  
When PS2 detects paper, "1".  
(light-blocking palate is at PS2)  
DVRPD  
- 1  
5V  
J 112- 6  
- 5  
DPD  
When paper is present in paper desk, "1".  
(light-blocking plate is at PS1)  
- 4  
Deck paper sensor  
5V  
J 112- 9  
- 8  
Deck lifter position  
sensor  
DLD  
When lifter is at upper position, "1".  
(when light-blocking plate is at PS3)  
- 7  
5V  
J 113- 3  
- 2  
Deck lifter upper  
limit sensor  
DEL  
When lifter reaches upper limit, "1".  
(when light-blocking plate is at PS4)  
- 1  
5V  
J 113- 10  
- 7  
- 8  
Deck open sensor  
DEOP* When "0", deck is open.  
(light-blocking plate is not at PS6)  
SW1  
J 114- 1  
- 2  
SIZE 2  
SIZE 1  
Deck size switch  
PCB  
See p. 3-81.  
- 3  
Figure 3-119  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
5. Outputs from Paper Deck-K1 Controller (2/2)  
Pedestal controller PCB  
J221  
- 1  
J201  
- 1  
34V  
34V  
- 2  
- 2  
Pedestal motor  
M1  
J222  
- 5  
J109  
- 1  
"1" or "0" depending on the type of copier, thereby  
changing revolution.  
- 4  
- 2  
PEDMD (output) When "1", pedestal motor is ON.  
- 3  
- 3  
LOCK (input)  
When "0", pedestal motor is error.  
- 2  
- 4  
- 1  
- 5  
5V  
24V  
J111-2  
-3  
Vertical path roller 3  
drive clutch  
CL3  
CL1  
CL2  
CL3D*  
When "0" , CL3 goes ON.  
When "0" , CL1 goes ON.  
24V  
J113-4  
-5  
Deck pick-up clutch  
CL1D*  
24V  
J113-6  
-7  
Deck vertical path  
roller drive clutch  
CL2D*  
When "0" , CL2 goes ON.  
When "0" , CL4 goes ON.  
CL4D*  
J114-4  
-5  
Deck lifter drive  
clutch  
CL4  
SL1  
J114-6  
-7  
24V  
Deck pick-up roller  
release solenoid  
DEPRL*  
When "0" , SL1 goes ON.  
Figure 3-120  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Operations  
H. Main Motor Control Circuit  
Whenthemainmotorsignal(MMD)fromtheDC  
controller circuit goes ‘1’, the motor driver drive  
circuit turns ON, thereby causing the main motor  
(M1) to rotate at a specific speed.  
While the main motor is rotating at a specific  
speed, the motor driver PCB sends the constant  
speedstatussignal(MLOCK*0)totheDCcontroller  
PCB. If a fluctuation occurs in the rotation of the  
main motor for some reason, the MLOCK* signal  
goes ‘1’.  
1. Outline  
Figure 3-121 shows the circuit that controls the  
main motor (M1), and the circuit has the following  
functions:  
q Turns ON/OFF the main motor.  
w Controls the main motor to a specific speed.  
The main motor (M1) is a DC motor equipped  
with a built-in clock pulse generator. When the  
motor rotates, clock pulse signals (MMCLK*) are  
generated according to the revolution of the motor.  
The speed control circuit controls the main motor  
(M1) to a specific speed by matching the phase of  
the frequency of the reference signal with the  
frequency of the clock pulses.  
If MLOCK*=0 continues for about 1 sec while  
the main motor drive signal (MMD) is ‘1’, the DC  
controller identifies an error condition and stops the  
main motor and issues ‘E010’ at the same time.  
36V  
J 501  
- 1  
J 206  
Power  
Supply  
PCB  
- 2  
J 312A  
- 8  
J 502  
- 2  
MMD  
Clock pulse generator  
Drive circuit  
DC controller  
PCB  
Drive  
current  
J 312A  
- 7  
J 502  
- 1  
MLOCK*  
M1  
Phase control  
circuit  
Main motor  
Hall IC output  
MMCLK  
Reference signal  
Main motor driver PCB  
Figure 3-121  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
I. Basic Sequence of Operations (2 copies, continuous, AE)  
Power switch  
ON  
Copy Start key  
ON  
WMUP WMUPR STBY  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
SCFW  
SCRV LSTR STBY  
AER  
Main motor (M1)  
Primary charging bias  
Transfer bias  
Static eliminator bias  
Scanning lamp  
Scanner  
Developing AC bias  
Developing DC bias  
Figure 3-122  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Function  
Remarks  
Period  
WMUP (Warm-  
Up)  
From switch on until the fixing roller  
temperature reaches 165°C for the  
black developer or 145°C for the CT  
Unit. (about 75 seconds at an ambient  
temperature of 20°C)  
Allows time for fixing  
roller to warm up.  
Warm-up time varies  
with fixing roller  
temperature at power  
ON. When the COPY  
START key is lighting  
green.  
WMUPR (Warm- Until the fixing roller temperature  
Keeps fixing roller  
temperature uniform.  
• After the WMUPR  
period ends, the  
READY/WAIT  
indicator changes  
from orange to green.  
• Even when the fixing  
roller has warmed up,  
it rotates for at least  
3.5 seconds.  
Up Rotation)  
reaches 175°C to 180°C for the black  
developer or 155°C to 160°C for the CT  
unit.  
Stabilizes drum  
sensitivity to prepare for  
copying.  
STBY (standby)  
• From when LSTR ends until when  
the Copy Start key is pressed or the  
power switch is turned OFF.  
• From when the power switch is  
turned ON until the Copy Start key is  
pressed.  
Waits for a press on an  
operation key (e.g.,  
Copy Start key).  
• 2 min or more after  
LSTR ends, the  
display on the control  
panel switches to  
standard mode.  
INTR  
(initial rotation)  
For at least 1 sec after the Copy Start  
key is pressed.  
Stabilizes the drum  
sensitivity in preparation  
for copying operation.  
AER  
(AE rotation)  
Moves the scanner  
AE mode only.  
forward/in reverse about  
65 mm to measure the  
density of the original.  
SCFW  
While the scanner is moving forward.  
Illuminates the original  
by the scanning lamp,  
and the reflected optical  
image is projected on  
the photosensitive drum  
through mirrors and  
lenses.  
(scanner forward) • The distance traveled forward  
depends on the cassette size and the  
reproduction ratio.  
• The speed for forward travel  
depends on the selected  
reproduction ratio.  
SCRV  
(scanner reverse)  
While the scanner is moving in reverse.  
Returns the scanner to  
the home position in  
preparation for the next  
copying operation.  
The registration signal is  
generated and the copy  
paper is fed to the  
transfer assembly.  
LSTR  
(last rotation)  
From when SCRV ends until when the  
copy paper moves past the delivery  
sensor.  
Removes charges from  
the surface of the  
photosensitive drum as  
post copying  
Discharges the last  
copy.  
processing.  
Table 3-101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
when the copyboard cover is closed and identify the  
original as being any of the default paper sizes.  
Each original size sensor consists of a LED and  
a phototransistor: the LED illuminates the original,  
and the photodiode receives the reflected light and  
sends the output to the DC controller circuit.  
The size of originals in the DF (option) is identi-  
fied by the DF and communicated to the machine.  
When the DF is used, the machine executes auto  
paper selection, auto reproduction selection, re-  
duction layout, and enlargement layout based on  
this size data.  
J. Original Size Detection  
Control  
1. Outline  
The machine offers auto paper selection, auto  
reproduction selection, reduction layout, and en-  
largement layout functions, all of which require the  
identification of the size of the originals being used.  
To identify the size, the machine has two to four  
original size sensors under its copyboard glass  
which check the presence/absence of an original  
Copyboard cover open/  
closed sensor  
PS11  
A4  
A3  
A4R  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-123 (A configuration)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
This method enables identification of the size of  
a black original. However, the sensor output levels  
will not change in the following cases:  
a. A3 black original  
b. book original (the thickness tends to prevent  
changes in the sensor level)  
2. Operations  
When the copyboard cover is brought down to  
about 30° or less, the copyboard cover sensor  
(PS11)turnsON, i.e., thelight-blockingplateblocks  
PS11.  
For 15 sec after PS11 turns ON or until the Copy  
Start key is pressed, the machine reads the output  
level of each sensor at intervals of about 0.1 sec. If  
the output level remains unchanged during the  
period, the machine identifies the presence of an  
original at the sensor location in question, thereby  
identifying the size of the original according to the  
status combinations shown in Table 3-102.  
Reference:  
For a. or b. above, the machine can identify the  
size wrongly.  
Copyboard cover  
Original  
15°~13°  
PS11:ON  
Copyboard glass  
ON  
OFF  
Level does Level changes  
not change  
Original  
detection 2  
Original  
detection 1  
Figure 3-124  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Original Size Detection  
The size of an original is identified with reference to the presence/absence of an original at each sensor  
based on the sensor output combinations given in Table 3-102.  
• Level Does Not Change  
The sensor output when the copyboard cover is closed to from 15° to 30° and the sensor output 15 sec  
thereafter are the same (detecting an original).  
• Level Changes  
The sensor output when the copyboard cover is closed to from 15° to 30° and the sensor output when  
the copyboard cover is fully closed are different (not detecting an original).  
Sensor level  
Size  
A3  
1
2
Does not change Does not change  
A4R  
Changes  
Does not change  
Changes  
Does not change  
Changes  
A4  
A5  
Changes  
Table 3-102 (A configuration original)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
B. Lens Drive System  
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM  
1. Outline  
A. Varying the Reproduction  
Ratio  
Thelensdrivesystemisdrivenbythelensmotor  
(M3), and the drive generated by the lens motor is  
transmitted to the blanking shutter exposure unit  
through a relay gear. (See p. 3-53.)  
Tomovethelens, therelaygearisengagedwith  
the lens gear by turning ON the change solenoid  
(SL1). When the lens motor rotates in the direction  
of the arrow in this condition, the lens moves in the  
direction of enlargement ( ) because of the drive  
coming through the relay lens gear and the lens  
cable.  
In reduction mode, the blank exposure shutter  
operates according to the degree of movement of  
the lens, thereby blanking out both sides of the copy  
to suit the selected reduction ratio.  
The machine’s scanner lens home position  
sensor (PS2) is located in the middle of the scanner  
lensdriverailsothatthescannerlenshomeposition  
may be detected quickly at power-on, thereby  
shortening the first copy time. (Additionally, a mere  
pressoneachRatiobuttoncausesthescannerlens  
to move to the appropriate position to shorten the  
first copy time.)  
The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of  
the photosensitive drum is varied by the lens drive  
system, and that in the peripheral direction of the  
photosensitive drum is varied by the scanner drive  
system.  
Thelensdrivesystemusesazoomlens, andthe  
reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the photo-  
sensitive drum is varied by changing both the posi-  
tion of the lens and the focal distance as shown in  
Figure 3-201.  
The scanner drive system moves the No. 1  
mirror faster in relation to the peripheral speed of  
the photosensitive drum (reduction) or slower  
(enlargement), thereby varying the reproduction  
ratiointheperipheraldirectionofthephotosensitive  
drum.  
DIRECT  
F'  
F
REDUCE  
F1'  
F1  
ENLARGE  
F2'  
F2  
Figure 3-201  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Lens motor (M3)  
Relay gear  
Change solenoid (SL1)  
SL1 'ON'  
(lens drive)  
SL1 'OFF'  
(blank exposure  
unit drive)  
Change solenoid (SL1)  
Lens motor (M3)  
Relay gear  
Lens cable  
Lens  
Lens home  
position sensor  
(PS2)  
Enlargement  
Cam groove  
DC controller  
Figure 3-202  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
In this condition, the motor is kept stationary by  
keeping LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB* all ‘0’.  
2. Lens Motor Drive Circuit  
The lens motor (M3) is a stepping motor and is  
rotated by the drive power supply signal LNSCA/  
LNSCB and pulse signals LNSA/LNSA* and LNSB/  
LNSB*.  
b. Lens Motor in Operation  
• LNSCA=1  
LNSCB=1  
When the lens motor is rotating, the motor is  
being driven by 34 V to move the lens.  
Wheneverthelensmotorisatrest, 5Visapplied  
to the motor to ensure that the lens is kept at the  
appropriate position.  
>
The motor driver voltage switching circuit  
switches to 34 V.  
>
34 V is supplied to the motor.  
In this condition, the motor rotates when pulses  
are applied to each phase in a specific sequence.  
a. Lens Motor at Rest  
• LNSCA=0  
LNSCB=0  
>
The motor drive voltage switching circuit  
switches to 5 V.  
>
5 V is supplied to keep the motor at rest.  
DC controller PCB  
34V  
5V  
J 324B- 1  
- 4  
LNSCB  
LNSCA  
Motor drive voltage  
switching circuit  
- 5  
- 6  
- 2  
LNSA  
LNSA*  
LNSB  
(Q301)  
M3  
- 3  
LNSB*  
Lens motor  
Figure 3-203  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Basic Sequence of Operations for  
theLensDriveSystem(enlargement/  
reduction)  
In enlargement/reduction mode, the lens is  
always returned to home position first before being  
moved to the appropriate position for the selected  
reproduction ratio. This is true when the ratio is  
reset to DIRECT.  
Ratio change  
Enlargement selected  
Power switch  
ON  
Copy Start key  
ON  
S
T
B
Y
I
N
T
R
Lens motor (M3)  
Change solenoid (SL1)  
Enlarge Reduce  
Lens  
Lens home position sensor (PS2)  
Figure 3-204  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
when moving the scanner forward) regardless of  
the selected reproduction ratio.  
C. Scanner Drive System  
1. Outline  
The distance traveled by the scanner varies  
depending on the length of the copy paper and the  
selected reproduction ratio.  
Thescannerdrivesystemisdrivenbythescanner  
motor(M2).Thescannermotorchangesthedirection  
of its rotation, and its speed changes when moving  
thescannerforwardtosuittheselectedreproduction  
ratio. However, its speed when moving the scanner  
in reverse remains constant (2.5 times as fast as  
SCA  
SCA*  
SCB  
SCB*  
DC controller PCB  
No. 1 mirror mount  
Forward  
Light-blocking plate  
No. 2 mirror mount  
Scanner home position detection signal (SCHP)  
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)  
Figure 3-205  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Relationship between Scanner Sensors and Signals  
Scanner  
Scanner sensor  
Signal  
SCHP  
Description  
Registration clutch ON  
Forward  
Reverse  
PS1 Scanner  
home position  
sensor  
Scanner reverse OFF 0.1 sec later  
Table 3-201  
Reference:  
The timing at which the registration clutch is turned ON is determined in relation to when the Copy Start  
key is pressed or when the scanner is moved forward.  
3. Basic Sequence of Scanner Operations  
Power switch Copy Start key  
ON  
ON  
WMUP STBY  
INTR  
AER  
SCFW SCRV SCFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
*
Scanner home position  
sensor (PS1)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Scanner  
Forward Reverse  
Scanning lamp  
*The scanner is returned to home position at power-on whenever the scanner is not at home position.  
Figure 3-206  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The scanner motor is a 4-phase control step-  
ping motor and controls the scanning direction and  
speedbychangingthefrequencyandthesequence  
of drive pulses (SCA through SCB*).  
The motor drive voltage ON/OFF switching cir-  
cuit controls whether to apply power to drive the  
motor or to remove power to keep the motor at rest.  
The current switching control circuit determines  
the current flowing into the motor according to the  
revolution of the motor, and the motor driver circuit  
controls the constant current according to the value  
determined by the circuit.  
4. Driving the Scanner Motor  
a. Outline  
The scanner motor is a 4-phase control step-  
ping motor. It is turned ON/OFF and its direction  
and the speed of its rotation are chanceged by  
controlling the output timing of pulse signals SCA/  
A* and SCB/B*.  
b. Operations  
The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC control-  
ler PCB receives such information as on the se-  
lected copying mode and reproduction ratio from  
the control panel circuit. In response, it issues drive  
pulses to the scanner motor (M2) by way of the  
motor drive circuit.  
DC controller PCB  
(Q301)  
(Q324)  
A,A*,B,B*  
J302  
SCA  
SCA*  
Microprocessor  
Motor driver  
circuit  
SCB  
M2  
SCB*  
5V  
Current  
value  
Current value  
switching control  
circuit  
switching  
Figure 3-207  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page Separation Mode  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
1st page  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
1st page  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
Original  
leading  
edge of  
1st page 2nd page  
1st page 2nd page  
INTR  
SCRVI  
SCFW1  
SCRVI  
SCFW1  
SCFW2  
SCRV2  
SCFW2  
SCRV2  
LSTR  
I
I
II  
III  
II  
III  
Scanner home position  
signal (PS1)  
Scanning lamp (LA1)  
Scanner  
Reverse  
Forward  
*Non-AE, page separation mode, A4, 2 copies, continuous.  
Figure 3-208  
I, II, and II in Figure 3-208 use the scanner home  
position signal (falling edge of SCHP) for the 1st  
page as the reference for control by the micropro-  
cessor on the DC controller PCB.  
The microprocessor determines how much the  
scanner must travel forward to suit the selected  
cassette size.  
I, II: The distance traveled forward is determined  
by the selected reproduction ratio and the  
cassette size.  
III:  
If the forward travel distance during II of  
Figure 3-208 is in excess of about 216 mm,  
216 mm is used to represent the leading  
edge of the second page.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
• Controls the scanning lamp.  
III. IMAGE FORMATION  
SYSTEM  
• Controls the primary charging.  
• Controls the transfer charging.  
• Controls the separation static eliminator.  
• Controls the developing bias.  
A. Outline  
• Controls the blank exposure lamp.  
The machine’s image formation system con-  
sists of the following:  
Copyboard  
Lens  
Scanning lamp  
Blank exposure  
unit  
AE sensor  
Developing cylinder  
Primary  
charging  
roller  
Composite power  
supply  
DC controller  
PCB  
Static  
eliminator  
Scanning lamp  
ON control circuit  
High-voltage  
circuit  
Transfer  
roller  
Q301  
Microprocessor  
T1  
T2  
T5  
Microprocessor  
Figure 3-301  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
B. Sequence of Operations (image formation system)  
Power switch  
ON  
Copy Start key  
ON  
WMUP WMUPR STBY  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
SCFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
AER  
*1  
Main motor/  
Pre-exposure lamp  
Primary charging  
Transfer charging  
Transfer cleaning  
Reference bias (ATVC)  
Separation static  
eliminator  
Developing bias AC  
component  
Developing bias DC  
component  
Figure 3-302  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The machine exerts phase control by the zero-  
cross signal (ZXDP) to stabilize the light intensity.  
The intensity of the scanning lamp is switched  
controlled by the LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL  
command (FLS).  
During AE exposure, however, the voltage (70  
V) applied to the scanning lamp remains the same.  
The NP6621 adjusts the copy density using its  
development bias; see p. 3-26.  
C. Controlling the Scanning  
Lamp  
1. Outline  
Thescanninglamp(LA1)iscontrolledbytheDC  
controller PCB; see Figure 3-303. Specifically, the  
DC controller:  
• Turns the scanning lamp ON and OFF.  
• Controls the intensity of the scanning lamp.  
c. Error Protection  
The condition of the scanning lamp is monitored  
using the LIGHT signal (LGHT).  
2. Mechanism  
a. Turning the Scanning Lamp ON and OFF  
The CPU (Q308) on the DC controller PCB  
controls the lamp regulator. The scanning lamp  
goes ON/OFF through serial communication  
interfacebetweenDCcontrollerPCBandComposite  
power supply PCB.  
If the LIGHT signal (LGHT) is received by the  
DC controler for about 20 sec, the error detection  
circuitgeneratestheACSHUTOFFsignal(ACOFF)  
toforcetherelay(K1)ontheACdriverOFF, thereby  
cutting AC power supply (p. 3-101). In this case,  
E220 error is displayed.  
b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning  
Lamp  
ACOFF  
J307  
-2  
Relay  
(K1)  
W15  
W4  
Lamp ON  
detection  
circuit  
J307  
J5  
-4 LGHT  
-11  
Power Supply  
J3  
-1  
Scanning  
lamp  
(LA1)  
Intensity  
switching  
circuit  
Phase  
control  
-6 FLS  
-9  
-2  
Zero-cross  
detection  
circuit  
Triac-  
triggering  
circuit  
Switching  
circuit  
-3  
-13 ZXDP  
DC controller PCB  
Composite power supply  
Figure 3-303  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The main transformer (T1) generates the pri-  
mary voltage controlled by U402.  
D. Controlling the Primary  
Charging Roller  
1. Outline  
Figure 3-304 shows the circuit that controls the  
application voltage of the primary charging roller,  
and the circuit has the following functions:  
• Turns ON/OFF the primary charging roller bias.  
• Controls the primary charging roller bias to a  
constant voltage.  
• Switches the application voltage level of the  
primary charging roller bias.  
• Controls the application voltage of the primary  
charging roller bias.  
• Corrects the scanning lamp ON voltage level.  
Composite power supply PCB  
Main transformer  
Primary charging roller  
24V  
T1  
Filter circuit  
Rectifier circuit  
T4  
Voltage  
detection  
circuit  
Photosensitive drum  
PCTRLS  
Microprocessor  
U402  
Current  
detection  
circuit  
PCURS  
DC controller PCB  
Q301 (master)  
Microprocessor  
Figure 3-304  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Turning ON/OFF the Primary Charg-  
ing Roller Bias  
5. AutomaticCorrectionoftheApplica-  
tion Voltage Level of the Primary  
Charging Roller Bias and the Scan-  
ning Lamp ON Voltage Level (APVC,  
ALVC control)  
Changes in latent static images can affect the  
copy quality; such changes in latent static images  
result from  
Under the control of the microprocessor master  
(Q301) on the DC controller PCB, the micro-pro-  
cessor on the composite power supply PCB gener-  
atesthePCTRLSsignal(pulsesignal),whichcauses  
the secondary side of the transformer (T4) to go ON  
and the primary charging roller bias to be applied.  
• changes in the drum sensitivity, and  
• changes in the charges from the primary  
charging roller.  
3. Controlling the Primary Charging  
Roller Bias to a Constant Voltage  
The microprocessor on the composite power  
supply PCB reads the PDCS signal (analog signal)  
from the voltage detection circuit while the bias  
voltage is being applied to the primary charging  
roller and controls the PDCPWM signal so that the  
output voltage remains constant.  
Ontheotherhand,thesechangesoccurbecause  
of the site of installation (temperature, humidity),  
deterioration of related parts, wear, or dirt.  
The machine’s light area potential (VL) and dark  
area potential (VD) tend to increase. To correct such  
an increase, the machine corrects the application  
voltage level of the primary charging roller (APVC  
control)and,atthesametime,correctsthescanning  
lamp ON voltage level (ALVC control), thereby  
ensuring a specific degree of light area potential  
(VL) and light area potential (VD) at all times.  
4. Switching the Application Voltage  
LevelforthePrimaryChargingRoller  
Bias  
The machine applies a cleaning bias to the  
transfer roller during initial rotation (INTR), when  
the scanner is moving in reverse (SCRV), during  
last rotation, and at power-on after a jam. (See p. 3-  
46.)  
To improve the efficiency of cleaning by the  
cleaning bias and to prevent residual memory on  
the drum by the cleaning bias, the primary charging  
roller bias is applied during initial rotation and while  
the scanner is moving in reverse.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The sequence of this control mechanism is as  
follows during initial rotation after the power switch  
is turned ON:  
Caution:  
You must enter the APVC value indicated on  
the label attached to the composite power  
supply PCB whenever you have replaced the  
composite power supply PCB in service mode  
No. 315 and No. 316. (See the Service  
Handbook.)  
• Flow  
A specific voltage (about -1.46 kV) is applied  
to the primary charging roller for about 1.5  
sec.  
Caution:  
You must enter the APVC correction voltage  
value as indicated on the label attached to the  
front of the drum unit whenever you have  
replaced the drum unit. (See the Service  
Handbook.)  
The current value at this time is checked by  
the current detection circuit, and the result is  
sent to the microprocessor.  
In response, the microprocessor forwards  
the result to the microprocessor (Q301) on  
the DC controller, which determines the pri-  
mary charging roller bias application voltage  
based on the result.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
To remove such a build-up of toner, a positive  
voltage (constant, DC) is applied, thereby returning  
thetonerfromthetransferrollertothephotosensitive  
drum. The bias is applied as follows:  
• during initial rotation after the Copy Start key  
is pressed.  
E. Controlling the Transfer  
Roller Bias  
1. Outline  
The machine uses a direct transfer method that  
uses a roller; and, for this reason, it executes bias  
control in a way different from copiers that rely on  
corona charging.  
The transfer roller bias may be any of three  
types and has the following function and output  
timing:  
• part of the period in which the scanner is  
moving in reverse.  
• part of last rotation.  
c. Reference Bias (ATVC)  
Changes in the environment or deterioration in  
the transfer roller can affect the resistance of the  
transfer roller, possibly affecting the transfer  
efficiency.  
To suppress the changes in the image quality  
caused by changes in the transfer efficiency, the  
machine corrects the application voltage level of  
the transfer bias.  
The transfer ATVC bias (constant current, -190  
µA DC) is a bias applied each time the Copy Start  
keyispressedsothattheaforementionedcorrection  
value may be determined.  
a. Transfer Bias  
This bias corresponds to the transfer bias of  
copiers that rely on corona charging. (constant  
voltage of -3.5 kV to -6.0 kV DC)  
b. Cleaning Bias  
Sincethemachineusesadirecttransfermethod,  
toner from the photosensitive drum can accumulate  
on the transfer roller because of jams.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
SCFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
STBY  
Main motor (M1)  
Transfer bias  
Cleaning bias (+)  
Reference bias (ATVC)  
Static eliminator bias  
Figure 3-305  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Figure 3-306 shows the circuit that controls the  
foregoing three types of biases, and the circuit has  
the following functions:  
• Turns ON/OFF the transfer roller bias.  
• Controls the transfer bias to a constant volt-  
age.  
• Corrects the voltage level of the transfer bias.  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Composite power supply PCB  
24V  
DC  
power  
supply  
Transfer roller  
Transfer  
bias control  
circuit  
24V  
Transformer  
circuit  
T5  
Constant  
voltage control  
circuit  
Current  
limiter circuit  
(transfer bias)  
Constant  
current circuit  
(ATVC)  
Current  
limiter circuit  
(cleaning)  
Cleaning bias  
control circuit  
Microprocessor  
DC controller PCB  
Microprocessor (Q301)  
Figure 3-306  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Turning ON/OFF the Transfer Roller  
Bias  
4. Correcting the Transfer Bias Voltage  
Level (ATVC control)  
The TFWON signal is generated under the  
control of the microprocessor on the composite  
power supply PCB, thereby turning ON the  
secondary side of the transfer transformer (T5) and  
applying a DC bias to the transfer roller.  
Table 3-301 shows combinations of signals  
used to determine the transfer roller bias.  
To compensate for changes in the transfer  
efficiency caused by changes in the environment or  
deterioration of the transfer roller, the machine  
automatically corrects the application voltage level  
of the transfer bias.  
During initial rotation after the Copy Start key is  
pressed, a constant current (-10 µA) is sent to the  
transferroller.Themicroprocessoronthecomposite  
power supply PCB reads the transfer roller  
application voltage from the constant control circuit,  
and the result is sent to the microprocessor (Q301)  
on the DC controller, which in turn determines the  
voltage to be applied to the transfer roller.  
Thiscontrolmechanismisexecutedonceduring  
initial rotation after the Copy Start key is pressed;  
therefore, theapplicationvoltagecanneverchange  
during continuous copying.  
TREVON* TFWON* TFWPWM  
Transfer bias  
output  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Cleaning  
bias output  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Reference  
bias output  
(ATVC)  
OFF  
5. CurrentLimiterCircuit(transferbias)  
If changes in the environment or the like causes  
an overcurrent to flow to the secondary side of the  
transformer (T5) while the transfer bias is being  
generated, the current limiter circuit starts control to  
make sure that no current greater than 50 µA flows.  
Table 3-301  
3. Controlling the Transfer Bias  
Constant Voltage  
6. CurrentLimiterCircuit(cleaningbias)  
If changes in the environment or the like causes  
an overcurrent to flow to the secondary side of the  
transformer (T5) while the cleaning bias is being  
generated, the current limiter circuit starts control to  
make sure that no current greater than 10 µA flows.  
The microprocessor on the composite power  
supply PCB reads the TFWS (analog signal) from  
theconstantvoltagecontrolcircuitwhilethetransfer  
DC bias is being generated and changes the duty  
ratiosothattheapplicationvoltageremainsconstant,  
thereby controlling the TFWPWM signal.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
F. Controlling the Static Elimi-  
nator Bias  
1. Outline  
Figure 3-307 show the circuit that controls the  
staticeliminatorbias,andthecircuithasthefollowing  
functions:  
• Turns ON/OFF the static eliminator bias and  
controls it to a constant voltage.  
• Switches the static eliminator bias voltage  
level.  
24V  
Composite power supply PCB  
T4  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Static eliminator  
bias drive  
circuit  
Static  
eliminator  
Transformer  
circuit  
JLVCTL  
JCTL  
Microprocessor  
J5  
J307  
DC controller PCB  
Q301  
Microprocessor  
Figure 3-307  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Switching the Voltage Level of the  
Static Eliminator Bias  
3. Ensuring Separation of Thin Paper  
In certain environments, the machine can fail to  
separate thin paper.  
If such is the case, you may keep the application  
voltage to the static eliminator to 4.0 kV at all times  
to improve separation from the drum.  
Use service mode No. 506 to switch the  
separation static eliminator output voltage. (See  
p. 3-117.)  
The microprocessor on the composite power  
supply PCB generates the JCTL signal (analog  
signal) under the control of the microprocessor  
(Q301) on the DC controller PCB, thereby causing  
the secondary side of the main transformer (T4) to  
turnON;thebiasforthestaticeliminatorisgenerated  
by increasing the high-voltage output from the main  
transformer (T4).  
The JLVCTL signal is used to switch between  
output voltages 2.5 and 4.0 KV.  
When the JCTL signal turns ON, the drive circuit  
turns ON to generate the static eliminator bias.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
G. Controlling the Developing  
Bias  
1. Outline  
Figure 3-308 shows the circuit that controls the  
developing bias, and the circuit has the following  
functions:  
• Turns ON/OFF the developing bias AC  
component.  
• Turns ON/OFF the developing bias DC  
component.  
• Controls the voltage level of the developing  
bias DC component.  
• Controls the developing bias DC component  
to a constant voltage.  
Composite power supply PCB  
24V  
T4  
Developing  
DC bias drive  
circuit  
Developing AC bias transformer  
T301  
Developing  
DC bias voltage  
detection circuit  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Developing AC  
transformer  
drive circuit  
Developing  
cylinder  
BPWM  
BIASS  
Microprocessor  
J5  
J307  
AE sensor  
VR850  
Q301  
Microprocessor  
Copy density  
correction volume  
Copy Density key  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-308  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
• Setting of the Copy Density key.  
• Output of the AE sensor  
• Setting of the copy density correction volume  
(VR850)  
2. TurningON/OFFtheDevelopingBias  
DC Component and Controlling to  
Constant Voltage  
The microprocessor on the composite power  
supply PCB generates the BPWM signal (pulse  
signal) under the control of the microprocessor  
master (Q301) on the DC controller PCB, thereby  
turning ON the secondary side of the main  
transformer (T4) and applying the developing bias  
DC component.  
The application voltage is read as the BIAS  
signal (analog signal) from the developing DC bias  
voltage detection circuit while the developing bias  
DC component is being applied and is used to  
control the output voltage to a constant level.  
The machine exerts control so that the voltage  
of the developing bias DC component varies  
between -80 and -560 V as a result of varying the  
output of the BPWM signal.  
To meet the increases in the light area potential  
(VL)causedbythedeteriorationofthephotosensitive  
drum, the machine is equipped with a copy density  
correctionvolume.Youmayturnthevolume(VR851/  
860)toadjusttheDCbiaspotentialforeachincrease  
in VL, thereby ensuring fogging-free images.  
3. TurningON/OFFtheDevelopingBias  
The microprocessor on the composite power  
supply PCB generates the ACBIAS signal (pulse  
signal) under the control of the microprocessor  
master (Q301) on the DC controller PCB. The  
signal causes the developing bias AC component  
generation transformer (T3) to turn ON, and the  
sum of the AC component of the developing bias  
and the DC component is applied:  
(to light)  
(to dark)  
VR850  
Developing bias  
DC component  
Lighter  
• Application frequency:  
• Application voltage:  
about 2400 Hz  
about 1300 Vp-p  
Medium  
Darker  
-500  
-400  
4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the  
Developing Bias DC Component  
The machine changes the voltage level of the  
DC component of the developing bias to suit the  
following:  
-100  
F1 (dark)  
5
8
(light)  
Copy density  
Figure 3-309  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The DC controller in turn computes the optimum  
value for the developing bias to be used during  
copying based on the input it has received, and it  
sendstheresultofthecomputationtothecomposite  
powersupplyPCB.Figure3-310showsthechanges  
in the DC component of the developing bias in  
relation to different original densities.  
The graph uses the degree of exposure that  
provides optimum densities when a newspaper or  
the Test Sheet is copied to ensure fogging-free  
copies.  
H. Copy Density Automatic  
Control  
1. Outline  
The machine is equipped with an automatic  
density correction (AE) function that controls the  
DC component of the developing bias to suit the  
density of the original used. As long as the original  
has an even density, the machine will adjust the DC  
component of the developing bias to generate  
fogging-free copies.  
The DC component that has been adjusted in  
AE mode may be checked on the copy density  
indicator on the control panel.  
Developing DC bias  
Copy density 9  
equivalent  
2. Control Operations  
Copy density 7.5  
equivalent  
The scanning lamp (FL1) is turned on at a  
specific intensity during initial rotation (INTR), and  
the scanner is moved forward for about 65 mm to  
expose the original.  
In this condition, the reflected light within the  
area shown in Figure 3-311 is checked by the AE  
sensor (photodiode), and the result is sent to the  
DC controller PCB.  
Copy density 5  
equivalent  
Original density  
Test Sheet  
Newspaper  
Figure 3-310  
27 mm  
(approx.)  
Center reference  
50 mm (approx.)  
A
14 mm  
27 mm  
(approx.) (approx.)  
Note: A represents the sensor position.  
Figure 3-311 AE Sensor Reading Area  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
• automatic adjustment of the lamp intensity during  
AE scanning (No. 301)  
• reference point adjustment for the copy density  
(developing bias) for AE mode (No. 302)  
• slopeadjustmentforthecopydensity(developing  
bias) for AE mode (No. 303)  
3. AE Adjustment  
Themachine’sAEadjustmentmaybeperformed  
in service mode, and it consists of the following  
three:  
Item  
Function  
Adjustments  
Remarks  
No. 301 Automatic  
adjustment of  
Automatically adjusted so  
that copy density 5 is  
attained when the Test  
Chart is copied.  
9
Light  
lamp intensity  
during AE  
Copy  
density 5  
scanning  
Dark  
Original  
density  
Test Chart  
No. 302 Reference point  
adjustment for the  
copy density  
qIf the setting is decreased  
in service mode, the AE  
copy will be darker.  
9
Light  
(developing bias)  
for AE mode  
wIf the setting is increased  
in service mode, the AE  
copy will be lighter.  
Copy  
density 5  
Default: 0  
Settings:-26 to +26  
Dark  
Original  
density  
Test Chart  
No. 303 Slope adjustment  
for the copy  
qIf the setting is increased  
in service mode, the  
copies of a newspaper  
will be light.  
wIf the setting is decreased  
in service mode, the  
copies of a newspaper  
will be darker.  
9
Light  
density  
(developing bias)  
for AE mode  
Copy  
density 5  
Dark  
Newspaper Original  
density  
Test Chart  
Default: 0  
Settings:-26 to +26  
Note:  
After AE adjustment with Test Chart NA3, using AE mode, density adjustment should show “5”. In non-  
AE mode, using NA3, density “5” must be appropriate (adjusted with VR850).  
Table 3-302  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The No. 1 stirring rod is used to supply toner to  
the developing cylinder and stir the layer of toner  
inside the developing chamber.  
I. Developing/Cleaning As-  
sembly  
The No. 2 stirring blade is used to stir the toner  
inside the toner container and to supply toner to the  
developing chamber.  
The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade  
is moved by the waste toner feeding blade for  
collection in the waste toner container.  
1. Outline  
Themachine’sphotosensitivedrum,developing  
cylinder, No. 1 stirring rod, and No. 2 stirring blade  
are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1).  
Theleveloftonerinsidethedevelopingassembly  
is checked by the toner sensor; if the toner level  
drops below a specific level, the ADD TONER  
message is indicated on the control panel.  
Drum cartridge  
Toner container  
Primary charging  
roller  
Cleaning blade  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Toner sensor  
Waste toner  
feeding blade  
Waste toner  
assembly  
Developing  
cylinder  
No. 1  
stirring rod  
No. 2 stirring blade  
Toner level  
detection PCB  
Torque limiter  
Main motor/  
Main motor  
driver PCB  
M1  
Motor drive signal  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-312  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
identified by the toner level sensor and communi-  
cated to the antenna sensor circuit.  
2. Toner Level Detection Control  
Theleveloftonerinsidethecartridgeismonitored  
by the antenna sensor circuit.  
Insidethecartridgeisthetonerlevelsensor, and  
an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.  
The developing cylinder and the toner level  
sensor are bonded statistically, and the amount of  
static charge between the two varies according to  
the level of toner inside the cartridge. For this  
reason, an AC bias which suits the level of toner is  
The antenna sensor circuit is directly supplied  
withaspecific,attenuatedACbiasbythecomposite  
power supply for use as a reference signal.  
Theantennasensorcircuitcomparesthesignal  
from the toner level sensor against the reference  
signal to find out the level of toner.  
Toner level  
sensor  
Blade mount  
Developing assembly  
frame  
Toner  
Blade  
DC controller  
Antenna sensor circuit  
Comparator circuit  
PCB  
Developing cylinder  
TEP*  
Figure 3-313  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
q If the toner is more than a specific level,  
Sincetonerexistsaroundthetonerlevelsensor,  
the AC bias generated by the sensor is greater  
than the reference signal.  
absent signal (TEP*) to go ‘1’.  
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller  
circuit checks the level of toner only during  
copyingoperation(ACbiasON);ifitcontinuously  
detects the toner empty signal 0 for 3 min or  
more, it flashes the REPLACE CARTRIDGE  
message on the control panel after finishing the  
ongoing copying run.  
In this condition, the output of the comparator  
circuit goes ‘1’ and the toner absent signal  
(TEP*) goes ‘0’.  
w If toner is less than a specific level,  
Since toner around the toner level sensor  
decreases,theACbiasgeneratedbythesensor  
decreases.  
e Torque Limiter  
If an excess load is imposed on the  
photosensitive drum as when the waste toner  
becomes full while the photosensitive drum is  
rotating, the torque limiter turns on to stop the  
rotation of the photosensitive drum by cutting  
the drive from the main motor.  
On the other and, the output voltage remains  
high since the reference signal remains  
unchanged.  
The difference in potential causes the output of  
the comparator circuit to go ‘0’ and the toner  
Power switch Copy Start key  
REPLACE CARTRIDGE  
message flashed  
ON  
ON  
STBY  
Copy  
STBY  
Copy  
STBY  
Copy  
Main motor (M1)  
Toner level detection  
Toner absent signal (TEP*)  
AC bias  
1st (3 sec)  
3rd (0.5 sec)  
2nd (1 sec)  
REPLACE CARTRIDGE  
message (flashed)  
A43, AE, 3 copies, continuous.  
Figure 3-314  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Themachine’sblankexposureareaiscontrolled  
by two slide shutters and one open/close shutter.  
J. Blank Exposure Control  
1. Outline  
The machine directs light from the pre-exposure  
lamptothephotosensitivedrumbywayofareflecting  
plate for blank exposure, thereby blanking out gaps  
between sheets of paper and non-image areas.  
Change solenoid (SL1)  
M3  
Lens motor  
Gear A  
Slide shutter (rear)  
Gear B  
Size blanking  
reflecting plate  
Full blanking  
reflecting plate  
Blanking  
shutter  
solenoid  
(SL3)  
Slide shutter  
(front)  
Pre-exposure lamp  
Open/close shutter  
Blanking shutter  
home position sensor  
(PS3)  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-315  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Blanking the Non-Image Area (re-  
duction)  
3. Blanking the Leading/Trailing Edge  
Margin and Sheet Gap  
In reduction mode, the change solenoid (SL1)  
turns ON, and the lens is moved to suit the selected  
reduction ratio. At this time, turning the change  
solenoid (SL1) OFF allows the drive of the lens  
motortobetransmittedtogearA/B;theslideshutter  
(rear/front)movesforthedistancecorrespondingto  
the selected reduction ratio. In this condition, the  
exposure window opens, and the light from the pre-  
exposure lamp is directed to the photosensitive  
drum through the size blanking reflecting plate.  
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller  
turns ON/OFF the blanking shutter solenoid drive  
signal(BSSLD*),therebyopening/closingtheopen/  
close shutter to blank out the leading/trailing edge  
margin or the gap between sheets of paper.  
Size blanking optical path  
Size blanking  
reflecting plate  
Full blanking  
Full blanking reflecting plate  
optical path  
Open/close  
shutter  
Slide shutter  
Pre-exposure optical path  
Image exposure  
optical path  
Drum cleaning  
assembly  
Drum  
cartridge  
Pre-exposure  
reflecting plate  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Figure 3-317  
A
B
Figure 3-316  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning  
Operations  
K. Primary Charging Roller  
Cleaning Control  
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller  
PCB generates the primary charging roller cleaning  
solenoid(SL4)ONsignal(PCLSLD),therebyforcing  
the cleaning pad against the roller for 2 sec. (During  
this period, the cleaning roller rotates about four  
times.)  
1. Outline  
The machine’s primary charging roller is  
equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism.  
The automatic cleaning mechanism cleans the  
primary charging roller under the following  
conditions:  
• During initial rotation (INTR) after making 250  
or more copies (accumulative; i.e., after  
executing transfer roller locking/releasing  
control five times).  
Primary charging roller  
Primary charging roller  
cleaning solenoid  
Fulcrum  
Fulcrum  
Cleaning pad  
Drum unit  
Drum  
Figure 3-318  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
L. Transfer Roller Locking/  
Releasing Control  
1. Outline  
The machine’s transfer roller is equipped with a  
locking/releasing mechanism.  
The locking/releasing mechanism operates to  
lockorreleasethetransferroller,therebypreventing  
adhesion of toner to the roller under the following  
condition:  
• Duringlastrotation(LSTR)aftermaking50copies  
or more.  
Photosensitive drum  
Transfer roller  
Transfer roller locking  
releasing solenoid  
Locking  
Fulcrum  
Releasing  
Figure 3-319  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
(M1).  
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING  
SYSTEM  
When two-sided or overlay copying is selected,  
the paper first moves through the fixing assembly  
andthenthroughtheduplexingunitbeforeitreaches  
the registration roller once again. The paper path is  
provided with the following photointerrupters, and  
the machine identifies a jam if copy paper fails to  
reach or move past specific sensors within specific  
periods of time:  
• Registration roller paper sensor  
• Separation paper sensor  
• Delivery paper sensor  
• Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor  
• Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor  
• Duplexing unit outlet paper sensor  
• Duplexing unit inlet paper sensor  
• Duplexing unit pre-registration paper sensor  
In addition, the cassette is provided with  
photointerrupters (PS4, PS13) and the multifeeder  
isequippedwithyetanotherphotointerrupter(PS5).  
A. Pick-Up from the Machine  
1. Outline  
When the pick-up clutch (CL2, CL3, or CL5)  
turns ON while the main motor is rotating, the  
appropriate pick-up roller rotates to pick up paper.  
Thepaperisthenforwardedtotheregistrationroller  
by way of the vertical path roller if it is from the  
cassette or directly if it is from the manual feeding  
tray.  
Copy paper is controlled by the registration  
roller so that its leading edge matches the image on  
the photosensitive drum, and it is moved through  
the transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and deliv-  
ery assembly to reach the copy tray.  
The delivery roller is driven by the special deliv-  
ery motor (M6). The set-back roller in the duplexing  
unit is also driven by the special duplexing motor  
(M7). Other motors are driven by the main motor  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
CL3  
CL1  
SL8  
SL2  
CL4  
CL6  
CL2  
M5  
CL5  
M1  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-401  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
PS7  
PS8  
PS6  
PS3  
PS17  
PS15  
PS14  
PS16  
PS4  
PS12  
PS13  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-402  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 1)  
Copy Start  
key ON  
INTER SRFW SCRV SRFW SCRV LSTR STBY  
Main motor (M1)  
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch  
(CL2)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
Vertical path roller  
1 paper sensor (PS11)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Separation sensor (PS7)  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
Scanner home position  
sensor (PS1)  
Figure 3-403  
3. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 2)  
Copy Start  
key ON  
INTR  
SRFW SCRV SRFW SCRV LSTR STBY  
Main motor (M1)  
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch  
(CL5)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
Vertical path roller  
2 paper sensor (PS12)  
Vertical path roller  
1 paper sensor (PS11)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Separation sensor (PS7)  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
Scanner home position  
sensor (PS1)  
Figure 3-404  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
then sent to the duplexing unit. The paper stops  
several millimeters in front of the duplexing unit  
outletpapersensor(PS14)andwaitsforcopyingon  
the second side.  
Theduplexingunitiscapableofaccommodating  
10 sheets of A4, A4R (2 sheets of A3).  
B. Making Two-Sided Copies  
(1 copy)  
1. Outline  
The copy paper takes the following path.  
Whencopyingonthefirstside, thedeliveryroller  
reverses after the paper from the fixing assembly  
has moved past the delivery sensor; the paper is  
Copying on the 1st Side  
Registration  
roller  
Registration  
paper sensor  
Separation  
sensor  
Fixing film  
Copy exit sensor  
Outlet solenoid  
Outlet motor  
(forward)  
Figure 3-405  
Set-back rollers  
Outlet  
roller  
(reverse)  
Duplex exit detect  
sensor  
Duplex inlet  
sensor  
Figure 3-406  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Copying on the 2nd Side  
(forward)  
Figure 3-407  
2. Sequence of Operations (two-sided; 1 copy, A4)  
Copy Start  
key ON  
Copy Start key  
ON (2nd side)  
SCFW  
SCRV LSTR  
STBY  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV LSTR STBY  
Registration paper sensor (PS6)  
Registration roller clutch (CL1)  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
Duplexing unit inlet paper sensor  
(PS15)  
Duplexing unit motor (M5)  
Duplexing unit outlet clutch (CL4)  
Duplexing unit outlet sensor (PS14)  
CW rotation  
CCW rotation  
Figure 3-408  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The set-back mechanism is used under the  
following conditions:  
C. Duplexing Unit  
1. Outline  
1. Copy Paper Size  
The machine uses a set-back method and a  
separation flapper during continuous two-sided  
copying. The term set-back method refers to a  
method of preventing double feeding by stacking  
(tiling) sheets of paper in the limited space of the  
duplexing unit. The presence of the separation  
flapper at the outlet of the duplexing unit serves to  
improve separation of sheets.  
A3, A4, A4R and A5  
2. Copy Count  
Up to 10 (A4, A4R) or 2 (A3)  
Set-back  
roller 1  
Copy paper  
Duplexing unit  
lower plate  
Figure 3-409  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Set-Back Operations  
The lower feeding inlet roller and the lower feeding outlet roller are driven by the main motor, and the set-  
back roller is driven by a special stepping motor.  
Duplex outlet roller  
Set-back rollers  
Duplex inlet detect  
Duplex exit detect  
sensor (PS14)  
sensor (PS15)  
Duplex  
assembly  
Figure 3-410  
1st copy enters  
duplexing unit  
2nd copy enters  
duplexing unit  
Copy Start key ON  
COPY  
COPY  
Duplexing outlet sensor (PS14)  
Duplexing inlet paper sensor (PS15)  
Duplexing unit motor (M5)  
CW rotation  
CCW rotation  
Figure 3-411  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
a. Set-Back Operations  
1. The first copy moves from the delivery assembly to the duplexing unit.  
Lower feeder  
assembly outlet  
Duplex  
iniet detect roller  
Duplex exit  
detect sensor (PS14)  
Set-back roller 1  
roller  
Figure 3-412  
2. The leading edge of the copy paper butts against the set-back roller 1 and forms an arch.  
Set-back roller 1  
Figure 3-413  
Set-back rollers  
Figure 3-414  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. The set-back rollers 1 rotate counterclockwise, and the leading edge of the copy paper stops at a point  
about 12 mm past the set-back roller 1.  
12mm  
Figure 3-415  
4. The second copy paper is moved to the duplexing unit.  
Figure 3-416  
5. The leading edge of the second copy paper butts against the set-back roller 1 and forms an arch.  
Set-back roller 1  
Figure 3-417  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
6. The set-back rollers 1 rotate clockwise, thereby pulling the trailing edge of the second copy paper out the  
duplexing unit inlet.  
Set-back rollers  
12mm  
Figure 3-418  
7. Theset-backrollers1and2rotatecounterclockwise, andtheleadingedgeofthesecondcopypaperstops  
at a point about 12 mm past the set-back roller 1.  
12mm 12mm  
Figure 3-419  
8. Operations 4 through 7 are repeated for as many times as there are copies to make, and the copies are  
stacked in the duplexing unit.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
9. The set-back rollers 1 rotates counterclockwise, thereby stopping the trailing edge of the first copy paper  
6 mm before the set-back rollers 1.  
Duplex exit  
detect sensor (PS14)  
Set-back roller  
6mm  
Figure 3-420  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The machine’s duplexing unit outlet is equipped  
with a flapper to improve separation of stacked  
paper, and the operation is as described below.  
3. Re-Pick Up Operation  
After copying on the first side, the copy paper  
stacked in the duplexing unit is picked up once  
again for copying on the second side.  
Sequence of Operations (re-pick up; A4, 2 copies)  
Copy Start key ON  
(2nd side)  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
SCFW  
SCRV  
Duplexing unit motor (M5)  
Duplexing unit outlet clutch (CL4)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
CW rotation  
CCW rotation  
Figure 3-421  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
1. After the Copy Start key is pressed for the second side, the set-back roller and the duplexing unit outlet  
roller rotate clockwise.  
Set-back rollers  
Outlet roller duplex (CL4)  
Figure 3-422  
2. When the first copy paper reaches the duplexing unit outlet sensor, the set-back roller and the duplexing  
unit outlet roller stop; the outlet roller duplex rotates.  
Duplex exit detect sensor (PS14)  
Figure 3-423  
3. When the trailing edge of the first copy paper leaves the set-back roller, the set-back roller rotates  
counterclockwise, thereby returning the second copy paper.  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Slip roller  
Set-back roller  
Figure 3-424  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. When the registration sensor turns ON, the set-back roller and the duplexing unit outlet roller rotate  
clockwise to pick up the second copy paper.  
Separation  
sensor  
Photosensitive  
drum  
Registration sensor(PS6)  
Slip roller  
Figure 3-425  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
the same path as it would if picked up from the  
machine’s cassette.)  
The cassette unit is equipped with a pick-up  
sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu) to detect the arrival of copy  
paper and determine when to turn off the pick-up  
roller to suit the size of the paper.  
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette  
Feeding Module-A2  
1. Pick-Up Operation  
When the pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu) turns  
ON while the cassette unit motor (M1cu) is rotating,  
the pick-up roller rotates to start pick-up operation;  
the copy paper is sent as far as the vertical path  
rollerafterthepick-up. (Thepaper, thereafter, takes  
To Copier  
Pick-up roller  
PS1cu  
PS2cu  
Vertical path roller  
Pick-up clutch  
Casette 3 size detection  
CL1cu  
Pick-up roller  
Cassette 3  
PS4cu  
Pick-up clutch  
Casette 4 size detection  
PS3cu  
CL2cu  
Cassette 4  
Cassette  
unit motor  
M1cu  
Cassette drive PCB  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-426  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Sequence of Operations (cassette 3; A4, 2 copies)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
INTR  
SRFW  
SCRV  
SRFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
STBY  
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch  
(CL1cu)  
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor  
(PS1cu)  
Cassette unit motor (M1cu)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-427  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The drive of the cassette unit motor 2 (M2cu) is  
used by the pick-up operation of cassette 5.  
Whenthepick-upclutch(CL1cu,CL2cu,CL3cu)  
turns ON, the appropriate pick-up roller rotates, and  
the vertical path roller moves the copy paper to the  
copier’s vertical path roller. (The copy paper then  
takes the same path as it would if picked up from the  
machine’s cassette.)  
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette  
Feeding Unit-K1  
1. Pick-Up Operation  
Thecassetteunitmotor1(M1cu)isusedtodrive  
the vertical path roller, and its drive is also used by  
the pick-up operation for cassettes 3 and 4.  
Thecassetteunithasthreeverticalpathsensors  
used to check the pick-up operation for each  
cassette.  
To copier  
PS1cu  
PS2cu  
CL1cu  
PS3cu  
PS4cu  
PS6cu  
CL2cu  
PS5cu  
CL3cu  
M2cu  
M1cu  
Cassette driver PCB  
DC controller PCB  
Figure 3-428  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 3)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
INTR  
SRFW  
SCRV  
SRFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
STBY  
Pick-up motor 1 (M1cu)  
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch  
(CL1cu)  
Cassette  
feeding  
module  
Cassette 3 vertical  
path sensor (PS1cu)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Copier  
Scanner home position sensor  
(PS1)  
Figure 3-429  
3. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 5)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
INTR  
SRFW  
SCRV SRFW  
SCRV LSTR  
STBY  
Pick-up motor 1 (M1cu)  
Pick-up motor 2 (M2cu)  
Cassette  
feeding  
module  
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch  
(CL3u)  
Cassette 5 vertical path  
sensor (PS5cu)  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
Copier  
Scanner home position  
sensor (PS1)  
Figure 3-430  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
1. Basic Construction  
The paper deck unit controls the operation of  
eachloadaccordingtothesignalsfromthepedestal  
controller PCB to send paper to the copier.  
Each of the loads used to pick-up and feed paper or  
raise the lifter is driven by the pedestal motor.  
If you operated the deck size switch, the size of  
the inside of the deck is communicated to the copier  
through the pedestal controller PCB.  
J112-2 Deck vertical path roll paper sensor signal (DVRPD)  
J113-7 Deck vertical path roller drive signal (CL2D)*  
J202-2 Pedestal motor drive signal (PEDMD)  
Deck vertical  
path roller  
J202-3 Pedestal motor speed error signal (LOCK)*  
M1  
CL2  
Pedestal  
J113-5 Deck pick-up drive signal (CL1D)  
controller  
PCB  
J112-5 Deck paper sensor (DPD)  
J114-5 Deck lifter drive signal (CL4D)*  
CL4  
CL1  
PS2  
J114-7 Deck pick-up roller release signal (DEPRL)*  
SL1  
J112-8 Deck lifter posision sensor signal (DLD)  
J113-2 Deck lifter limit sensor signal (DEL)  
J113-9 Deck open sensor signal (DEOP)*  
PS1  
Feeding  
roller  
PS6 PS4 PS3  
Pick-up  
roller  
Separation roller  
Copy paper  
Lifter  
M1: Pedestal motor  
CL1: Deck pick-up clutch  
PS2: Deck vertical path roller paper sensor  
PS1: Deck paper sensor  
CL2: Deck vertical path roller drive clutch  
CL4: Deck lifter drive clutch  
SL1: Deck pick-up roller release solenoid  
PS3: Deck lifter position sensor  
PS4: Deck lifter upper limit sensor  
PS6: Deck open sensor  
Figure 3-431  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
2. Pick-Up/Feeding Operation  
a. Mechanism  
Whenthecopier’sCOPYSTARTkeyispressed,  
the deck pick-up clutch (CL1) turns on to rotate the  
deck pick-up roller. The deck pick-up roller leaves  
the paper when the deck pick-up roller release  
solenoid (SL1) turns on after feeding the paper.  
The feeding roller and the separation roller  
serve to make sure that no more than one sheet of  
paper is fed to the feeding path; after leaving both  
rollers, thepaperismovedtotheinsideofthecopier  
by the vertical path roller.  
J202-2 PEDMD  
M1  
Deck vertical path roller  
CL2  
J113-7  
CL2D*  
J112-2 DVRPD  
Pedestal  
controller  
PCB  
PS2  
CL1  
SL1  
J113-5 CL1D*  
J114-7 DEPRL  
Feeding  
roller  
Pick-up roller  
Separation roller  
Copy paper  
Lifter  
M1: Pedestal motor  
CL1: Deck pick-up clutch  
SL1: Deck pick-up roller release solenoid  
PS2: Deck vertical path roller paper sensor  
CL2: Deck vertical path roller drive clutch  
Figure 3-432  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
b. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations (A4, 2 copies)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
SCRV  
SCRV  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCFW  
LSTR  
Pick-up request signal  
(from copier)  
Copier  
Deck pick-up clutch  
(CL1)  
Deck pick-up roller  
release solenoid (SL1)  
Deck vertical path roller  
paper sensor (PS2)  
Deck vertical path roller  
drive clutch (CL2)  
Vertical path roller 3  
drive clutch (CL3)  
Figure 3-433  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Lifter Operation  
a. Operation  
When the deck is slid inside the pedestal, the  
pick-up roller lowers and the light-blocking plate  
leaves the deck lifter position sensor (PS3). The  
condition causes the lifter drive clutch (CL4) to turn  
on, and the drive of the pedestal motor (M1) is  
transmitted to the cable take-up shaft, thereby  
raising the lifter.  
Thelifterkeepsrisinguntilthedecklifterposition  
sensor (PS3) detects the top sheet of the paper  
stack placed on the lifter.  
The deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS4) serves to  
stopthelifterintheeventthatthesensorarmshould  
block the deck lifter position sensor (PS3) for some  
reason.  
When the lifter has reached its upper limit, it is  
maintained in position by the work of one-way gear.  
When the deck is removed from the pedestal, the  
take-up gear disengages itself from the one-way  
gear, thereby allowing the lifter to lower in its own  
weight.  
Feeding roller  
Deck lifter position sensor Lifter detecting  
Paper detecting  
spacer  
(PS3)  
lever  
Pick-up roller shaft  
Pick-up  
roller arm  
Copy paper  
Separation roller  
Lifter  
Deck  
:
:
Pick-up roller up, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever  
lowers to block the deck lifter position sensor (PS3)  
Pick-up roller down, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever  
rises to leave the deck lifter position sensor (PS3)  
Figure 3-434  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
b. Lifter Operation  
Deck motor  
M
Feeding roller  
Pick-up roller  
Separation roller  
Lifter position  
sensor (PS3)  
Paper sensor  
Paper deteciting spacer  
Paper detecting  
lever  
Pick-up roller  
Lifter limit detecting lever  
Lifter upper limit  
sensor (PS4)  
Copy paper  
Oil damper  
Figure 3-435  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Detecting Paper in the Deck  
a. Identifying the Size of Paper  
You must set the switch (SW1) on the deck size  
switch PCB to suit the size of paper set inside the  
paper deck.  
b. Identifying the Presence/Absence of Paper  
Thepresenceandabsenceofcopypaperinside  
the paper deck is identified by the deck paper  
sensor (PS1).  
When the paper deck runs out of paper, the  
paper detecting spacer attached to the pick-up  
roller shaft drops.  
When you set the switch, the paper size signal  
(SIZE1 and SIZE2) sent to the pedestal controller  
PCB changes to ‘1’ or ‘0’.  
As a result, the paper detecting lever leaves the  
deck paper sensor (PS1), causing the pedestal  
controller PCB to identify the absence of paper.  
Based on the combination of these paper size  
signals, the pedestal controller PCB identifies the  
size of the paper inside the paper deck as follows:  
Paper detecting lever  
Paper detecting spacer  
Paper size*  
SIZE 1  
SIZE 2  
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
B5  
1
0
1
2
1
0
A4  
LTR  
*The configuration of SW 1 represents when the  
switch is viewed from the front.  
Paper sensor (PS1)  
Table 2-401  
Lifter  
Figure 3-436  
Paper detecting lever  
Paper detecting spacer  
Paper sensor (PS1)  
Lifter  
Figure 3-437  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The copy paper on the tray is forced against the  
pick-up roller by the paper guide plate; the pick-up  
roller starts to rotate when it receives drive from the  
main motor (M1) through a clutch.  
The pick-up roller and the separation pad serve  
to make sure that no more than a single sheet of  
copy paper is sent to the registration roller.  
The above series of operations is executed for  
each pick-up.  
G. Multifeeder  
1. Outline  
The multifeeder is a mechanism which picks up  
paperfromitstrayandwhichiscapableofcontinuous  
pick-up operation.  
The copy paper on the tray is detected by the  
multifeeder paper sensor (PS5).  
Main motor  
M1  
Multifeeder pick-up  
clutch  
CL3  
Multifeeder paper sensor  
Paper sensor lever  
Paper guide plate  
PS5  
Multifeeder tray  
Photosensitive  
drum  
PS6  
Separation pad  
Registration roller  
Registration  
roller  
paper sensor  
Multifeeder pick-up  
solenoid  
Paper guide plate cam  
SL2  
Spring  
clutch  
Figure 3-438  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
All this is used to control how long blank expo-  
sure should take, how long the registration roller  
should remain ON, and how long high voltage  
should remain ON.  
2. Identifying the Size of Paper on the  
Multifeeder Tray  
The size of paper on the tray is identified by the  
variable resistor (VR1) that operates in association  
with the slide guide moving in relation to the slide  
guide moved by the user to suit the width of the  
paper.  
The identified width of the copy paper is used to  
control the lens and blank exposure.  
The length of paper placed on the multifeeder  
trayisidentifiedinrelationtohowlongtheregistration  
sensor (PS6) remains ON.  
Reference:  
The maximum length of paper is Ledger (432  
mm). Pages longer than this will be likely to jam.  
DC controller PCB  
Slide guide (rear)  
Variable resistor (VR1)  
Slide guide (Front)  
Multifeeder tray  
Figure 3-439  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Sequence of Operations (multifeeder; A4, 2 copies)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
INTR  
SRFW  
SCRV  
SRFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
Multifeeder pick-up solenoid  
(SL2)  
Multifeeder pick-up clutch  
(CL3)  
Pre-registration sensor (PS6)  
Registration clutch (CL2)  
Scanner motor (M2)  
Figure 3-440  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Specific combinations of the states (ON/OFF) of  
thephotointerruptersareusedbythemicroprocessor  
on the DC controller PCB to identify the presence/  
absence of a cassette and the size of the cassette  
(if any) and to control scanner reversal and blank  
exposure. (See Table 3-402.)  
H. Identifying the Size of the  
Cassette  
Specific photointerrupters (Q651, Q652, Q653,  
Q654) turn OFF or ON when a cassette is slid into  
a cassette holder.  
Configuration  
Q652  
Q653  
Q651  
Q654  
Cassette size  
(left)  
(right)  
0
No cassette  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
B5R  
A4  
(182 × 257)  
(297 × 220)  
(297 × 420)  
1
0
1
0
A3  
Mini (STMTR) 5.5" × 8.5"  
(148 × 216)  
Legal 8.5" × 14"  
(356 × 216)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Letter 11" × 8.5"  
(279 × 216)  
A4R  
(210 × 297)  
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
Letter R 8.5" × 11"  
(216 × 279)  
A5R  
A5  
(149 × 218)  
(218 × 149)  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Mini-R (STMT) 8.5" × 5.5"  
(216 × 148)  
B5  
B4  
(257 × 182)  
(364 × 257)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Ledger 11" × 17"  
(182 × 257)  
*U  
1
1
1
1
(182 ~ 283 × 198 ~ 354)  
(unit: mm)  
Table 3-402  
1: Photointerrupter blocking the light.  
0: Photointerrupter not blocking the light.  
* Sizes may be stored in memory within dimensions given (in mm; see the Service Handbook for details).  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
To change the size of a cassette, move the  
guideplates(horizontal,vertical)insidethecassette  
andalsomovethepapersizeleverfoundatthefront  
of the cassette to the left or right so that the arrow  
points to the appropriate paper size as indicated in  
Figure 3-441.  
Reference:  
The size of copy paper which is in wide use in  
a specific area may not be common in another  
area. Setting paper of a size different from the  
pre-setsizewillnotturnonthesizeindicationon  
the display. This however, will not prevent the  
correct copying control sequence for the paper.  
For instance, if you set LTR copy paper in an  
AB-configured machine (also setting the paper  
size lever to LTR size), the machine will control  
copying operations based on LTR size paper.  
Caution:  
A discrepancy between the size of the copy  
paper being used and the size selected by the  
paper size lever will trigger an incorrect copying  
sequence, leading to jamming and soiling.  
Advise the user so that both sizes match.  
Guide plate (horizontal)  
Guide plates (vertical)  
Paper size lever  
Figure 3-441  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly  
1. Controlling the Fixing Roller Tem-  
perature  
Theupperandlowerrollersofthefixingassembly  
and the delivery roller of the delivery unit are driven  
by the main motor (M1).  
Theupperrollerisheatedbyaheater(H1:900W)  
built in it.  
The DC controller monitors the surface  
temperature of the upper roller by means of two  
thermistor (TH1, TH2) so as to control the  
temperature to a specific value.  
The temperature of the upper fixing roller is  
controlled as follows (paper area):  
160°C (at standby, during copy operation)  
175°C (during copy operation)  
Topreventdropsinthetemperatureoftheupper  
roller during continuous copy operation, the control  
temperature is as follow, measured with main ther-  
mistor (TH1) Located out of paper area.  
Aux themistor (TH2) is at same position of main  
thermistor and is checking correct function of TH1.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Target temperatures for the following size paper:  
A3 – A4  
B4 – B5  
A4R – A5 – Folio  
B5R – B6  
A5R – A6  
Argentine letter  
Oficio Equador  
Australian Foolscap  
Ledger – Letter  
Argentine Legal  
Government Letter R – Government Legal Mini (STM) R  
Government letter – Executive  
Government Korea  
Argentine Letter R  
Officio – Oficio Bolivia  
Foolscap – Legal – Letter R – Mini  
Government Korea R  
Executive R  
B6R  
A6R  
Postcard  
Peak  
Target  
Peak  
Target  
Peak  
Target  
Peak  
Target  
number temperature  
number temperature  
number temperature  
number temperature  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
> 21  
135  
142  
146  
149  
153  
155  
157  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
163  
164  
164  
165  
165  
166  
166  
166  
167  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
134  
145  
149  
154  
160  
164  
168  
171  
173  
175  
176  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
188  
189  
189  
190  
190  
191  
191  
192  
192  
193  
194  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
126  
140  
148  
153  
158  
162  
165  
167  
170  
171  
173  
175  
176  
178  
179  
180  
180  
181  
181  
182  
182  
183  
183  
184  
185  
185  
185  
186  
186  
187  
187  
187  
188  
188  
188  
188  
189  
189  
189  
189  
189  
189  
189  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
190  
191  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
124  
138  
147  
154  
160  
165  
169  
171  
173  
175  
177  
179  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
187  
188  
189  
189  
190  
190  
191  
191  
192  
193  
194  
194  
194  
195  
195  
196  
196  
197  
197  
197  
198  
198  
199  
199  
199  
199  
200  
200  
201  
201  
202  
202  
202  
202  
202  
203  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
> 34  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
> 57  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
> 53  
Table 3-403  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The copier is equipped with three protection  
mechanisms to prevent the fixing heater from going  
ON at wrong timing.  
2. Oil Application Roller  
The upper fixing roller is provided with an oil  
application roller for cleaning and application of oil.  
Normally, the oil application roller remains away  
from the fixing roller, and it comes into contact with  
the upper fixing roller only when copy paper passes  
through.  
The mechanism is driven by the oil application  
solenoid (SL6); SL6 goes ON 1 sec after the  
registration roller goes ON; it then goes OFF as  
soon as the main motor (M1) goes OFF thereby  
bringing the oil application roller into contact with  
the upper fixing roller.  
• The microprocessor monitors the voltage of  
TH1 and indicates ‘E000’ or ‘E001’ or ‘E002’  
or ‘H003’ in response to an error.  
• If the voltage of TH1 and TH2 falls below  
about 0.9 V (equivalent of 215°C), the error  
detection circuit cuts off the supply power to  
the fixing heater regardless of the output of  
the microprocessor.  
If the inside temperature of the thermal switch  
rises above 220°C, the power to the fixing heater  
will be off.  
Note:  
Once the contact of the thermoswitch (TS1)  
opens,thethermoswitchcannotbeusedunless  
cooledto0°Corless;thecontactwillnotrecover  
at ambient temperature.  
DC controller PCB  
Oil application solenoid  
J324A-4 SL6D  
SL6  
Microprocessor  
(slave)  
Oil application roller  
Main motor  
M1  
J324A- 1 TH1  
Thermistor(TH1);Main  
-2  
-3  
Fixing heater  
(H1)  
Thermistor(TH2);Auxiliary  
Microprocessor  
(master)  
-4  
Thermoswitch  
(220˚C)  
Delivery roller  
Upper fixing roller  
TS1  
J319- 1 HTON  
- 3 HTRD  
SSR ON  
detection  
Lower fixing roller  
Cleaning roller  
SSR  
Power supply  
24V  
J307-2 ACOFF  
Relay(K1)  
Error detection  
circuit  
Table 3-442  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Operation of Fixing Assembly Tem-  
perature Control System  
COPY START key  
ON  
155˚C) (TH2;175˚C)  
Power switch  
ON  
115˚C  
(50˚C)(TH1  
;
WMUP WMUPR  
STBY  
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR  
STBY  
Main motor(M1);  
Scanner cooling fan(FM2)  
Slow  
Exhaust fan(FM1)  
Fixing roller heater(H1)  
Oil application solenoid(SL6)  
WAIT indicator  
(COPY START key indicator)  
Glows green  
Glows orange  
190˚C  
180˚C  
170˚C  
155˚C  
115˚C  
90˚C  
50˚C  
; Actual temperature(Paper area)  
; TH1/TH2 control temperature(Control area)  
Figure 3-443  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Detecting Overheating of the End of  
the Fixing Heater  
5. Protection Mechanism  
The machine is equipped with the following  
protection mechanisms to prevent malfunction of  
the fixing heater:  
The rear end of the machine’s fixing heater is  
equipped with a sub thermistor (TH2) to detect and  
prevent overheating of the end of the fixing heater.  
This consideration is made to prevent damage to  
the fixing roller caused by overheating occurring as  
a result of overheating on the area of the fixing not  
covered by paper during copying operation, as  
when making copies smaller than B5 in continuous  
mode.  
• If the temperature of TH2 exceeds 245°C during  
the first 10 copies in continuous mode, the fixing  
control target temperature is lowered by 5°C.  
If the temperature still increases despite the  
increase in the sheet gap and TH2 exceeds 265°C,  
the ongoing copying operation is stopped and the  
power will be turned OFF. At this time, ‘E001’ data  
will be stored in memory.  
a. Thermistor (TH1, TH2)  
1. The microprocessor on the DC controller  
monitors the voltage of the thermistor, and if it  
detects abnormally high or low temperature it  
will cut off the power to the heater and will turn  
OFF the machine’s power. At this time, ‘E001’  
through ‘E003’ data will be stored in memory.  
2. If TH1 is 260°C or more and TH2 is 270°C or  
more for 0.3 sec or more, the heater error  
detection signal (HTNG) of the DC controller  
will turn OFF the relay (RK1) on the composite  
power supply PCB to cut off the power to the  
fixing heater and will turn OFF the power.  
Caution:  
Toresetthemachine, disconnecttheconnector  
(J4) from the heater, and turn ON the power  
while pressing SW850 on the service switch  
PCB.  
b. Thermal Fuse (FU1)  
If the temperature around the thermal fuse  
exceeds the fuse rating, the thermal fuse will  
blow to cut off the power to the fixing heater.  
c. Heater ON Detection  
The heater ON detection circuit detects how  
long the fixing heater drive signal (HTRD)  
remains OFF and if it finds an error, it will turn  
OFF the power. At this time, ‘E004’ data will be  
stored in memory.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to  
remember how many copies remain to be made  
andthecurrentcopymode,andsuchjaminformation  
remains even after you have opened the machine’s  
front cover to remove jams.  
The microprocessor holds the jam detection  
sequences discussed hereafter to check for a jam,  
and it identifies a jam also when a sensor detects  
paper at power-on.  
J. Detecting Jams  
As many as ten paper sensors (3 of which are in  
the cassette unit) are used to find out whether copy  
paper is moving normally.  
• Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16)  
• Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor (PS12)  
• Registration sensor (PS6)  
• Separation sensor (PS7)  
• Delivery sensor (PS8)  
When a jam is identified, the microprocessor  
immediately stops the machine operation and cuts  
offthepowertothefixingheater(H1);itthenflashes  
theJAMmessageonthecontrolpanelwhileflashing  
the jam location indicator.  
• Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)  
• Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)  
• Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)  
• Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS2; paper  
deck pedestal)  
The activation of the jam detection mechanism  
causes the copy count to remain unchanged.  
A jam is identified at such times as instructed by  
the program in the microprocessor and in relation to  
the presence/absence of paper at specific sensors.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
1. Vertical Path Roller 1 Delay Jam  
Copy paper does not reach the vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16) within a specific time after the  
cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR SRFW  
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2)  
Jam check  
1.2 sec  
1.2 sec  
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor  
(PS16)  
Normal  
Error  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-444 Sequence of Operations  
2. Vertical Path Roller Timing Jam  
Copy paper reaches the vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16) before a specific time after the cassette  
1 pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR SRFW  
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2)  
Jam check  
0.8 sec  
0.8 sec  
Normal  
Error  
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor  
(PS16)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-445 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
3. Vertical Path Roller 2 Delay Jam  
Paper does not reach the vertical path roller 2 paper sensor within a specific time after the cassette 2 pick-  
up clutch (CL5) has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SRFW  
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)  
Jam check  
1.0 sec  
Normal  
1.0 sec  
Error  
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor  
(PS12)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-446 Sequence of Operations  
4. Vertical Path Roller 2 Timing Jam  
Copy paper reaches the vertical path roller 2 paper sensor before a specific time after the cassette 2 pick-  
up clutch (CL5) has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR SRFW  
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)  
Jam check  
0.8sec  
Normal  
0.8sec  
Vertical path roller 2 paper  
sensor (PS12)  
Error  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-447 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
5. Pre-Registration Delay Jam (vertical path roller)  
Copy paper does not reach the pre-registration sensor (PS6) within a specific time after it has reached the  
vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16).  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SRFW  
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)  
Jam check  
1.0 sec  
Normal  
1.0 sec  
Error  
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor  
(PS12)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-448 Sequence of Operations  
6. Pre-Registration Timing Jam (vertical path roller)  
Copypaperreachesthepre-registrationsensor(PS6)beforeaspecifictimeafterithasreachedthevertical  
path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16).  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR SRFW  
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)  
Jam check  
0.8sec  
Normal  
0.8sec  
Error  
Vertical path roller 2 paper  
sensor (PS12)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-449 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
7. Separation Delay Jam  
Copy paper does not reach the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific time after the registration clutch  
(CL1) has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SRFW  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
0.7 sec  
0.7 sec  
Jam check  
Normal  
Error  
Separation sensor (PS7)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-450 Sequence of Operations  
8. Separation Timing Jam  
Copy paper reaches the separation sensor (PS7) before a specific time after the registration clutch (CL1)  
has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCRV SRFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SRFW  
Registration clutch (CL5)  
0.3 sec  
0.3 sec  
Error  
Jam check  
Normal  
Separation sensor (PS7)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-451 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
9. Delivery Delay Jam  
Copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific time after the separation sensor (PS7)  
has turned ON.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SRFW  
INTR  
SRFW  
SCRV  
Separation sensor (PS7)  
1 sec  
1 sec  
Error  
Jam check  
Normal  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
Main motor (M1)  
Figure 3-452 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
10. Delivery Stationary Jam  
Copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific time after the delivery sensor  
has turned ON because of feeding faults.  
JAM flashed  
SCFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
Normal  
Error  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
*1  
*1  
Jam check  
Main motor (M1)  
1
Varies depending on paper length (paper length + 40 mm).  
Figure 3-453 Sequence of Operations  
11. Pick-Up Stationary Jam (cassette unit)  
Copy paper is over the cassette vertical path sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu, PS5cu) when the cassette pick-up  
clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu, CL3cu) turns ON because of feeding faults.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SCRV  
SCFW  
Cassette pick-up Clutch (*1)  
Jam check  
Normal  
Error  
Cassette vertical path sensor (*2)  
Cassette unit motor (M1cu/M2cu)  
1
2
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL1cu)  
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch (CL2cu)  
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch (CL3cu)  
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)  
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)  
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)  
Figure 3-454 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
12. Pick-Up Delay Jam (cassette unit)  
Copy paper does not reach the cassette vertical path sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu, PS5cu) within a specific time  
after the cassette pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu, CL3cu) has turned ON because of feeding faults.  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
SCFW  
STBY  
INTR  
SCRV  
SCFW  
Cassette pick-up clutch (*1)  
1.3 sec  
1.3 sec  
Jam check  
Normal  
Error  
Cassette vertical path sensor (*2)  
Cassette unit motor (M1cu/M2cu)  
1
2
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL1cu)  
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch (CL2cu)  
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch (CL3cu)  
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)  
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)  
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)  
Figure 3-455 Sequence of Operations  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
13. Pick-Up Delay Jam (Paper Deck Pedestal-K1)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
INTR  
Pick-up clutch (CL1)  
Jam check  
Vertical path roller  
paper sensor (PS2)  
normal  
error  
Figure 3-456  
14. Pick-Up Timing Jam (Paper Deck Pedestal-K1)  
Copy Start key  
ON  
JAM flashed  
Pick-up clutch (CL1)  
Jam check  
Vertical path roller  
paper sensor (PS2)  
normal  
error  
Figure 3-457  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
V. POWER SUPPLY  
A. Outline of Power Distribution  
Door Power  
switch switch  
Drum heater  
DS1  
Cassette heater  
Power  
plug  
Anti-condensation heater  
Fixing heater  
Charging roller  
Developing cylinder  
Transfer roller  
Static eliminator  
Antenna sensor  
Intensity sensor  
AE sensor  
Fixing heater  
driver PCB  
FU2  
High-  
T1  
voltage  
power  
supply  
unit  
+5V  
+24  
+5V  
+24V  
+5V  
+24V  
+5V  
DC  
Power  
supply  
+24V  
+30V  
Sensors  
Main  
transformer  
unit  
DC  
controller  
+24V  
Solenoids/Clutches  
Fans  
+24V  
+24V  
+24V  
+5V  
Motors  
Relay  
RL1  
Pre-exposure lamp  
BAT  
301  
Control panel  
+5V  
CC-IVN  
+24V  
Counter  
+5V  
Main motor  
M1  
+30V  
driver PCB  
Scanning  
lamp  
control  
circuit  
Scanning lamp  
Sorter  
+24V,5V  
+24V,5V  
composite power supply circuit  
DF/RDF  
Deck  
+34V,24V,5V  
Figure 3-501  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Caution:  
B. Power Supply Circuitry  
The AC power supply unit remains supplied  
with voltage even when the power is OFF.  
The machine’s power supply unit uses a single  
main transformer (T101) to supply DC power.  
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply  
when the power switch (SW1) and the door switch  
are turned ON.  
Reference:  
ThetolerancesoftheDCvoltageareasfollows:  
• +30 V +10%, -5%  
Since DC power to the DC controller circuit will  
be cut off in this condition, the machine is equipped  
with a lithium battery (BAT301) to back up the RAM  
(Q308) in the DC controller circuit.  
• +24 V ±5%  
• +5V ±5%  
However, the above stand when the AC input  
inaccuracy is ±10%.  
DS1  
PWSW  
T101  
FU1  
DC Power  
supply  
unit  
+30V  
+24V  
+5V  
Q308  
BAT  
301  
Power supply unit  
DC controller  
Figure 3-502  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Detecting Overcurrent in the Low-Voltage  
Power Supply  
If the composite power supply PCB identifies an  
C. Detecting Errors on the  
Power Supply PCB  
error in any of the DC loads or overcurrent caused  
by wire trapping, the LED is on fixed.  
The microprocessor (U402) and LED501 on the  
composite power supply PCB checks for errors; if  
an error is identified, the microprocessor (U402)  
communicates with the DC controller to indicate the  
results of self diagnosis on the display or to flash  
LED501 to alert the user.  
CommunicationErrorbetweenDCController  
PCB and Composite Power Supply PCB  
If an error occurs in the communication between  
the DC controller PCB and the composite power  
supply PCB, ‘E240’ is indicated as soon as the DC  
controller PCB identifies an error. In addition, LED  
is flashed at intervals of 5 sec when the composite  
power supply PCB identifies an error.  
Data Error in the High-Voltage Output  
If the difference between the actual control  
value and the setting associated with the high  
voltage generated by the microprocessor (U402) is  
more than a specific value, the microprocessor  
(U402)communicateserrordatatotheDCcontroller  
PCB to indicate ‘E064’.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
D. Protection Mechanisms for  
the Power Supply Circuit  
The composite power supply PCB is  
equippedwithanovercurrentdetectioncircuit;  
its protection mechanism turns ON to stop the  
output if a short circuit occurs because of a  
fault in the loads.  
When the output is stopped, open the front  
door to turn OFF the door switch, correct the  
load, and turn ON the door switch and the  
power switch to return the output.  
Caution:  
Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) before  
performing the above work.  
Donotrepeat resettingshort-circuits;otherwise,  
the built-in fuse (F2) can blow.  
Note:  
Replace the lithium battery only with the one  
listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of different  
battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.  
The battery may present a fire or chemical burn  
hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disas-  
semble, or dispose of it in fire.  
Keep the battery out of reach of children and  
discard any used battery promptly.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
VI. SERVICE MODE  
A. Outline  
B. Using Service Mode  
The machine’s service mode is grouped into the  
following six:  
1. Starting Service Mode  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator.  
• If you want to make checks as in “I/O display  
mode” while making copies, set the appropri-  
ate copying mode.  
No.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
Description  
Control display mode  
I/O display mode  
2) Push the service mode switch (SW850) on the  
service mode PCB with a hex key.  
• The copy counter display indicates ‘1’.  
• While in copy mode, the copy density indica-  
tor LED indicates the position of the fixing  
belt.  
Adjustment mode  
Operation/inspection mode  
Machine settings mode  
Counter mode  
• A press on the Reset key ends service mode.  
Service mode switch  
Table 7-601  
Figure 3-601  
2. Selecting Service Mode Group  
1) While the copy count indicator is indicating ‘1’,  
press a key from ‘1’ through ‘6’ on the numeric  
keypad to select a service mode.  
2) Press the AE key.  
• Themachinestartstheselectedservicemode,  
and the copy counter indicates ‘301’. ‘301’  
means that the mode is the first mode of  
service mode 3.  
3. Selecting an Item under Each Ser-  
vice Mode  
1) While the 100’s of the number indicated on the  
copy mode counter (‘301’, for example) is flash-  
ing, press the numeric keypad to select the  
mode you want to execute.  
• Thecopycounterindicatorindicatesthenum-  
ber, flashing the 100’s.  
• A press on the Clear key returns to group  
selection (‘3’, for example).  
2) Press the Start key.  
• Themachinestartstheselectedservicemode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
4. Using Adjustment Mode (‘3’) and  
Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)  
1) Press the numeric keypad to change the num-  
ber.  
7. Recording on the Service Label  
Figure 3-601 shows the label attached behind  
the front door. Each machine is adjusted and set at  
the factory, and the appropriate values are re-  
corded on the label.  
• The number flashes.  
Be sure to record any new settings you entered  
inthefieldonthelabel. Further, ifyouhavereplaced  
the DC controller, be sure to enter the settings  
recorded on the label.  
• If the number is negative, ‘%’ turns ON. To  
enteranegativenumber, pressthe%keyand  
enter the number on the numeric keypad.  
2) Press the AE key.  
If you have replaced the drum unit or the com-  
posite power supply, be sure to enter the settings  
recorded on the labels attached to the drum unit or  
composite power supply (service parts), and record  
these settings on the label.  
• The machine stores the value and stops  
flashing the value.  
• A press on the Start key starts copying opera-  
tion.  
3) To change the number once again, repeat  
steps 1) and 2).  
4) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.  
Program  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
308  
309  
310  
311  
312  
315  
316  
318  
319  
320  
321  
322  
323  
324  
325  
326  
327  
328  
Meaning  
AE curve shift  
Value  
5. Using Operation/Inspection Mode  
(‘4’)  
1) Press the Start key to execute the selected  
service mode.  
2) Press the Stop key to stop and return to item  
selection.  
AE curve slope  
Fixing offset temperature  
Register  
Leading edge  
Register B-side  
Leading edge B-side  
Trailing edge  
• If the mode is designed to stop automatically,  
the machine stops and automatically returns  
to item selection.  
Stack-bypass tail  
Blank home  
6. Resetting Error Codes (back-up  
codes)  
If ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or ‘E004’ is  
indicated, remove the cause of the error and reset  
the code that has been backed up.  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator.  
2) While holding down the service mode switch  
(SW850) on the service PCB with a hex key,  
press the power switch.  
Blank home reduction  
APVC voltage  
APVC current  
ATVC compensation  
Stack-bypass loop  
Main register loop  
C1_cl_off  
C2_cl_off  
C3_cl_off  
3) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.  
Duplex paper stack adj  
Duplex inversion roller  
Halogen lamp intensity  
Duplex input loop  
Duplex output loop  
Figure 3-602  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’)  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.  
• A press on the Start key while a description of the selected service mode is indicated will execute  
appropriate copying operations.  
No.  
Service mode  
Description  
101 Jam location  
Indicates the jam location on the copy counter  
indicator. (See the next page.)  
103 Primary current buffer display  
104 Primary charging voltage display  
unit: µA  
unit: V  
To obtain the actual primary charging voltage, put the  
indicated value into negative and subtract 1000.  
105 Primary current display  
106 Intensity display  
unit: µA  
unit: lux  
To obtain the actual intensity (lux), divide the indi-  
cated value by 100.  
107 Jam history  
See the next page.  
108 Error history (E indications)  
Indicates a history of the most recent ten errors. A  
press on the ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’, ‘5’, ‘6’, ‘7’, ‘8’, ‘9’, or ‘0’  
key on the numeric keypad will indicate the either of  
most recent through tenth most recent error.  
109 Fixing main thermistor (TH1) detection unit: °C  
temperature  
110 Fixing target temperature  
112 AE sensor output  
unit: °C  
Normal if the value changes for each original when  
making copies in AE.  
113 ROM version No.  
Indicates the parts revision number of the ROM.  
Indicates the version of the program.  
Normal if between ‘68’ and ‘72’.  
114 ROM release No.  
116 AE scan intensity display  
120 Jam interval  
121 Jam paper size data  
123 Jam document handler copying data  
Table 3-602  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No. 101 Jam Location Display  
The type of jam is indicated using the copy  
counter.  
LED (ON)  
Type of jam  
Pre-registration delay jam  
Pre-registration stationary jam  
Separation delay jam  
LED (ON)  
JD  
Type of jam  
J1  
J2  
J3  
J4  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
J9  
JA  
Jb  
JC  
Cassette 5 pick-up delay jam  
Cassette 5 pick-up stationary jam  
Duplexing unit inlet delay jam  
Duplexing unit outlet delay jam  
Duplexing unit registration delay jam  
Duplexing unit inlet stationary jam  
Vertical path roller 2 delay jam  
Vertical path roller 1 delay jam  
Vertical path roller 2 stationary jam  
Vertical path roller 1 stationary jam  
Deck outlet delay jam  
JE  
JF  
Separation stationary jam  
Delivery delay jam  
J10  
J11  
J12  
J13  
J14  
J15  
J16  
J17  
J25  
Delivery stationary jam  
Sorter jam  
Door open jam  
Cassette 3 pick-up delay jam  
Cassette 3 pick-up stationary jam  
Cassette 4 pick-up delay jam  
Cassette 4 pick-up stationary jam  
Jam due to electrical causes  
(IE: Main power off during copy)  
Table 3-603  
Jam History  
Table 3-604  
No. 107  
Apresson8indicatestheeighthmostrecenterror.  
A press on ‘9’ indicates the ninth most recent error.  
Apresson10indicatesthetenthmostrecenterror.  
A press on the ‘1’ through ‘10’ on the numeric  
keypad indicates the most recent ten jams.  
A press on ‘1’ indicates the most recent jam.  
Apresson2indicatesthesecondmostrecentjam.  
A press on ‘3’ indicates the third most recent jam.  
A press on ‘4’ indicates the fourth most recent jam.  
A press on ‘5’ indicates the fifth most recent jam.  
A press on ‘6’ indicates the sixth most recent jam.  
A press on ‘7’ indicates the seventh most recent jam.  
A press on ‘8’ indicates the eighth most recent jam.  
A press on ‘9’ indicates the ninth most recent jam.  
A press on ‘10’ indicates the tenth most recent jam.  
No. 108  
Error History  
A press on the ‘1’ through ‘10’ on the numeric  
keypad indicates the most recent ten errors.  
A press on ‘1’ indicates the most recent error.  
A press on ‘2’ indicates the second most recent error.  
A press on ‘3’ indicates the third most recent error.  
A press on ‘4’ indicates the fourth most recent error.  
A press on ‘5’ indicates the fifth most recent error.  
A press on ‘6’ indicates the sixth most recent error.  
Apresson7indicatestheseventhmostrecenterror.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No. 120 Jam interval indication  
Service program 122 displays the drawer selec-  
tion at jam occurrence:  
By pushing key  
Jam interval indication 120  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
First lates jam interval.  
Second latest jam interval.  
Third latest jam interval.  
Fourth latest jam interval.  
Fifth latest jam interval.  
Sixth latest jam interval.  
Seventh latest jam interval.  
Eigth latest jam interval.  
Nineth latest jam interval.  
Tenth latest jam interval.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Upper drawer.  
Lower drawer.  
Stack bypass.  
Optional 1st drawer.  
Optional 2nd drawer.  
Optional 3rd drawer.  
Optional deck.  
Duplex unit.  
Table 3-607  
Service program 123 displays if Document Han-  
dlerwasusedforcopyingatjamoccurrence(1=DH  
used)  
Table 3-605  
It displays the number of copies made (in tens:  
1 to 999) between two jams occurence.  
No. 121 Jam paper size data indication  
No. 122 Jam drawer selection data indication  
No. 123 Jam Document Handler copying data  
indication  
By pushing key  
Jam data indication  
First lates jam data.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Second latest jam data.  
Third latest jam data.  
Fourth latest jam data.  
Fifth latest jam data.  
Sixth latest jam data.  
Seventh latest jam data.  
Eigth latest jam data.  
Nineth latest jam data.  
Tenth latest jam data.  
Table 3-606  
Service program 121 displays the paper size at  
jam occurrence (B5, B5R, B4, A3, A4, A4R, A5,  
A5R, A6R)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
D. I/O Mode (‘2’)  
• To start I/O display mode, press ‘2’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.  
• A press on the Start key while a description of the selected service mode is indicated will execute  
appropriate copying operations.  
No.  
206  
Item  
Description  
Fixing main thermistor (TH1)  
voltage display  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
207  
Fixing sub thermistor (TH2) voltage  
display  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
208  
210  
AE sensor voltage display  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
Multifeeder paper width sensor  
voltage display  
211  
Light adjustment sensor voltage  
display  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
212  
213  
214  
Copy density correction knob  
Toner sensor detector  
Port C digit 1 display  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
Port C digit 2 display  
Port C digit 3 display  
Port C digit 4 display  
Port C digit 5 display  
Port C digit 6 display  
Port C digit 7 display  
Port C digit 8 display  
Port C digit P0 display  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-  
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input  
port.  
Table 3-608  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No. 214, No. 215, No. 216, No. 217, and No. 218  
No.  
LED  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
Item  
Description  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)  
Cassette 3 paper present  
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)  
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)  
Reserved  
214  
ON: connected  
Total copy counter connection  
Auto paper selection sensor 1  
Cassette 2 connection  
ON: paper present  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
ON: connected  
Cassette 4/5 paper present  
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS6cu)  
Deck right door open  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (door closed)  
ON: pushed  
215  
216  
217  
Service switch  
Total copy counter connection  
Auto paper selection sensor 2  
Option counter connection  
Cassette size 1 (cassette 1)  
Cassette size 2 (cassette 1)  
Cassette size 3 (cassette 1)  
Cassette size 4 (cassette 1)  
Power switch ON/OFF  
ON: connected  
ON: paper present  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
ON: connected  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate resent  
ON: ON  
Auto paper selection sensor 3  
Cassette 1 paper present  
Cassette size 1 (cassette 2)  
Cassette size 2 (cassette 2)  
Cassette size 3 (cassette 2)  
Cassette size 4 (cassette 2)  
Reserved  
ON: paper present  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
Auto paper selection sensor 4  
Reserved  
ON: paper present  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (Paper present)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)  
See the table below.  
Cassette size 1 (cassette 3)  
Cassette size 2 (cassette 3)  
Cassette size 3 (cassette 3)  
Cassette size 4 (cassette 3)  
Option cassette connection detection 1  
Option cassette connection detection 2  
Reserved  
218  
See the table below.  
1-g  
Table 3-609  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No. 219, No. 220, and No. 221  
No.  
LED  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
Item  
Cassette size 1 (cassette 4/5)  
Cassette size 2 (cassette 4/5)  
Cassette size 3 (cassette 4/5)  
Cassette size 4 (cassette 4/5)  
Option cassette connection detection 3  
Option cassette connection detection 4  
Reserved  
Description  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
219  
ON: light-blocking plate present  
See the table below.  
See the table below.  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
ON: connected  
Option counter 1 detection  
Option counter 2 detection  
ON: connected  
Reserved  
220  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ON: light-blocking plate present (door closed)  
Right door open detection  
Reserved  
1-g  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
Multifeeder paper detection  
Delivery sensor  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)  
Reserved  
221  
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)  
Separation sensor  
Control Card IV connection  
Reserved  
ON: connected  
1-g  
Reserved  
Table 3-610  
Service mode No. 218 Service mode No. 219  
LED 1-e  
OFF  
ON  
LED 1-f  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
LED 1-e  
LED 1-f  
No optional feeding unit.  
×
ON  
OFF  
×
×
×
×
×
×
Optional deck feeding unit.  
1-cassette optional feeding unit.  
2-cassette optional feeding unit.  
3-cassette optional feeding unit.  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
×
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No. 222 Port P0 Display  
LED  
Description  
ON: paper present  
Item  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
1-a  
1-b  
1-c  
1-d  
1-e  
1-f  
Delivery sensor (PS8)  
ON: paper present  
ON: at HP  
Lens home position sensor (PS2)  
Blanking shutter home position sensor (PS3)  
Halogen lamp check signal  
ON: at HP  
OFF: E220 error  
Heater ON detection (triac short circuit detection)  
Composite power supply ACK  
ON: hater ON detected  
ON: acknowledged  
1-g  
Table 3-611  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’)  
• To start the mode, press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad and press the AE key.  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To change the value, enter the appropriate value on the numeric keypad and then press the AE key.  
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.  
• A press on the Start key will execute appropriate copying operations.  
• If the number is negative, ‘%’ turns ON. To enter a negative number, press the % key and enter the  
number on the numeric keypad.  
Item  
Description  
No.  
301  
Settings  
AE scan lamp intensity automatic  
adjustment  
AE mode copy density (developing  
bias) reference point adjustment  
default:  
0
302  
303  
–26 ~ +26  
–26 ~ +26  
AE mode copy density (developing  
bias) slope adjustment  
See p. 3-129.  
default:  
0
0
Fixing heater temperature off set  
default:  
304  
305  
–50 ~ +50  
0 ~ 63  
Leading edge margin adjustment  
(registration roller ON timing)  
A higher setting delays the copy paper in  
relation to the image, thereby decreasing  
the margin.  
default:  
unit: 0.27 mm  
30  
Leading edge non-image width  
adjustment (timing at which the  
blanking open/close shutter is  
closed)  
A higher setting increases the leading edge  
non-image width.  
306  
307  
308  
309  
310  
311  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 15  
default:  
38  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Page separation right side leading  
edge registration adjustment (timing  
at which the registration roller turns  
ON)  
A higher setting delays the copy paper in  
relation to the image.  
default:  
28  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Page separation right side leading  
edge margin (timing at which the  
blanking shutter closes)  
A higher setting increases the leading edge  
margin.  
default:  
38  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Trailing edge fine adjustment  
(timing at which the blanking open/  
close shutter is opened)  
A higher setting decreases the trailing edge  
margin.  
default:  
36  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Multifeeder trailing edge margin  
adjustment (timing at which the  
blanking open/close shutter is  
opened)  
A higher setting decreases the trailing edge  
margin.  
default:  
26  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Left/right margin adjustment  
(DIRECT)  
(home position for the blanking  
slide shutter)  
A higher setting increases both left and  
right margins.  
default:  
9
unit: 0.27 mm  
Table 3-612-1  
Note: A press on the Start key when in No. 305, 306, 307, or 308 makes copies in the mode that has been  
effective before the activation of the mode; when executing No. 307 or 308, it is recommended that  
page separation mode be selected before activating service mode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No.  
312  
Item  
Description  
Settings  
Left/right margin adjustment  
(reduction; the movement of the  
blanking slide shutter)  
A higher setting increases both left and  
right margins.  
–10 ~ +10  
default:  
–2  
unit: 0l.27 mm  
313  
314  
315  
Primary output voltage correction  
(correction against the output  
voltage determined on APVC)  
Enter the value recorded on the label  
attached to the drum cartridge whenever  
you have replaced the drum cartridge.  
–16 ~ +16  
–40 ~ +40  
–16 ~ +16  
default:  
–4  
APVC measurement current shift  
(correction against APVC results)  
Enter the value recorded on the label  
attached to the drum cartridge whenever  
you have replaced the drum cartridge.  
default:  
–10  
APVC measurement voltage  
correction (correction against  
measurement voltage added for  
APVC)  
default:  
unit: 16 V  
5
Execute it when replacing the composite  
power supply, and enter the value indicated  
on the label attached to the composite  
power supply.  
316  
318  
APVC measurement current  
correction (correction against the  
current value measured during  
APVC)  
default:  
0
–10 ~ +10  
–4 ~ +4  
Execute it when replacing the composite  
power supply, and enter the value indicated  
on the label attached to the composite  
power supply.  
Transfer output voltage adjustment  
(correction against the transfer  
voltage determined by ATVC)  
Execute when replacing the composite  
power supply by converting the value  
indicated on the label attached to the  
composite power supply as follows:  
default:  
Value on label Input value  
0
Value on label Input value  
1
2
3
4
5
0
–1  
–2  
–3  
–4  
6
7
8
9
+1  
+2  
+3  
+4  
319  
320  
321  
322  
323  
Multifeeder arch adjustment (timing  
at which the pick-up roller is turned  
OFF)  
A higher setting increases arching.  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
0 ~ 63  
default:  
36  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Cassette 1/2 pick-up arch adjust-  
ment (timing at which the pick-up  
roller turns OFF)  
A higher setting increases arching.  
default:  
32  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Cassette 3 pick-up arch adjustment  
(timing at which the pick-up roller  
turns OFF)  
A higher setting increases arching.  
default:  
10  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Cassette 4 pick-up arch adjustment  
(timing at which the pick-up roller  
turns OFF)  
A higher setting increases arching.  
default:  
10  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Cassette 5 pick-up arch adjustment  
(timing at which the pick-up roller  
turns OFF)  
A higher setting increases arching.  
default:  
10  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Table 3-612-2  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No.  
Item  
Settings  
0 ~ 63  
Description  
324 Duplex paper stack timing  
adjustment  
A higher setting delays the ON timing.  
unit: 0.27 mm  
default:  
32  
325 Set-back roller reversal timing  
adjustment  
0 ~ 63  
A higher setting delays the reversal timing.  
unit: 0.27 mm  
default:  
32  
326 Lamp intensity adjustment  
40 ~ 200 For factory only.  
default:  
125  
327 Duplexing unit inlet arch adjustment  
0 ~ 63  
A higher setting increases the arch.  
default:  
28  
unit: 0.27 mm  
328 Duplexing unit out let adjustment  
0 ~ 63  
A higher setting increases the arch.  
default:  
28  
unit: 0.27 mm  
Table 3-612-3  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’)  
• To start inspection mode, press ‘4’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To execute the mode, press the Start key.  
• To end the mode, press the Stop key, thereby returning to item selection.  
• If the mode is designed to stop automatically, the machine will automatically return to item selection after  
ending the mode.  
No.  
Item  
Description  
401 Developing assembly idle rotation  
Execute the mode after supplying toner during installa-  
tion work.  
402 Primary roller cleaning  
403 Transfer roller cleaning  
406 Nip check  
Use the mode when checking the nip or when adjusting  
the pressure of the lower fixing roller.  
407 Halogen lamp intensity adjusting  
408 Scanning lamp ON check  
Press the zoom +key or the zoom -key to change the  
value.  
A press on the Start key causes the lamp to turn ON for  
about 2.2 sec. (later E220 error happens)  
409 Control panel all ON  
410 Scanner forward stop in AE  
411 Pre-exposure lamp ON  
412 APVC measuring  
412 Drum setting  
413 Cool drum setting  
414 Automatic drum setting  
415 Fixing offset adjustment  
417 Jam history clear  
Factory only  
Factory only  
418 Error history clear  
419 Scanner AP initialization  
450 Back-up RAM clear  
See p. 3-133.  
Table 3-613  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)  
• To start machine settings mode, press ‘5’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To change the value, enter the new value on the numeric keypad, and press the AE key.  
• To deselect the item, press the Clear key.  
• A press on the Start key will execute appropriate copying operations.  
No.  
Item  
Description  
501 Multifeeder paper width sensor  
characteristics registration  
See p. 3-131.  
502 Copy density notation switch (9-/  
17- step)  
9-step:  
17-step:  
default:  
0
1
0 (9-step)  
503 Auto energy saver function deacti-  
vation  
• Entering ‘1’ on the numeric keypad causes the indica-  
tion to change to ‘ON’, activating the auto energy  
saver function.  
• Entering ‘0’ on the numeric keypad causes the indica-  
tion to change to ‘OFF, deactivating the function.  
default:  
activated  
504 Copy count upper limit set  
settings: 0 to 99  
default:  
0
When set to ‘0’, 100 copies.  
505 Universal cassette paper size  
storage (cassette 1)  
See p. 3-132.  
settings:  
default:  
0 to 14  
0
506 Separation static eliminator output  
voltage switch  
0: 2 kV  
1: 4 kV  
default:  
0
507 Fixing forced wait  
Activating the item increases the time of initial rotation.  
Activate it if the fixing on the first copy is poor because  
of a low-temperature environment.  
0:  
1:  
deactivated  
activated  
default:  
0
Table 3-614-1  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
No.  
509  
Item  
Description  
Universal cassette paper size  
storage (cassette 2)  
settings: 0 to 14  
default:  
0
510  
511  
512  
Universal cassette paper size  
storage (cassette 3)  
settings: 0 to 14  
default:  
0
Universal cassette paper size  
storage (cassette 4)  
settings: 0 to 14  
default:  
0
Universal cassette paper size  
storage (cassette 5)  
settings: 0 to 14  
default:  
0
Table 3-614-2  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)  
• To start counter mode, press the ‘6’ key on the numeric keypad and press the AE key.  
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.  
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.  
• A press on the Start key while a description of the mode is indicated will execute appropriate copying  
operations.  
• To obtain the actual count, multiply the indicated value by 100.  
No.  
601  
602  
603  
Item  
Large copy counter  
Small copy counter  
Total copy counter  
Description  
Table 3-615  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
VII.SELF DIAGNOSIS  
The microprocessor on the machine’s DC con-  
troller is provided with a self diagnosis mechanism  
which checks the condition of the machine (sensors  
in particular) and indicates a code to identify the  
error it detects.  
Detecting an error associated with ‘E000’ will  
automaticallyturnOFFthepower.(errorautopower-  
off)  
A. Copier Self Diagnosis  
Possible cause  
Code  
Description  
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,  
poor contact, short circuit)  
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,  
cracking)  
• Thermal fuse (FU1; malfunction)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• The detection temperature of the main  
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 50°C 15 sec  
after a press on the Copy Start key.  
E000  
E001  
• Thermistor (TH1; short circuit)  
• Triac (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• The detection temperature of the main  
thermistor (TH1) exceeds 225°C during  
copying or stand-by.  
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,  
poor contact, open circuit)  
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,  
cracking)  
• Thermal fuse (FU1; activation)  
• Triac (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• The detection temperature of the main  
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 155°C 25  
sec after it has reached 50°C during copying.  
E002  
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,  
poor contact)  
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,  
cracking)  
• The detection temperature of the main  
thermistor (TH1) is less than 50°C after it has  
reached 155°C during copying.  
• Thermal fuse (FU1; activation)  
• Triac (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
E003  
• Triac (faulty)  
• Heater ON PCB (faulty)  
The activation of fixing heater (HTON=1) is  
detected when the fixing heater drive signal is  
OFF (HTRD=0).  
E004  
E010  
• Main motor (M1; faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
The revolution of the main motor deviates from  
the specified value (MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or  
more while the main motor drive signal remains  
ON (MMD=1).  
• Counter (open circuit)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
A check is made immediately before the  
counter turns ON or OFF and when starting the  
count.  
Normal if the drive signal is ‘0’ when the  
counter turns ON. Normal if the drive signal is  
‘0’ when the counter is OFF.  
Note: The check is made only if the counter is  
installed.  
E030  
E041  
• Deck motor (M1dk; faulty)  
• Deck lifter clutch (CL4dk; faulty)  
• Lifter sensor (PS3dk; faulty)  
The lifter does not reach the lifter sensor  
(PS3dk) within 40 sec after the deck lifter  
clutch (CL4dk) has turned ON.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Possible cause  
Description  
Code  
• Composite power supply (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
The output value is different from the setting for  
the high-voltage output of the composite power  
supply.  
E064  
E202  
• Scanner cable (displacement,  
tear)  
• Scanner home position sensor  
(PS1; faulty)  
• Scanner motor (M2; faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
The scanner does not return to home position  
within 5 sec when scanning operation is  
started.  
‘E002’ may be checked in service mode No.  
108.  
(control panel  
keys locked)  
• Lens cable (displacement, tear)  
• Lens home position sensor (PS2;  
faulty)  
• Slide shutter (faulty movement)  
• Blanking shutter home position  
sensor (PS3; faulty)  
• The lens home position signal (LHP) is not  
generated within a specific period of time  
after the power switch has been turned ON.  
• The lens home position signal (LHP) is being  
generated for more than a specific period of  
time.  
E210  
• Change solenoid (SL1; faulty)  
• Lens motor (M3; faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• The blank shutter home position signal  
(BSHP) is not generated when the slide  
shutter is moved.  
• Scanning lamp (faulty)  
• Composite power supply (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• Activation of the lamp is detected during  
standby more than 22 sec.  
E220  
E240  
E260  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• Composite power supply (faulty)  
An error is detected in the communication  
between the CPU (Q301) on the DC controller  
and the CPU (U402) on the composite power  
supply.  
• Power supply cooling fan (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
The power supply cooling fan (FM3) remains  
stationary for 10 sec or more because of an  
error.  
The intervals of the zero-cross signal deviates  
from the tolerance.  
• Power supply frequency (fluctua-  
tion)  
E261  
E710  
E712  
• Composite power supply (faulty)  
Initialization of the IPC (Q311) fails at power-  
on.  
• DC controller (faulty)  
An error in the communication with the DF  
cannot be removed.  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• DF controller(faulty)  
• Connector (poor contact)  
• Communication with ASSIST after connec-  
tion fails.  
• A break is detected with ASSIST.  
• DC controller (faulty)  
• ASSIST controller (faulty)  
• Communication with ASSIST  
(faulty)  
E717  
E802  
The relay (KI) does not turn off when the power  
switch is turned off (ACOFF=0).  
• Composite power supply (faulty)  
• DC controller (faulty)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Initializing Back-Up Error Codes  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator.  
2) While holding down the service mode switch  
(SW850) on the DC controller, turn the power  
switch OFF/ON.  
If the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned ON,  
you can reset the machine by turning OFF and then  
ON the power switch, unless the error is repre-  
sented by ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, “E003', or ‘E004’.  
Thisistopreventtheuserfromresettingthemachine  
thereby damaging the fixing assembly.  
3) When the power has been removed in about 2  
sec, turn ON the power switch once again.  
If ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, “E003', or ‘E004’ is  
indicated,removethecauseoftheerrorandperform  
the following:  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding Unit  
Code  
Cause  
Description  
• Cassette feeding unit control- • The motor clock signal is not detected  
ler (faulty)  
• Cassette feeding unit motor  
(faulty)  
within 1 sec after the pedestal motor  
drive signal has been generated.  
E901  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis  
Code  
Cause  
Description  
• Data communication with  
copier (faulty)  
• Communication breaks for 5 sec or  
more. (The communication is monitored  
at all times.)  
E400  
• Pick-up motor (faulty)  
• Pick-up roller home position  
sensor (faulty)  
• The state of the sensor remains un-  
changed even after the pick-up motor  
has been driven for 2 sec or more.  
E401  
• Belt motor (faulty)  
• Belt motor clock sensor  
(S11; faulty)  
• The number of belt motor clock pulses is  
below a specific value for 100 ms.  
E402  
E403  
• Feeding motor (faulty)  
• Slip sensor (faulty)  
• The number of slip clock pulses is below  
a specific value for 100 ms.  
• Delivery motor (faulty)  
• Delivery motor clock sensor  
(faulty)  
• The number of delivery motor clock  
pulses is below a specific value for 200  
ms.  
E404  
E411  
• Registration sensor (faulty)  
• Original sensor (faulty)  
• The output of each sensor in the ab-  
sence of paper is more than a specific  
value.  
Caution:  
1. When the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned ON, you may reset the machine by turning OFF and  
then ON the copier’s power switch.  
2. You may make copies even while the RF remains out of order by placing originals on the copy paper.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis  
Code  
Cause  
Description  
• CPU or communication IC on • An error has been detected in the  
sorter controller (faulty)  
communication between the sorter and  
the copier.  
E500  
E510  
E530  
• Feeding motor (fails to  
rotate)  
• The clock signal from the motor is  
absent for 250 ms or more.  
• Staple guide bar swing motor • The home position sensor does not turn  
(fails to rotate)  
OFF after generating the motor drive  
signals for 2560 pulses.  
• Stapler unit swing motor  
(fails to rotate)  
• The stapler unit swing motor sensor  
does not turn OFF within 500 ms after  
the motor drive signal has been gener-  
ated.  
E531  
• The sensor does not turn ON within  
1000 ms after the stapler unit swing  
sensor has turned OFF.  
• Bin shift motor (fails to  
rotate)  
• The lead cam home position sensor  
does not turn OFF within 2000 ms after  
the motor drive signal has been gener-  
ated.  
• The lead cam home position sensor  
does not turn ON within 2000 ms after  
the lead cam home position sensor has  
turned OFF.  
E540  
E541  
• Bin motor (faulty)  
• Lead cam drive gear (dis-  
placement)  
• The lead cam position sensor does not  
turn ON within 10 sec after the lead cam  
position sensor has turned OFF.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
VIII. STANDARDS AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
2
Adjusting the Scanning Lamp  
Intensity  
Select service mode No. 407.  
1) Place the Test Sheet NA3 on the copyboard,  
and close the copyboard cover.  
2) Turn OFF AE, and make copies in continuous  
mode at copy density 5 and VR850 (DC bias) at  
center.  
3) Press the zoom + keys or zoom - key so that the  
optimum image is obtained.  
A. Electrical  
1
Adjustment after Replacing  
PCBs  
You must perform the following adjustments  
whenever you have replaced the following PCBs:  
• If the image is too light, press the zoom + key.  
• If the image is too dark, press the zoom - key.  
a. DC Controller PCB  
1) Start service mode (adjustment mode [3]), and  
enter the settings indicated on the Service  
Mode label attached behind the front door.  
2) Perform the multifeeder paper width sensor  
adjustment.  
3) Perform scanning lamp intensity adjustment.  
4) Perform AE adjustment.  
As necessary, change the settings of service  
mode and user mode.  
Reference:  
1. What is referred to as optimum image is an  
image in which gray scale No. 8 on the copy  
corresponds to gray scale No. 4 through  
No. 7 on the Test sheet while the copy is  
free of fogging.  
2. TurningtheVRexcessivelycancauseE220  
to be displayed. If this is the case, turn the  
VR 301 to the center position, turn OFF/ON  
the power, and make adjustments once  
again.  
Caution:  
If you changed any of the settings indicated in  
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the  
new settings on the label.  
Caution:  
Aftermakingtheadjustment, besuretoperform  
AE adjustment.  
b. Composite Power Supply PCB  
1) Select service mode No. 315 through No. 318  
(adjustment mode [3]), and enter the settings  
indicatedonthelabelattachedtothecomposite  
power supply PCB.  
3
AE Adjustment  
PerformAEadjustmentusingthefollowingthree  
service modes:  
q AE Basic Adjustment  
Be sure to record any new settings in the Ser-  
vice Mode label.  
No. 410 scanner forward stop  
c. AE Sensor PCB  
No. 408 scanning lamp ON check  
No. 208 AE sensor voltage display  
No. 301 AE scan lamp intensity automatic ad-  
justment  
1) Perform AE adjustment.  
Caution:  
If you changed any of the settings indicated in  
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the  
new settings on the label.  
w No. 302 AE mode copy density (developing  
bias) reference adjustment  
e No. 303 AE mode copy density (developing  
bias) slope adjustment  
If the copy density is not optimum after perform-  
ing AE basic adjustment q No. 410, No. 408, No.  
208, and No. 301, try w No. 302 and e No. 303 in  
sequence.  
d. Light Adjustment Sensor PCB  
1) Perform scanning lamp intensity adjustment.  
2) Perform AE adjustment.  
Caution:  
If you changed any of the settings indicated in  
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the  
new settings on the label.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
If you have replaced the AE sensor, scanning  
lamp, or DC controller or if you performed scanning  
lamp intensity adjustment (VR301), you must per-  
form  
9) Press the Start key.  
• The display indicates ‘0’ through ‘255’.  
10) Adjust VR860/851 on the Service switch PCB  
so that the display indicates ‘100’ through ‘105’.  
11) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.  
• This turns OFF the scanning lamp and turns  
ON the power once again.  
12) Press the service mode switch.  
• The machine starts service mode and indi-  
cates ‘1’.  
• AE basic adjustment,  
• No. 410 scanning forward stop,  
• No. 408 scanning lamp ON check,  
• No. 208 AE sensor voltage indication, and  
• No.301AEscanninglampintensityautomatic  
adjustment.  
Go through the steps that follow when making  
these adjustments. Table 3-801 gives a list of three  
service modes excluding No. 408 scanning lamp  
ON check and No. 208 AE sensor voltage indica-  
tion.  
13) Press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad, and press the  
AE key.  
• The display indicates ‘301’.  
14) Press the Start key.  
Caution:  
a. AE Basic Adjustment (No. 410, No. 408,  
No. 208, No. 301)  
Wait until initial rotation ends.  
In this adjustment, the intensity of the scanning  
lamp is read by the lamp intensity sensor, and the  
voltage of the AE sensor unit is adjusted using  
VR860/851 on the service switch PCB.  
After making the adjustment, you must perform  
AE scan lamp intensity automatic adjustment.  
1) Place the Test Sheet NA-3 on the copyboard,  
and close the copyboard.  
Press the service mode switch (SW850) to start  
service mode.  
2) Press ‘4’ on the numeric keypad, and press the  
AE key.  
• After initial rotation, the AE indicator starts to  
flash.  
15) Press the AE key so that the following takes  
place to perform automatic adjustment.  
• The AE indicator stops flashing and remains  
ON.  
• The scanner moves to the AE measurement  
point.  
• When the intensity has stabilized, the reading  
of the AE sensor is stored.  
• ThelampturnsOFF, andthescannerreturns.  
16) After the above ends, press the Clear key twice.  
• The display indicates ‘3’.  
17) Press ‘1’ on the numeric keypad, and press the  
AE key.  
• The display indicates ‘1’.  
18) Press ‘116’ on the numeric keypad, and press  
the Start key.  
• The display indicates ‘401’.  
3) Press ‘410’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The machine indicates ‘410’.  
4) Press the Start key once.  
• The scanner moves forward.  
Caution:  
• Make sure that the display indicates ‘68’  
through ‘72’. If not, start with step 2) of opera-  
tion/inspection mode and make adjustments  
once again.  
Each press on the Start key causes the scanner  
to move forward. Be sure not to press it more  
than once.  
5) Press ‘408’ on the numeric keypad, and press  
the Start key.  
• The display indicates ‘ON’, and the scanning  
lamp turns ON about 1.5 sec later.  
6) Press the Clear key twice.  
• The display indicates ‘4’.  
b. AE Mode Copy Density (developing bias)  
Reference Point Adjustment (No. 302)  
1) If the display does not indicate ‘300’s’, start  
adjustment mode of service mode as you would  
for No. 301.  
2) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘302’.  
3) Press the Start key.  
7) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad, and press the  
AE key.  
• The display indicates ‘201’.  
8) Press ‘208’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The machine indicates ‘208’.  
• The display indicates the current setting.  
4) Change the setting using the numeric keypad,  
and press the AE key.  
• To increase the setting, press the AE key.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
• default:  
0
settings: –26 to +26  
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ is turned ON. To  
enter a negative value, press the ‘%’ key  
before entering the value.  
• TheindicationstopsflashingandremainsON  
when the value has been stored.  
5) RecordthenewadjustmentvalueintheService  
Mode label.  
6) Press the Clear key.  
• The machine returns to item selection and  
indicates ‘302’.  
• As necessary, perform No. 303.  
c. AE Mode Copy Density (developing bias)  
Slope Adjustment (No. 303)  
1) If the display does not indicate ‘300’s’, start  
adjustment mode in service mode as you would  
for No. 301.  
2) Press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘303’.  
3) Press the Start key.  
• The display indicates the current setting.  
4) Change the value using numeric keypad, and  
press the AE key.  
• A higher setting produces lighter AE copies.  
• default:  
0
settings: –26 to +26  
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ is turned ON. To  
enter a negative value, press the ‘%’ key  
before entering the value.  
• TheindicationstopsflashingandremainsON  
when the value has been stored.  
5) Record any new settings in the Service Mode  
label.  
6) Press the Reset key.  
• The machine ends service mode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Item  
Function  
Description  
Remarks  
No. 301 Automatic lamp  
intensity adjustment  
for AE scans  
The lamp intensity is  
automatically adjusted so  
that the copies of the  
Test Chart will be made  
at density 5.  
9
Lighter  
Copy  
density 5  
Darker  
Test Chart  
Density of  
original  
No. 302 Copy density (devel-  
opment bias) refer-  
q A lower setting in  
service mode causes  
the AE copies to be  
darker.  
w A higher settings in  
service mode causes  
the AE copies to be  
lighter.  
q
w
ence point adjustment  
for AE mode  
9
Lighter  
Copy  
density 5  
Darker  
default: 0  
range: –26 to +26  
(see Note.)  
Density of  
original  
Test Chart  
No. 303 Copy density (devel-  
opment bias) slope  
adjustment for AE  
mode  
q A higher setting in  
service mode causes  
copies of a newspa-  
per to be lighter.  
w A lower setting in  
service mode causes  
copies of a newspa-  
per to be darker.  
q
w
9
Lighter  
Copy  
density 5  
Darker  
News- Density of  
paper original  
Test Chart  
default: 0  
range: –26 to +26  
Table 3-801  
Note: 1. After Adjustment, with test chart NA-3, using AE mode, density adjustment should show ‘5’.  
2. In non-AE mode, using NA-3, density ‘5’ must be appropriate (adjusted with VR850).  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Numeric  
keypad  
Display  
Remarks  
4
Multifeeder Paper Width Sensor  
Adjustment  
In this adjustment, you will be storing the char-  
acteristics of the multifeeder paper width sensor  
using service mode No. 501.  
Perform the adjustment if you have replaced the  
sensor or if the machine wrongly identifies paper  
sizes.  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator into the door switch.  
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a  
hex key.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A3  
Ldr  
b4  
A3  
Ledger  
B4  
LGL  
A4r  
b5r  
A5r  
Sr  
Legal  
A4R  
B5R  
• The machine starts service mode and indi-  
cates ‘1’.  
3) Press ‘5’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘5’.  
A5R  
Statement R  
4) Press the AE key.  
JPC  
Japanese governmen-  
tal postcard (100 wide)  
• The machine starts machine settings mode  
and indicates ‘501’.  
5) Press the Start key.  
0
CLr  
Clear  
• The display indicates ‘A3’.  
(clears stored settings)  
6) Selecttheappropriatepapersize(exceptCLR).  
(A press on the numeric keypad brings out a list  
shown in Table 3-802.)  
Table 3-802  
• If you select a size not stored, the display will  
start to flash.  
Reference:  
1. IfyouarestoringthesizeunderNo. 9(JPC),  
adjust the guides so that they are closest.  
2. At time of shipment from the factory, A3,  
A4RandJPC(NorthAmericamodel:11×17,  
LGL and Sr) are pre-stored, and the char-  
acteristic curves of these three sizes are  
computed and the results are used for  
identification of paper sizes. If you enter a  
size other than these three in the field, the  
machinewillcomputeacharacteristiccurve  
with the addition of the data obtained from  
the new size. For this reason, it is best to  
store the sizes of the papers the user tends  
to use frequently.  
• If you press the Start key when ‘CLR’ is  
indicated, all stored settings will be cleared  
and returned to default settings.  
7) Adjust the guide of the multifeeder to suit the  
size you are setting.  
• Make sure you feel a click when positioning  
the guide.  
8) Press the AE key.  
• Whenthesettinghasbeenstored, thedisplay  
stops flashing and remains ON.  
9) Press the Reset key.  
• The machine ends service mode.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
Numeric  
keypad  
5
Setting the Paper Size for the  
Universal Cassette  
Size (mm)  
Paper  
Bolivian  
355.0 × 216.0  
0
1
2
3
You will be using service mode to set the paper  
size that is effective when the paper size lever of the  
cassette is positioned for the universal cassette.  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator into the door switch.  
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a  
hex key.  
• The machine starts service mode and indi-  
cates ‘1’.  
3) Press ‘5’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘5’.  
OFFICIO  
340.0 × 220.0  
340.0 × 220.0  
337.0 × 206.0  
Argentine  
OFFICIO  
Argentine  
LEGAL  
Australian  
FOOLSCAP  
330.2 × 215.9  
330.0 × 210.0  
330.2 × 203.2  
4
5
6
FOOLSCAP  
FOLIO  
4) Press the AE key.  
• The machine starts machine settings mode  
and indicates ‘501’.  
5) Using the numeric keypad, select the appropri-  
ate cassette holder.  
Government  
LEGAL  
320.0 × 220.0  
7
Ecuadorian  
OFFICIO  
For example, select cassette 1 by pressing ‘0’  
and ‘5’.  
6) Press the Start key.  
317.0 × 216.0  
280.0 × 220.0  
8
9
OFFICIO  
• Thedisplayindicatesthenumbercorrespond-  
ing to the universal cassette currently set.  
7) According to Table 3-803, select the size you  
want to store using the numeric keypad.  
8) Press the AE key to store the setting.  
9) Press the Reset key.  
Argentine LET-  
TER-R  
268.0 × 190.0  
266.7 × 203.2  
220.0 × 280.0  
203.2 × 266.7  
190.0 × 268.0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Korean Govern-  
ment-R  
• The machine ends service mode.  
Government  
LETTER-R  
Cassette holder  
Cassette 1  
Cassette 2  
Cassette 3  
Cassette 4  
Cassette 5  
Service mode No.  
No. 505  
Argentine LET-  
TER  
Government  
LETTER  
No. 509  
No. 510  
Korean  
Government  
No. 511  
Table 3-804  
No. 512  
Table 3-803  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
6
Initializing the Back-Up RAM  
7
Checking the Photointerrupters  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch  
actuator into the door switch.  
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a  
hex key.  
The machine’s photointerrupters may be  
checked using a conventional meter or in service  
mode.  
q Using a Meter  
• The machine enters service mode and indi-  
cates ‘1’.  
3) Press ‘4’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘4’.  
1) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.  
2) Connect the - probe of the tester to J301-4  
(GND) of the DC controller.  
3) Make checks as indicated.  
1: 5 V  
4) Press the AE key.  
• Themachinestartsoperation/inspectionmode  
and indicates ‘401’.  
0: 0 V  
w Using Service Mode  
5) Press ‘5’ and ‘0’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘450’.  
6) Press the Start key.  
• The display changes to ‘EE’.  
8) Press the Start key.  
• The display returns to ‘EE’.  
9) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.  
• The back-up RAM is initialized and set to  
default settings.  
1) Open the front door, and insert the door  
switch actuator into the door switch.  
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850)  
with a hex key.  
3) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The display indicates ‘2’.  
4) Press the AE key.  
• The machine enters I/O display mode  
and indicates ‘201’.  
5) Enter the appropriate number using the  
numeric key, and press the Start key.  
• Check each photointerrupter with refer-  
ence to the copy count indicator.  
Reference:  
TostopinitializingtheRAM, presstheClearkey  
and then the Reset key.  
To stop it after performing step 8), press the  
start key, and press the Start key after the  
display has indicated ‘nop’.  
2-a  
1-a  
2-f  
2-g  
2-e  
1-f  
1-g  
1-e  
2-b  
1-b  
2-c  
1-c  
2-d  
Figure 3-801  
1-d  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS AND TIMING  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
3–134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 4  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
1.  
Before disassembly or reassembly work, disconnect the heating (if a heater is installed)  
and main body power cord(s).  
2. Group the screws by type (length and diameter) and location.  
3. The fixing screw for the grounding wire and varistors is fitted with a washer to ensure  
electric continuity; be sure to use the washer for reassembly.  
4. If possible, avoid operating the machine with any of its parts removed.  
5. Unless otherwise noted, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly.  
I. EXTERNALS ............................................. 4-1  
A. External Covers ................................... 4-1  
B. Control Panel ....................................... 4-2  
C. Removing the Display Panel ............... 4-2  
D. Fan ...................................................... 4-3  
E. Counter ................................................ 4-4  
II. DRIVE SYSTEM ........................................ 4-5  
A. Scanner Drive System......................... 4-5  
B. Lens Drive Assembly......................... 4-10  
C. Main Motor......................................... 4-14  
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 4-15  
A. Pick-Up Assembly ............................. 4-15  
B. Multifeeder Assembly ........................ 4-17  
C. Registration Roller Assembly ............ 4-20  
D. Feeding Assembly ............................. 4-22  
E. Delivery Assembly ............................. 4-22  
F. Duplexing Assembly .......................... 4-23  
G. Cassette Unit ..................................... 4-24  
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 4-27  
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM............................. 4-34  
A. Illuminating Assembly........................ 4-34  
V. CHARGING SYSTEM ............................. 4-38  
A. Drum Unit .......................................... 4-38  
B. Primary Charging Assembly.............. 4-39  
C. Transfer Charging Assembly............. 4-40  
D. Drum Heater ...................................... 4-41  
VI. DEVELOPING SYSTEM ......................... 4-42  
VII. FIXING SYSTEM ..................................... 4-45  
VIII.ELECTRICAL........................................... 4-50  
A. DC Controller PCB ............................ 4-50  
B. Composite Power Supply PCB ......... 4-50  
C. AE Sensor PCB ................................. 4-51  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
Note:  
I. EXTERNALS  
Remove the covers as necessary to clean,  
inspect, or repair the inside of the machine.  
Those covers that may be detached by merely  
removing their mounting screws are left out of  
the discussions.  
A. External Covers  
1
2
10  
9
When installing the copyboard glass, be sure to  
butt it against the vertical size plate so that no gap  
is left for intrusion of foreign matter.  
3
4
5
8
7
6
q Copyboard cover  
w Control panel  
e Right cover  
r Rear right cover  
t Right door  
y Front right cover  
u Cassette  
i Front door  
o Size index  
Figure 4-103  
! Copyboard glass  
Figure 4-101  
14  
13  
11  
12  
! Left cover  
! Lower left cover  
! Lower rear cover  
! Upper rear cover  
Figure 4-102  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5
3
3
B. Control Panel  
1. Removing the Control Panel  
1) Remove the copyboard glass.  
2) Remove the upper left cover.  
3) Open the front door.  
4) Pull the open/close lever, and open the body.  
5) Remove the right cover.  
6) Remove the left cover.  
7) Remove the four screws q, and remove the  
inside cover w.  
1
2
Figure 4-106  
C. Removing the Display  
Panel  
1) Remove the display panel q using a pen or the  
like.  
1
1
Figure 4-104  
8) Remove the screw e, and disconnect the four  
connectors r (J801, J802, J803, J804); then,  
remove the control panel t.  
4
4
3
3
Figure 4-107  
Figure 4-105  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Holding the exhaust fan assembly r, pull it off  
D. Fan  
to the front.  
1. Removing the Exhaust Fan  
1) Open the front door.  
2) Pull the open/close door, and open the body.  
3) Remove the relay connector q.  
4
1
Figure 4-111  
6) Remove the four screws t, and remove the air  
conveyor y,.then remove the fan u together  
with the two rubbers i.  
Figure 4-108  
4) Remove the screw w from the rear and the two  
screws from the front e.  
5
8
7
8
2
5
6
5
Figure 4-112  
2. Removing the Scanner cooling fan  
1) Open the front door.  
2) Pull the open/close door, and open the body.  
3) Remove the rear cover.  
4) Remove the four screws q, and remove the  
scanner cooling fan w.  
Figure 4-109  
1
2
3
1
Figure 4-110  
Figure 4-113  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Install the counter mount to the copier with two  
screws.  
6) Connect the two connectors t of the counter.  
E. Counter*  
* This may not be available for sale in same areas.  
1. Installing the Option Counter (CNT2)  
1) Open the top body.  
2) Remove the inside upper cover.  
3) Remove the two screws w, and disconnect the  
connector e; then, remove the counter mount  
q.  
1
3
5
Figure 4-116  
7) Set SW303 on the DC controller as indicated in  
Table 4-101.  
2
Figure 4-114  
4) Put the option counter r in the counter mount.  
4
Figure 4-115  
SW303  
Counter  
Description  
2
1
Large size copy counter  
Duplexing unit counter  
Small size copy counter  
No counter  
SW303 settings determines  
how the option counter (CNT2)  
behaves.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2
1
2
1
2
1
Table 4-101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2. Removing the Scanner Cable  
1) Remove the copyboard cover, right cover, left  
cover, upper rear cover, and lower rear cover.  
2) Remove the copyboard glass.  
3) Remove the control panel.  
4) Remove the copyboard cover support q.  
II. DRIVE SYSTEM  
A. Scanner Drive System  
1. Removing the Scanner Drive Motor  
1) Remove the copy board glass.  
2) Removethespringq,theEringw,thetensioner  
e, and the belt r.  
Scanner wire  
3
1
1
2
4
Figure 4-201  
3) Remove the upper rear cover.  
4) Disconnect the connector t of the motor, and  
remove the two screws y.  
5) Remove the spring u and the scanner drive  
motor i.  
Figure 4-203  
5) Remove the ten screws w, and remove the  
upper left stay e.  
2
2
6
8
6
5
7
2
3
2
Figure 4-204  
Figure 4-202  
6) Fix the cable in place using cable clips (FY9-  
3010).  
Caution:  
When mounting the scanner driver motor, be  
sure to make the appropriate adjustments as  
follows:  
1) Hookthespringu onthemetalplate, andfix  
thescannerdrivermotorinplacewithscrews  
y; then, give the screws y counterclock-  
wise half turn to free it.  
2) Push the motor down, and then shift it to the  
left and right.  
Figure 4-205  
3) Where the motor stops, tighten the screws  
y (on the right and then left).  
4) Fit the tensioner e, and mount the spring q  
and the E-ring w.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
7) Loosen the two screwsr, and loosen the cable  
3. Assembling the Mirror Positioning  
Tool  
tension (both front and rear).  
1) Remove the screw from position B.  
4
B
A
A
B
Position B  
Longest pin  
Medium-Length pin  
Figure 4-206  
8) Move the No. 1 mirror mount in the forward  
direction, and match the angular hole in the  
front side panel and the cable fixing screw t.  
Then, remove t to separate the No. 1 mirror  
mount and the scanner cable (both front and  
rear).  
Figure 4-208  
2) Put the screw removed in step 1) to position A;  
then, tighten it slightly.  
3) Pull the arm out of the main frame, and extend  
it until it comes into contact with the stopper as  
indicated in Figure 4-209.  
4) Tighten the screw.  
5
B
A
A
B
(front)  
Position A  
Figure 4-209  
5
(rear)  
Figure 4-207  
9) Remove the pulley clip, and remove the scan-  
ner cable (both front and rear).  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4. Routing the Scanner Cable  
Caution:  
You must keep the mirror positioning tool (FY9-  
3009) and the pulley clip (FY9-3010) near at  
hand when routing the scanner cable.  
Assemble the mirror positioning tool according  
to “Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool” in  
advance.  
B
A
A
B
Figure 4-210  
1) As in q, put the steel ball into the hole in the  
pulley; then, wind the cable four times toward  
the flange and nine times in the opposite direc-  
tion. Thereafter, fix the cable using the pulley  
clip.  
2) As in w, set the mirror positioning tool between  
the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror  
mount.  
3) As in e, loosen the screw on the mirror pulley  
mount, and temporarily fix it on the left stay.  
4) Asillustrated, routethescanningcable;hookt  
on the side plate, and hook i on the tension  
plate of the lens mount.  
5) Tighten the screw loosened in e to fix it on the  
left stay.  
6) As in !, loosen the set screw once so that the  
tension on the scanner cable is even through-  
out; then, tighten the set screw.  
7) As in !, fix the No. 1 mirror mount and the  
scanner cable fixing in place.  
8) As in o, adjust the cable spring using a ruler so  
that its length is 34 ±1 mm.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
10  
Set screws  
Loosen the set  
screws to enable  
free rotation.  
2
Put the steel ball  
Pulley clip  
Screw  
Loosen the 3  
screw,and shift  
it down.  
Attach the mirror  
positioning tool.  
into the hole in  
the pulley; wind  
the cable nine  
times toward the  
inside, and four  
times toward the  
outside; then, snap  
on the pulley clip.  
8
Steel ball  
Re-tighten  
the screw.  
1
5
9
6
46.5~49mm  
4
11  
7
Figure 4-211  
Caution:  
When installing the cable spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring. Be sure to install as  
indicated; if installed in the wrong direction, the hook tip of the spring can interfere with the cable.  
Hook  
Cable  
Cable spring  
Cable spring  
Hook  
Cable  
(front)  
(rear)  
Figure 4-212  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Install the metal fixing of the scanner cable to  
the No. 1 mirror mount with two screws e(both  
front and rear).  
5. Adjusting the Mirror Position (opti-  
cal length between No. 1 mirror and  
No. 2 and No. 3 mirrors)  
1) Keep the mirror positioning tool near at hand.  
(See “Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool.”)  
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount in the forward  
direction, and match the angular hole in the  
front side plate and the cable fixing screw q.  
1
(front)  
(rear)  
1
Figure 4-215  
6) Tighten the set screw of the pulley.  
7) Remove the tool (FY9-3009).  
(front)  
(rear)  
6. Cleaning the Scanner No. 6 Mirror  
1) Open the front cover.  
Figure 4-213  
2) Operate the open/close lever to open the body.  
3) Remove the dust-proofing glass q and the  
dust-proofing mirror cover w.  
3) Loosen the set screw of the pulley.  
4) Set the mirror positioning tool w between the  
No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount  
(both front and rear).  
Mirror positioning tool (rear)  
Mirror positioning tool (front)  
(front)  
(front)  
1
2
(front)  
(front)  
Figure 4-216  
Figure 4-214  
4) Using a blower brush or lint-free paper moist-  
ened with alcohol, clean the No. 6 mirror.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
6) Disconnectthetwoconnectorsyfromtherear.  
B. Lens Drive Assembly  
1. Removing the Lens Drive Motor  
1) Remove the upper rear cover and the right  
glass retainer.  
2) Remove the copyboard glass.  
3) Move the No. 1 mirror assembly qto the left.  
4) Remove the two screws w, and remove the  
lens cover e.  
6
2
Figure 4-219  
7) Remove the two screws u, and remove the  
lens drive unit i.  
2
1
3
8
(front)  
Figure 4-217  
5) Loosen the tension on the spring r, and re-  
move the cable t.  
7
5
Figure 4-220  
4
Figure 4-218  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
8) Remove the two screws o, and disconnect the  
connector !; then, remove the lens motor !.  
Caution:  
When removing the screw o, disconnect the  
connector !first to avoid contact between the  
harness and the driver.  
10  
9
11  
Figure 4-221  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2. Routing the Lens Cable  
SL  
2
Turn clockwise  
3 times.  
1
3
Figure 4-222 Lens Drive Assembly  
1) Stop the lens cable at each pulley q, and wind  
it around the pulley w.  
2) Move the tension pulley e, and attach the  
cable.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3. Positioning the Change Solenoid  
Loosen the two screws tto adjust so that the gear rmoves through the arm ein the direction of b until  
it stops when the steel core qof the solenoid is fully pushed in the direction of B, i.e., when the E-ring whas  
come into contact with the solenoid.  
3
1
5
a
b
2
4
B
A
Figure 4-223  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
C. Main Motor  
1. Removing the Main Motor Unit  
1) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove  
the three mounting screws w; then, remove the  
main motor unit e.  
1
3
2
2
Figure 4-224  
2. Routing the Drive Belt  
Route the drive belt over the pulley and the tensioner as indicated.  
Drive belt  
Pulley  
Tensioner  
Figure 4-225  
Vertical path roller gear  
Main motor  
Tensioner  
Vertical path roller  
clutch (CL7)  
Figure 4-226  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller  
1) Removethepick-uprollerunit. (SeeRemoving  
the Pick-Up Roller Unit.”)  
2) Remove the E-ring q, bushing w, spacer 1 e  
and spacer 2 r; then, remove the pick-up roller  
t.  
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING  
SYSTEM  
A. Pick-Up Assembly  
1. Removing the Pick-Up Roller Unit  
1) Remove the lower rear cover.  
2) Remove the grip ring q, and remove the pick-  
up clutch w.  
1
5
4
3
2
Reference:  
When removing the pick-up clutch, pull it off  
after matching the cut-off e in the gear of the  
clutch against the turn stop.  
Figure 4-303  
Caution:  
Take care not to lose the pins from its front and  
rear.  
3. Points to Note When Installing the  
Pick-Up Roller  
Installthepick-uprollerqsothatthemarkingw  
shown in Figure 4-304 is at the rear. (However, the  
parallel pin will not fit in the groove.)  
1
2
3
Figure 4-301  
3) Pull out the cassettes.  
4) Remove the E-ring rand the bushing t; then,  
remove the pick-up roller unit y.  
2
1
5
Figure 4-304  
4
6
Figure 4-302  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4. Removing the Separation Pad  
1) Fully open the right door. (Remove the tension  
tape from the door.)  
5. AdjustingtheLeft/RightRegistration  
Make adjustments so that the image position is  
as indicated in Figure 4-308 when the Test Sheet is  
copied in Direct.  
Caution:  
Take care not to open the right door exces-  
sively.  
a. Pick-Up from the Cassette  
Turn the screw q shown in Figure 4-307 to  
adjust the position of the cassette hook plate.  
standards: 0 ± 1.5 mm  
2) Remove the front right cover.  
3) Remove the vertical path guide q (upper; four  
screws).  
CW direction: moves the paper in the direc-  
tion of – in Figure 4-308  
CCW direction:moves the paper in the direc-  
tion of + in Figure 4-308  
1
1
Figure 4-307  
Figure 4-305  
(-)  
(+)  
0±1.5mm  
4) Remove the two screws w, and remove the  
separation pad unit e.  
3
0
2
4
6
8
10  
Figure 4-308  
2
Figure 4-306  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Shift the multifeeder pick-up roller unit y to-  
B. Multifeeder Assembly  
ward the rear, and remove it.  
1. Removing the Multifeeder Pick-up  
Roller Unit  
1) Open the right door.  
2) Remove the E-ring q, and pull out the bushing  
w.  
3) Remove the two screws e.  
1
2
3
6
Figure 4-311  
2. Removing the Multifeeder Pick-Up  
Roller  
1) Removethemultifeederpick-uprollerunit.(See  
“RemovingtheMultifeederPick-UpRollerUnit.”)  
2) Remove the stop ring (plastic) q, and remove  
the pick-up roller wtogether with its collar.  
Figure 4-309  
4) Remove the screw r, and remove the roller  
cover t.  
Caution:  
5
Take care not to lose the pin from the rear.  
4
1
2
Figure 4-312  
Figure 4-310  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3. Points to Note When Installing the  
Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller  
5. Removing the Multifeeder Spring  
Clutch  
When installing the multifeeder pick-up rollerq,  
make sure that the side with a cross won the collar  
is toward the rear.  
1) Removetheupperrearcoverandthelowerrear  
cover.  
2) Remove the three screws q, and shift the cord  
guide w.  
1
2
1
2
(front of copier)  
1
Figure 4-313  
Figure 4-315  
4. Removing the Separation Pad  
1) Open the upper right door.  
3) Remove the main motor. (See “Removing the  
Main Motor.”)  
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the  
separation pad w.  
4) Remove the three screws e, then, remove the  
clutch stop plate yand the clutche u.  
Caution:  
Take care so that the spring on the separation  
pad assembly will not fly off.  
1
6
7
2
3
Figure 4-314  
3
Figure 4-316  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) RemovethetwoE-ringsi, andremovethetwo  
bushings o.  
6) Remove the spring !of the actuator.  
7) Remove the three screws !, and remove the  
solenoid mounting plate !.  
6. Positioning the Multifeeder Assem-  
bly Paper Guide Plate Cam  
Temporarily fix the screw with a hex nut of the  
spring clutch assembly, and turn the control ring. At  
this time, make adjustments so that the hole in the  
cam and the hole (or black dot) in the multifeeder  
drive unit match while the claw of the control ring is  
in contact with the solenoid plate.  
9
8
11  
8
9
10  
11  
Holes (or hole and black dot) matched  
12  
11  
Horizontal line  
Figure 4-317  
Caution:  
Takecaresothattheplungerofthesolenoidwill  
not fall.  
Gear  
Control ring  
Screw w/hex nut  
8) Loosen the hex nut !, and remove the spring  
clutch !.  
Claw  
14  
Solenoid plate  
Gear  
Paper guide plate cam  
13  
Figure 4-319  
Figure 4-318  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
Caution:  
C. Registration Roller Assem-  
bly  
If the adjusting hole is not furnished with a black  
dot for reference, make adjustments as in-  
structed while making sure that the paper guide  
plate cam of the multifeeder aseembly is lo-  
cated as shown.  
1. Removing the Registration Clutch  
1) Remove the lower rear cover.  
2) Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the  
connector w; then, remove the registration  
clutch e.  
2
Paper guide  
plate cam  
130.5±0.5mm  
Hole  
1
3
Figure 4-320  
Figure 4-322  
7. AdjustingtheLeft/RightRegistration  
If the left/right registration is wrong when using  
the multifeeder, loosen the screws qto adjust the  
tray position.  
2. Removing the Upper Registration  
Roller  
1) Remove the registration clutch. (See “Remov-  
ing the Registration Clutch.”)  
2) Remove the springs (front) qand (rear) w.  
1
Figure 4-321  
1
8. Points to Note When Installing the  
Multifeeder Assembly Rack Plate  
Install the multifeeder rack plate to the pulley  
with both left and right rack plates fully open.  
Figure 4-323  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3. Removing the Lower Registration  
Roller  
2
1) Remove the E-ring (front) q, and shift the  
bushing w.  
2) Remove the registration roller e.  
2
3
Figure 4-324  
Caution:  
At this time, take care so that the springs at the  
front and the rear will not fly away.  
3) Removetheupperregistrationroller ebylifting  
it.  
1
Figure 4-326  
3
Figure 4-325  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
D. Feeding Assembly  
E. Delivery Assembly  
1. Removing the Feeding Belt  
1) Remove the mounting screw w, and remove  
the feeding center guide w.  
1. Removing the Delivery Roller  
1) Open the top body.  
2) Remove the E-ring q.  
2) Pull the feeding roll etoward the fixing assem-  
bly, and remove it.  
3) Shift the bushings (rear) wand (front) e; then,  
remove the delivery roller r.  
3) Remove the feeding roll r, and remove the  
feeding belt t.  
4
2
1
3
4
4
5
5
Figure 4-329  
1
2
3
3
Figure 4-327  
Caution:  
Do not touch the transfer roller. Take care not to  
damage the joint between the feeding rolls.  
2. Removing the Feeding Fan  
1) Remove the feeding belt. (See “Removing the  
Feeding Belt.”)  
2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and  
remove the feeding fan w.  
1
2
1
Figure 4-328  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3) Remove the lower rear cover.  
4) Disconnect the connectors (J325, J326) r.  
F. Duplexing Assembly  
1. Removing the Duplexing Assembly  
Inlet Unit  
4
1) Remove the left cover.  
2) Remove the delivery roller.  
3) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the  
duplexing unit winlet unit.  
Figure 4-332  
5) Remove the two mounting screws t, and re-  
move the duplexing unit y.  
1
2
Figure 4-330  
6
2. Removing the Duplexing Unit  
1) Remove the front door, two cassettes and the  
front left cover.  
2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and  
disconnect the connector w; then, remove the  
paper size detection unit 1 e.  
2
3
5
Figure 4-333  
1
1
Figure 4-331  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3) Remove the bushing wof the pick-up roller unit  
ewhile pushing it down toward the left.  
G. Cassette Unit  
1. Removing the Copier from the Cas-  
sette Unit  
1) Disconnect the copier’s power plug.  
2) Disconnect the cassette unit connector qfrom  
the copier.  
3
2
Figure 4-336  
1
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller  
1) Removethepick-uprollerunit. (SeeRemoving  
the Pick-Up Roller Unit.”)  
Figure 4-334  
2) Remove the E-rings q and w; then, remove  
the pick-up roller etogether with the collar.  
3) Holding the copier’s grips, remove the copier  
from the cassette unit.  
Caution:  
2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller Unit  
1) Remove the cassette.  
Take care not to lose the pin from the rear.  
2) Remove the stop ring (plastic) q found at the  
front of the pick-up roller unit.  
1
3
1
2
Figure 4-337  
Figure 4-335  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4) Remove the four screws r, and disconnect the  
two connectors t; then, remove the pick-up  
drive unit y.  
4. Points to Note When Installing the  
Pick-Up Roller  
When installing the pick-up roller q, install it so  
that the marking wshown in Figure 4-338 is toward  
the rear.  
4
5
6
4
5
4
2
1
Figure 4-341  
Figure 4-338  
6. Removing the Cassette Motor  
1) Remove the rear cover.  
2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the  
connector(J114)w;then, removethemotore.  
5. Removing the Pick-Up Unit  
1) Remove the rear cover and the right cover.  
2) Remove the screw q.  
1
3
2
1
1
Figure 4-339  
Figure 4-342  
3) Remove the screw w, and remove the harness  
guide e.  
2
3
Figure 4-340  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
7. Removing the Pick-Up Clutch  
1) Remove the pick-up drive unit. (See “Removing  
the Pick-Up Drive Unit.”)  
9. Removing the Pick-Up Motor (Cas-  
sette Pedestal-K1)  
1) Remove the upper rear cover.  
2) Remove the cassette motor. (See “Removing  
the Cassette Motor.”)  
2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the  
connector w; then, remove the motor e.  
3) Remove the three screws q and bushing w;  
then, remove the side plate eand the pick-up  
clutch r.  
1
3
1
2
2
4
3
1
Figure 4-343  
Figure 4-345  
8. Removing the Cassette Driver PCB  
1) Remove the rear cover.  
2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette  
driver PCB q.  
10.Removing the Pick-Up Clutch (Cas-  
sette Pedestal-K1; cassettes 3, 4)  
1) Remove the upper rear cover.  
2) Remove the pick-up motor.  
3) Remove the three screws w, and remove the  
driver PCB q.  
3) Disconnect the two relay connectors q.  
1
2
1
Figure 4-344  
Figure 4-346  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4) Remove the six screws wand two E-rings e;  
then, remove the support plate r.  
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
1. Removing the Pedestal Motor Drive  
Assembly  
5) Remove the two pick-up clutches t.  
1) Slide out the holding tray to the front.  
2
2) Remove the rear cover.  
3) Disconnect the four connectors q, and remove  
the harness from harness guide w.  
3
4) Remove the three mounting screws e, and  
remove the pedestal motor drive assembly. r.  
4
3
5
3
4
2
Figure 4-347  
11.Removing the Driver PCB (Cassette  
Module-A2/Cassette Pedestal-K1)  
1) Remove the rear cover/upper rear cover.  
2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette  
driver PCB q.  
2
1
3
Figure 4-349  
2) Remove the four screws w, and remove the  
driver PCB q.  
2. Removing the Paper Deck  
1) Remove the front right cover and the front left  
cover.  
2
2
1
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove  
the stopper plate wfrom both left and right.  
1
Figure 4-348  
2
Figure 4-350 (right)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4) Mark the position of the latch assembly, and  
detach the latch assembly by removing the  
mounting screws eon both left and right (6 in  
total).  
2
3
1
3
Figure 4-351 (left)  
3) Slide out the paper deck slowly to the front.  
Figure 4-353a (left)  
3. Removing the Lifter Wire  
1) Remove the paper deck.  
3
2) Remove the deck front cover.  
3) Removethetwoscrewsqfromtheinsideofthe  
deck and remove the guide plate wfrom both  
front and rear.  
2
3
Figure 4-353b (right)  
5) Remove the mounting screw r from the front  
right, and remove the gear cover t.  
1
Figure 4-352  
5
4
Figure 4-354  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
6) Remove the mounting screw yfrom the front,  
and remove the oil damper plate u.  
8) Remove the E-ring !; then, remove the gear  
!, parallel pin, and pulley cover (front/rear in  
common).  
11  
12  
6
7
Figure 4-355  
Figure 4-357  
7) Remove the E-ring ifrom the lifter drive shaft  
(rear); then, remove the gear o, two washers,  
and spring !.  
9) Remove the end of the wire from the pulley  
(front/rear in common).  
10) Remove the fastener ! from the wire relay  
assembly; then, remove the pulley cover, and  
remove the wire from the pulley (front/rear in  
common).  
10  
9
13  
8
Figure 4-356  
Figure 4-358  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
11) Remove the mounting screw !, and remove  
6) Remove the six mounting screws t, and re-  
the wire together with the mounting support.  
move the pick-up assembly.  
5
14  
Figure 4-359  
Figure 4-361  
4. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly  
1) Open the right door of the pedestal, and slide  
out the paper deck to the front about 10 cm.  
5. Removing the Pick-Up Roller  
1) Remove the pick-up assembly.  
2) Remove the stop ring q, and remove the pick-  
up roller w together with the roller collar.  
Caution:  
• Forthepaperdeckpedestal,slideoutonlythe  
paper deck.  
• Do not try to detach the pick-up assembly  
without removing the paper deck from the  
pedestal; the lifter will make the removal of  
the pick-up assembly impossible.  
• Do not slide out the paper deck too far toward  
the front; doing so would cause the pedestal  
to tilt to the front when the pick-up assembly  
is removed.  
2
1
2) Remove the right cover.  
3) Remove the screw q; then, remove the stop  
plate.  
4) Remove the eight mounting screws w, and  
remove the two support plates e.  
5) Disconnect the four connectors r.  
Figure 4-362  
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
Figure 4-360  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4) Remove the stop ring tfrom the feeding roller.  
6. Points to Note  
a. Thecollarsforthepick-uprollerareidentifiedby  
color; use the gold collar for the front, and the  
silver collar for the rear.  
b. Do not separate the rubber portion of the pick-  
up roller from the collar.  
7. Removing the Feeding Roller  
1) Remove the pick-up roller from the front.  
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove  
the pick-up roller arm bushing w.  
1
5
Figure 4-365  
5) Remove the pick-up roller from the rear, and  
removethepick-uprollershaftfromthebushing  
at the rear.  
6) Remove the drive belt yfrom the feeding roller  
u, and remove the feeding roller and the roller  
shaft i.  
2
7
Figure 4-363  
8
3) Removethepick-uprollerarmeandtheweight  
rfrom the pick-up roller shaft.  
6
Figure 4-366  
3
4
Figure 4-364  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2) Remove the stop ring e, and remove the  
separation roller r.  
8. Points to Note  
When installing the feeding roller q, make sure  
that the belt pulley wattached to the feeding roller  
is toward the rear of the copier.  
4
3
2
1
Front of copier  
Figure 4-369  
Figure 4-367  
10.Points to Note  
When installing the separation roller q, make  
sure that the D-cut in the roller collar is toward the  
front of the copier.  
9. Removing the Separation Roller  
1) Opentherightdoor, andremovethetwomount-  
ing screws wfrom the separation roller assem-  
bly support plate q; then, remove the separa-  
tion roller together with the pressure arm.  
Rear  
1
Front of copier  
2
1
Figure 4-368  
Figure 4-370  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
11.Adjusting the Pressure of the Sepa-  
ration Roller  
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs fre-  
quently during pick-up operation, adjust the posi-  
tion of the pressure spring for the separation roller.  
q if double feeding is frequent, move the hook of  
the spring toward A.  
w if pick-up failure is frequent, move the hook of  
the spring toward B.  
1
2
3
B
A
4
Figure 4-371  
12.Position of the Pick-Up Roller Re-  
leasing Solenoid  
Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm  
qbutts against the upper stay wwhen the plunger  
of the solenoid is pushed in.  
Butted.  
2
1
Butted.  
Figure 4-372  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2. Removing the Blank Exposure As-  
sembly  
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM  
1) Open the front cover.  
2) Pull the open/close lever to open the body.  
3) Remove the inside cover.  
4) Remove the exhaust fan and the cartridge.  
(See “Removing the Exhaust Fan.”)  
5) Disconnect the connector (J315) qon the DC  
controller PCB; then, remove the two screws  
w.  
A. Illuminating Assembly  
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp/Fluo-  
rescent Heater  
1) Disconnect the power plug.  
2) Remove the copyboard glass.  
3) Remove the upper rear cover.  
4) Move the scanner unit to the center.  
5) Remove the two screws q, and remove the  
light-blocking plate w.  
1
2
2
1
Figure 4-403  
Figure 4-401  
6) Pushuptheblankexposureassemblyelightly,  
and pull it off toward the bottom front.  
6) Remove the screw t, and disconnect the con-  
nector y.  
3
7) Pull the halogen lamp uslowly toward the front  
to remove.  
7
Figure 4-404  
6
5
Figure 4-402  
Caution:  
Do not touch the halogen lamp. (If necessary,  
wrap lint-free paper around it.)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3. Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp  
1) Remove the blank exposure lamp. (See “Re-  
moving the Blank Exposure Assembly.”)  
2) Remove the four screws q, and disconnect the  
connector w.  
4. Removing the Blank Shutter Sole-  
noid  
1) Remove the blank exposure assembly.  
2) Remove the blank top plate, and disconnect the  
connector q. (See “Removing the Blank Expo-  
sure Assembly.”)  
1
1
3) Remove the E-ring w, and remove the link arm  
efrom the blank shutter.  
4) Remove the two screws r, and pull out the  
blank shutter solenoid.  
3
2
Figure 4-405  
3) Disconnect the connector e.  
3
1
2
4
Figure 4-408  
5. Positioning the Blank Shutter Sole-  
noid  
Adjustthepositionofthesolenoidsothatbottom  
A is 9.5 ±0.5 mm on both sides when the solenoid  
is moved in the direction of ON. Do not force the  
shutter excessively.  
After the adjustment, check to make sure that  
the solenoid moves smoothly.  
Figure 4-406  
4) Remove the three screws r, and remove the  
blank exposure lamp t.  
4
Figure 4-409a  
5
Figure 4-407  
Figure 4-409b  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
8. Installing the Mirror Heater  
1) Remove the copyboard glass.  
2) Install the cord clamp qto the bottom plate of  
the lens mount.  
6. Routing the Blank Shutter Cable  
Attach the spring the outside  
of the slide shutter.  
Slide shutter (rear)  
3) Install the mirror heater ewith a screw w.  
2
3
Wind 3.5 items  
Slide shutter (front)  
Figure 4-410  
1
7. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin Po-  
sition  
Turn the blank adjusting screw on the front plate  
shown in Figure 4-411 so that the measurements  
meet the standards.  
Figure 4-412  
4) Connect the connector r.  
5) Set the lens heater harness t to the cord  
clamp.  
q CW turn:  
moves the margin to the front  
w CCW turn: moves the margin to the rear  
e full turn:  
moves about 1 mm  
4
5
1
Figure 4-411  
Figure 4-413  
6) Install the copyboard glass.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Set the mirror heater harness t to the cord  
9. Installing the Lens Heater  
1) Remove the copyboard glass and the lens  
hood.  
guide.  
2) Remove the three screws, and disconnect the  
two connectors; then, remove the original size  
sensor q together with its mount.  
5
Figure 4-416  
6) Installtheoriginalsizesensormount,lenshood,  
and copyboard glass.  
1
Figure 4-414  
3) Install the lens heater w with a screw e.  
4) Connect the connector r.  
4
3
2
Figure 4-415  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
Caution:  
V. CHARGING SYSTEM  
Take extra care not to damage the photosensi-  
tive drum.  
A. Drum Unit  
1. Removing the Drum Unit  
1) Open the front door.  
2) Pull the developing assembly releasing lever q  
to the front, and turn it clockwise.  
Caution:  
The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible  
to light, and exposure even to room lighting  
could lead to white spots or black bands on  
copies.  
1
As a rule, you must not turn on the copier with  
the drum unit removed; otherwise, the following  
can occur:  
• The registration roller and the transfer guide  
will interfere; rotation of the registration roller  
during WMUPR can damage the registration  
roller.  
2. Cleaning  
If the surface of the photosensitive drum be-  
comes soiled, wipe it with a cloth coated with toner.  
(Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.)  
Caution:  
Figure 4-501  
You should never dry-wipe the surface of the  
photosensitive drum or use solvent on it.  
Do not use drum cleaning powder.  
3) Open the top body.  
4) Turn the knob w counterclockwise, and re-  
move it.  
5) Pull out the drum unit eslowly to the front.  
3
2
Figure 4-502  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
B. Primary Charging Assem-  
bly  
2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and the  
Primary Charging Roller  
1) Remove the primary charging assembly unit.  
2) As in Figure 4-505, place the primary charging  
assembly, and clean the cleaning pad ewith a  
cotton swab ror folded lint-free paper.  
1. Removing the Primary Charging Unit  
1) Remove the drum unit from the body.  
2) Slide the locks qfound on the top of the drum  
unit in the direction of the arrows.  
Caution:  
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol,  
solvent, or any alcohol- or solvent-related  
agents.  
• When dry-wiping, use strokes in one direction  
only.  
1
1
Figure 4-503  
4
5
3) While rotating the primary charging unit w in  
the direction of the arrow, remove it together  
with its holder.  
Figure 4-505  
3) Then, clean the primary charging roller twith  
lint-free paper ywhile rotating the roller.  
2
Caution:  
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol,  
solvent, or any alcohol- or solvent-related  
agents.  
• When dry-wiping, move in one direction only.  
Figure 4-504  
5
6
Figure 4-506  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
3. Positioning the Primary Charging  
Roller Cleaning Solenoid  
Loosen the two screws used to fix the solenoid  
e in place and move the solenoid e in the the  
direction of arrow B so that the distance l in Figure  
4-507 is 5.5 ±0.2 mm when the joint q is butted  
against a of the solenoid support plate w.  
C. Transfer Charging Assem-  
bly  
1. Removing the Transfer Roller  
1) Open the front door.  
2) Open the top body.  
3) Remove the static eliminator.  
4) Remove the bushing q, and remove the trans-  
fer roller wby lifting it.  
1
2
B
2
3
a
= 5.5 ± 0.2  
Figure 4-507  
1
Caution:  
You must always make this adjustment when-  
ever you have replaced the solenoid.  
Figure 4-508  
Caution:  
Do not touch the surface of the roller.  
Do not soil the surface of the roller.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
4) Install the heater holder tto the transfer guide  
ywith two screws r.  
D. Drum Heater*  
* This may not be available for sale in some areas.  
1. Installing the Drum Heater  
6
1) Remove the transfer guide from the copier.  
2) Install the cord clamp wto the heater holder q.  
1
4
5
4
FIgure 4-511  
5) Install the transfer guide to the copier.  
6) Connect the connector u of the heater to the  
copier’s connector.  
2
Figure 4-509  
3) Put the heater unit einto the heater holder.  
3
7
Figure 4-512  
Figure 4-510  
Caution:  
As necessary, keep the heater harness in place  
on the cord guide using tie-wraps.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
1) Remove the developing assembly from the  
copier.  
2) Remove the four screws q, and remove the  
developing cover w.  
VI. DEVELOPING SYS-  
TEM  
1. Removing the Developing Assembly  
1) Open the copier’s front door.  
2) Operate the open/close lever to open the top  
body.  
1
2
3) Turnthelockingleverq clockwisetounlockthe  
developing assembly.  
4) Remove the screw w.  
5) Pull the developing assembly e slowly to the  
front.  
2
1
3
1
Figure 4-602  
3) Place a newspaper or the like on the floor or a  
desk top, and pour out the toner from the  
developing assembly.  
4) Remove the two screws e, and remove the  
blade assembly* r.  
* consisting of the blade and its mount.  
4
Figure 4-601  
2. Removing the Blade Assembly  
Caution:  
In European model, there are two type of blade  
unit. The old type developing blade does not  
have spacers at front and rear side.  
3
Figure 4-603  
[Old type]  
Spacers  
*
Spacers are glued on the new type  
developing blade unit.  
[New type]  
If the developing blade unit for the developing a  
ssembly aith the old type is removed, the old  
type can't be reattached.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Remove the three E-rings u, and gear i, gear  
o, and gear !.  
3. Removing the Developing Cylinder  
Side Seal  
1) Remove the developing assembly from the  
7
copier.  
2) Remove the blade assembly.  
Caution:  
In European model, there are two type of blade  
unit. If old type blade are attached, it can't be  
removed.  
7
Caution:  
The blade must be installed at high precision.  
Do not remove it in the field. If necessary,  
remove it intact on its mounting plate.  
8
9
10  
Figure 4-606  
3) Remove the screw q, and remove the front  
cover w.  
6) Remove the screw !, and remove the butting  
roll !and roll case !.  
11  
2
12  
1
13  
Figure 4-604  
Figure 4-607  
4) Remove the three screws e, and remove the  
terminal r, roll case t, and roll y.  
7) Remove the developing cylinder !.  
5
4
14  
3
Figure 4-608  
3
6
Figure 4-605  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
8) Remove the side seal !. (both sides)  
4. InstallingtheSideSealandtheBlade  
Assembly  
1) Clean the area where the side seal will be  
installed with alcohol.  
2) Attach the side seal as indicated in Figure 4-  
611.  
15  
Figure 4-609  
Figure 4-611  
3) Check that the side seal and the container are  
in firm contact.  
4) In European model, push the developing blade  
unit attachment section all the way against the  
upper side and secure it with the screw.  
15  
Figure 4-610  
Some spacers are glued top and  
*
bottom in reverse; however, regardless  
of the spacer positions, attach the  
unit by pushing it all the way against  
the Upper side.  
Figure 4-612  
In other model, engage both ends of the blade  
assembly q with the developing aseembly, and  
tighten the two screws w.  
1
2
Figure 4-613  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
2. Removing the Upper Fixing Unit  
1) Open the front cover.  
VII. FIXING SYSTEM  
2) Open the top body.  
3) Remove the two screws q, and remove the  
fixing assembly cover w.  
1. Construction  
Oil application roller  
1
Upper roller  
2
Figure 4-702  
Lower roller  
4) Disconnect the three connectors e, and re-  
move the screw r.  
Figure 4-701  
4
3
Figure 4-703  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Open the fixing shutter t with the screw driver  
inserted into the hole u, after lifting the fixing  
shutter.  
6) Remove the four screws w, and remove the  
fixing cover (both front and rear).  
6
7
2
5
Figure 4-706(front)  
Figure 4-704  
6) Pull out the upper fixing unit slowly toward the  
rear.  
Caution:  
Do not touch the fixing roller.  
3. Removing the Fixing Roller  
Caution:  
Wait until the heater and the heater connector  
have cooled adequately before starting the  
following work:  
2
1) Remove the upper fixing unit. (See “Removing  
the Upper Fixing Unit.”)  
Figure 4-706(rear)  
2) Remove the front and rear cover.  
3) Remove the front wire (stopper).  
4) Pull toward rear the fixing roller.  
5) Remove the two screws q, and pull out the  
cleaning roller to the front.  
7) Open the two wire saddles e, and remove the  
two fastons r; then, remove the heater.  
1
4
3
Figure 4-707  
Figure 4-705  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
8) Pushthethermalswitch tinthedirectionofthe  
11) Remove the E-ring !at the front, and remove  
thebush!andthebearing!;then, pulloutthe  
upper roller.  
arrow, and remove it.  
10  
11  
12  
5
Figure 4-708  
Figure 4-711  
9) Remove the screw y, and remove the metal  
plate u.  
12) Remove the three E-rings ! at the rear, and  
pull out the gear !and the bush !.  
15 14  
6
7
1313 13  
Figure 4-709  
Figure 4-712  
10) Remove the screw i, and remove the ther-  
mistor o.  
4. Points to Note after Replacing the  
Upper Fixing Unit  
9
8
• If you have replaced the upper fixing unit, you  
must enter the temperature adjustment in  
service mode No. 304. (See the Service  
Handbook.)  
Caution:  
Do not touch the surface of the heater.  
Figure 4-710  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5. Removing the Lower Fixing Unit  
1) Remove the E-ring q, and remove the lower  
fixing unit w.  
2
1
3
Figure 4-715  
4) Remove the lower fixing roller rtogether with  
the bushing.  
Figure 4-713  
Caution:  
Do not touch the surface of the fixing cleaning  
roller or the lower fixing roller.  
6. Removing the Separation Claw/Fix-  
ing Cleaning Roller  
1) Remove the front cover.  
2) Remove the screw q, and remove the separa-  
tion claw unit w.  
3
4
Figure 4-716  
5) Remove the bushing y from the front, and  
remove the HOT warning cover u.  
·········  
·········  
3
·········  
·········  
·········  
·········  
·········  
·········  
2
1
Figure 4-714  
6
7
3) Remove the separation claw efrom the sepa-  
ration claw unit.  
Figure 4-717  
Caution:  
6) Remove the fixing cleaning roller by lifting it.  
Take care so that the spring will not fly away.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
Reference:  
7. Adjusting the Lower Fixing Roller  
Pressure (nip)  
If fixing faults are noted, make adjustments as  
follows:  
The paper will be stopped halfway sandwiched  
between the fixing rollers; it will be discharged  
about 10 sec later.  
The nip is correct if it is as indicated in Figure 4-  
718; otherwise, turn the bolt to adjust.  
8) Measure the nip.  
c
A4 size  
Feeding  
direction  
b Center of paper  
b : 4.5 ± 0.5mm  
| a-c | : 0.5mm or less  
Figure 4-718  
Note:  
a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends  
of paper.  
a. Measuring the Nip  
Measurethenipbeforestartingtousethecopier  
for the day.  
1) Open the copyboard cover, and make an A4  
solid black copy.  
2) Place the copy with its solid black facing down  
in the cassette.  
3) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a  
hex key.  
• The machine starts service mode and indi-  
cates ‘1’.  
4) Press ‘4’ on the numeric key pad.  
• The machine indicates ‘4’.  
5) Press the AE key.  
• Themachinestartsoperation/inspectionmode  
and indicates ‘401’.  
6) Press ‘6’ on the numeric keypad.  
• The machine indicates ‘406’.  
7) Press the Start key.  
• Themachinepicksuppaperfromthecassette,  
allows measurement as in Figure 4-718, and  
discharges paper.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
B. Composite Power Supply  
PCB  
VIII. ELECTRICAL  
A. DC Controller PCB  
1. RemovingtheCompositePowerSup-  
ply PCB  
1) Remove the lower rear cover and the left cover.  
2) Disconnect all connectors of the composite  
power supply PCB.  
1. Removing the DC Controller PCB  
1) Remove the lower rear cover.  
2) Disconnect the connector from the DC controller.  
3) Remove the six screws, and remove the DC  
controller PCB from the mounting plate.  
3) Disconnect J317 and J322 qof the DC control-  
ler PCB.  
2. Points to Note When Replacing the  
DC Controller  
1
• When sending the DC controller PCB to the  
workshop or the factory, put it in a static conduc-  
tive bag. Use a static conductive bag whose that  
is transparent enough in order for the face of the  
DC controller PCB to be visible.  
After replacement, perform the following:  
q enter the settings recorded on the service  
mode label  
w adjust the multifeeder paper width sensor  
e adjust the scanning lamp light intensity  
r adjust AE  
t enter the values recorded on the composite  
power supply label  
Figure 4-801  
4) Disconnect the two AC connectors w, and  
remove the two screws e.  
3
2
Figure 4-802  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
5) Remove the grounding wire r, screw t, the  
remaining connectors,and cord guide hook y;  
then, remove the composite power supply PCB  
u.  
5
4
7
6
Figure 4-803  
C. AE Sensor PCB  
1. Points to Note When Replacing the  
AE Sensor  
• After replacement, perform the following:  
q adjust AE  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MECHANICAL SYSTEM  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
4–52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 5  
INSTALLATION  
The machine is precisely adjusted and strictly inspected before shipment, and it is important to  
install the machine so that it retains its pre-shipment performance.  
The service person is expected to install the machine based on a full understanding of its  
mechanisms and run necessary checks after installation.  
I. SELECTING THE SITE ............................. 5-1  
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE  
COPIER ..................................................... 5-2  
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings....... 5-2  
B. Turning On the Copier ......................... 5-5  
C. Checking the Images and  
Operations ........................................... 5-7  
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ...................... 5-8  
E. Changing the Cassette Size................ 5-9  
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER .................. 5-11  
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .............. 5-12  
V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL  
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-16  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-16  
B. Installation (to copying machine)....... 5-17  
C. Installation (to a cassette Feeding Module-  
A2/B2/Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)....... 5-20  
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-24  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-24  
B. Installation ......................................... 5-25  
C. Attaching the Ratings Label .............. 5-27  
VIII.INSTALLING THE REMOTE  
CARD IV N............................................... 5-14  
DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II ......................... 5-28  
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-28  
B. Installing to the Copier....................... 5-28  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
I. SELECTING THE SITE  
Keep the following in mind when selecting the  
site of installation; if possible, pay a visit to the  
user’s before the delivery of the machine.  
• The site must provide a power outlet that may be  
used exclusively for the machine and that meets  
the rating ±10%.  
• The site must be 45.5° to 90.5°F (7.5° to 30°C) in  
temperature and 10% to 80% in humidity. In  
particular, avoid areas near water faucets, boil-  
ers, humidifiers, or refrigerators.  
• Avoid areas near sources of fire, areas subject to  
dust or ammonium gas, or areas exposed to the  
direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide cur-  
tains to shut out the sun.  
• The site must be well ventilated.  
• Make sure that the floor will remain in contact with  
the copier’s feet and will keep the copier level.  
• Make sure that there will be work space that  
meets the measurements shown in Figure 5-101;  
in other words, there must be distances A and B  
around the copier when measured with its front  
door open.  
B
A
A
A
A: 19.7in./50cm  
B: 3.9in./10cm  
Figure 5-101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE COPIER  
When a metal part is brought in from a cold to warm environment, droplets of water can develop on the  
surface of the part. This phenomenon is called condensation, and condensation in a copier can lead to faulty  
images. If the copier has been moved from a cold to warm place, leave it alone for about one hour or more  
before unpacking it.  
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings  
Step  
1
Work  
Unpack the copier.  
Remarks  
2
Detach the plastic cover, and place  
the copier on the pedestal holding  
its grips; be sure to work in a group  
of two.  
Install the Cassette Feeding  
Module-B2, -A2, etc. (accessory)  
according to its Installation Proce-  
dure if the copier is to be placed  
on it.  
Note:  
If the A or INCH/AB configuration machine the  
copyboard cover is attached.  
3
4
Open the cardboard box, and take Check that none of the following accessories is missing:  
out all the accessories.  
• Copy tray  
• Toner  
• Cassette (Universal) × 2  
• Operator’s Manual  
• Drum unit  
Remove all tape from the outside  
of the copier. Take out the cas-  
sette from the cardboard box, and  
remove the cushions from inside  
the cassette; then, slide the  
Make sure that the paper size plate and size label (1 pc.  
each) are inside the cassette.  
cassette into the copier.  
5
Remove the tape from the scanner  
fixing found on the outside of the  
left cover, remove the screw, and  
slide the fixing to the right to  
detach it to the front.  
Scanner fixing  
Screw  
• Keep the fixing stored for  
possible relocation of the  
machine.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
Step  
6
Work  
Remarks  
Open the front cover, and push the  
lever found on the left side up in  
the direction of the arrow to open  
the copier’s top body.  
Spacer  
Spacer  
Spacer  
7
Pull up the spacer (front and rear,  
1 pc. each) of the fixing roller until  
a click is heard.  
8
Remove the two pieces of card-  
board (spacer) from the feeding  
assembly.  
Spacer  
Spacer  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
Step  
Work  
Remarks  
9
Pull the developing locking lever  
toward the front, and turn it clock-  
wise to release it.  
Developping  
assembly  
stopper  
Knob  
Dumy  
drum  
Stopper  
Screw  
10  
Remove the knob, and remove the  
dummy drum from the copier.  
(Keep the knob for later.)  
Developping  
locking lever  
11  
12  
13  
Remove the screw, and remove  
the developing assembly stopper.  
Remove the stopper from the  
developing assembly.  
Remove the developing assembly,  
and check that the developing  
cylinder is free of scratches or dirt.  
14  
Install the developing assembly,  
and attach the developing assem-  
bly stopper with a screw.  
15  
16  
Engage the developing assembly.  
Close the copier’s top unit.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
B. Turning On the Copier  
Step  
1
Work  
Remarks  
Connect the power plug to the  
power outlet.  
Caution:  
• Make sure that the power outlet is the rating ±10%.  
2
Turn on the power switch.  
Make sure that the Add Paper message flashes.  
• Press the keypad and the Clear key to make sure that  
the copy count indication is correct.  
3
4
Turn off the power switch.  
Supply toner according to the  
instructions given on the toner  
supply label attached behind the  
front door.  
Caution:  
When turning the toner cartridge counterclockwise to  
set it, you must fully turn it until it is locked; the develop-  
ing assembly can cause a fault if you operate the  
machine without locking the cartridge.  
5
Release the developing assembly  
by the developing assembly  
locking lever.  
6
7
Install the drum unit.  
See “D. Attaching the Drum Unit.”  
Lock the developing assembly,  
and close the copier’s top unit.  
8
9
Insert the door switch activator into  
the door switch, and turn on the  
power.  
Service mode switch  
In others model except European  
model, this procedure is not  
necessary.  
Go to step 10).  
Select service mode No. 313/314,  
and enter the settings recorded on  
the drum label.  
To select service mode,  
• Press the service mode switch  
(SW850) with a hex key.  
Select ‘3’ of the mode by press-  
ing ‘3’ on the keypad and AE  
key; then, select ‘No. 3 xx’ by  
pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’ on the keypad  
and the start key.  
To enter settings,  
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the setting  
recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using the keypad. (To  
enter ‘–’, press the % key before entering the setting.)  
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.  
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’ in  
service mode and work in the same way.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
Step  
Work  
Remarks  
10  
Execute ‘No. 401’ in service mode. The copier supplies toner from the toner container to the  
• Press the service mode switch  
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE  
Key, and Start key in sequence.  
developing assembly (about 5 min).  
Caution:  
• Do not turn off the power or remove the door switch  
actuator while the machine is operating.  
11  
12  
Make sure that step 10 has been  
completed; then, turn off the  
power, and open the copier’s top  
unit.  
Remove the static eliminator, and  
clean it with the static eliminator  
brush; then, set the static elimina-  
tor.  
13  
14  
Turn on the power.  
Only the European model, in case  
of the other model, go to step 15.  
Execute ‘No. 412’ in service mode.  
• Press the service mode switch  
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE  
key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on the keypad,  
and Start key in sequence.  
The copier automatically sets the APVC value.  
15  
16  
Set the settings for user mode and  
settings mode in service mode to  
suit the needs of the user.  
Tailor the cassette to suit the  
desired size by operating the size  
guide plate and size detecting  
lever; then, attach the size label.  
See “E. Changing the Cassette Size.”  
17  
Put copy paper in the cassette,  
and set the cassette in the copier.  
• Make sure that the Add Paper message turns off.  
• Make sure that the paper indicator matches with the  
size of the cassette.  
• Press the keys on the control panel other than the Copy  
Start key to make sure that all respective operations are  
normal.  
18  
19  
Attach the copy tray.  
Remove the door switch activator,  
and close the front door.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
C. Checking the Images and Operations  
Step  
1
Work  
Checks/Remarks  
Place the Test Sheet on the  
• Make sure there is no abnormal sound.  
copyboard, and check the copies.  
• Check the copy images for each standard reproduction  
ratio.  
• Make sure that as many copies as specified are made  
normally.  
• If the copy image is faulty, perform the “Image Adjust-  
ment Basic Procedure.”(See service Handbook P.1-5.)  
2
3
Make copies in manual mode.  
Make sure that the copying operation is normal.  
Make sure that the external covers  
are free of scratches and deforma-  
tions.  
4
5
Clean the area around the copier.  
Move the machine to its site of  
installation.  
Make sure that the copier is more or less level.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
D. Attaching the Drum Unit  
Step  
1
Work  
Checks/Remarks  
Unpack the drum unit, and remove  
the light-blocking sheet.  
2
Remove the primary charging  
roller releasing spacer.  
Releasing spacer  
Releasing spacer  
Take care not to damage the surface of the drum and not  
to touch the primary charging roller.  
3
Set the drum unit to the copier,  
and fix it in position using the knob  
used to keep the dummy drum.  
Knob  
Drum unit  
Be sure to insert the drum unit straight along the copier’s  
rail.  
4
Fill out the label, and attach it to  
the drum unit cover.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
4) Move the paper size lever found toward the  
front of the cassette so that it is aligned with the  
size of the paper to be used.  
E. Changing the Cassette Size  
Change the cassette size to suit the user’s  
needs.  
1) Slide the cassette out of the copier.  
2) Move the length plate inside the cassette to suit  
the length of the paper size.  
U
STMTRLTRR STM LGL LTR 11x17  
A5R B5R A4R  
A
B
B
A
A
A5  
STMT  
STMTR  
A4/A5R  
R
T
L
B5R  
R
R
LT  
A4R  
Figure 5-203  
Caution:  
Failure to adjust the paper size lever will lead to  
jams or soiling.  
Figure 5-201  
3) Move the width plate inside the cassette to suit  
the width of the paper to be used.  
5) Take out the paper size plates for the cassette,  
and pick out the four plates representing the  
most frequently used sizes; attach the labels.  
A 4 A 3  
R
STMTR  
A5R  
B5R  
A5/A4R  
LGL/STMT  
TRR  
L
B5/B4  
1x17  
TR/1  
L
A4/A3  
R
A4  
A5  
Figure 5-202  
Figure 5-204  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
6) Set the paper size plates selected in step 4).  
After setting the size plate, make sure it corresponds  
to the paper size you have selected.  
Figure 5-205  
Caution:  
If you are setting the plate for the position  
representing the universal (U) cassette, you  
must perform the work described for “universal  
cassette paper size setting (505); see p. 3-131.  
Points to Note When Handling the Photo-  
sensitive Drum after Installation  
The copier’s photosensitive drum is highly sus-  
ceptible to light; mere exposure to room light can  
affect the drum enough to produce white spots or  
black lines on the copies. Keep the following in  
mind:  
• Donotspendmorethan5minwhenremoving  
jams.  
• After detaching the drum unit from the copier  
during servicing work, be sure to protect it in  
the light-blocking sheet that came with the  
drum or fresh copy paper, and place the drum  
in a dark place.  
Do not touch the photosensitive drum or primary  
charging roller.  
If you have soiled the surface of the drum  
inadvertently, wipe it using a flannel cloth coated  
with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.  
Donotdrywipeorusesolventtocleanthedrum.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER  
If you must relocate the copier by truck or using other means of transportation, perform the following work:  
Checks  
Step  
1
Work  
Remarks  
Move the lens to the Direct position.  
Direct position refers to  
the position of the lens  
after warm-up initiated by  
power-on.  
Put the drum unit in a  
box for transport.  
2
3
4
5
Take out the drum unit.  
Fix the scanner in place.  
Use the fixing removed at  
time of installation.  
Tape the front door and delivery  
assembly in place.  
Place 11 × 17/A3 copy paper on the  
copyboard glass, and tape the  
copyboard cover in place.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT  
Go through the following when replacing the drum unit:  
Step  
1
Work  
Remarks  
Turn off the copier, and open the  
front door and the copier’s top unit.  
2
Release the developing assembly,  
and remove the knob to remove  
the drum unit.  
Locking  
lever  
Knob  
Drum unit  
3
4
Unpack the new drum unit, and  
remove the light-blocking sheet.  
Remove the primary charging  
roller releasing spacer.  
Releasing spacer  
Releasing spacer  
Take care not to damage the surface of the drum and not  
to touch the primary charging roller.  
5
6
Set the drum unit to the copier,  
and attach the knob used to fix the  
old drum unit.  
Fill out the label, and attach it to  
the drum unit cover.  
7
Lock the developing assembly.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
Step  
8
Work  
Remarks  
Turn on the door switch using the  
door switch actuator; then, shift the  
power switch to ‘ON’.  
Service mode switch  
9
Only the European model, in case  
of the other model, go to next step.  
Select service mode No. 313/314,  
and enter the settings recorded on  
the drum label.  
To select service mode,  
• Press the service mode switch  
(SW850) with a hex key.  
Select ‘3’ of the mode by press-  
ing ‘3’ on the keypad and AE  
key; then, select ‘No. 3 xx’ by  
pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’ on the keypad  
and the Start key.  
To enter settings,  
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the setting  
recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using the keypad. (To  
enter ‘–’, press the % key before entering the setting.)  
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.  
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’ in  
service mode and work in the same way.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Turn off the power, and open the  
copier’s top unit.  
Replace the static eliminator, and  
close the copier's top unit.  
Close the front door, and turn on  
the power.  
Only the European model, in case  
The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it stops in  
of the other model, go to next step. about 23 sec.  
Execute ‘No. 412’ in service mode.  
• Press the service mode swicth  
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE  
key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on the keypad,  
and Start key in sequence.  
14  
15  
Remove the door switch actuator,  
and close the front door.  
Place the test sheet and check  
copy.  
Follow image adjustment procedure.  
(See the Service Handbook P.1-5.)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
9) Fix the Control Card IV N to the copier using a  
screw w (M4×12); at the time, be sure that the  
copier’s emboss e is fitted in the hole in the  
Control Card IV N.  
V. INSTALLING THE  
CONTROL CARD IV N  
Caution:  
Be sure to disconnect the copier’s power plug  
before starting the installation work.  
1) Open the front cover  
2) Open the copier’s top body by operating its  
open/close lever.  
3) Detach the front cover.  
3
4) Take out the cartridge.  
2
5) Detach the inside cover.  
6) Loosen the screw on the upper rear cover.  
7) Loosen the two screws on the copyboard glass.  
8) Detach the face plate q from the control card  
cable inlet.  
Figure 5-502  
When detaching the face plate q, detach it  
in the direction of the arrow using pliers or  
screwdriver.  
10) Disconnect the copier’s dummy connector r.  
1
4
Figure 5-503  
Figure 5-501  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
11) Connect the connector t of the Control Card  
IV N.  
t
Figure 5-504  
12) Connect the copier’s power plug, and turn on its  
power switch to check the operation of the  
Control Card IV N.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURE  
A. Unpacking  
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the parts shown in Fig. 5-601 is missing.  
2
3
4
6
7
5
1
Figure 5-601  
q Cassette Heater .................... 1  
w Mounting plate 1 .................... 1  
e Mounting plate 2 .................... 1  
r Relay harness ....................... 1  
t Cord clamp ............................ 1  
y Binding screw (black; M4×6). 2  
u TP screw (white; M3×6) ........ 2  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
3) Install the mounting plate 1 to the cassette  
B. Installation (to copying  
machine)  
heater with two screws (black; M4×6).  
Mounting plate 1  
1) Remove both top and bottom cassettes, and  
remove the front cover, front lower cover, and  
rear cover.  
Rear cover  
Screws  
Front cover  
Front lower cover  
Figure 5-602  
Cassette heater  
Figure 5-604  
2) Disconnect the connector for the heater from  
the copier’s rear, and remove the connector  
support member.  
4) Remove the screw, and remove the connector  
cover of the cassette heater.  
Support  
member  
Connector cover  
Connector  
Screw  
Figure 5-605  
Figure 5-603  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
5) Put the screw back, and tighten it.  
6) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater  
into the heater mounting hole in the copier’s  
rear plate.  
8) Connectthecopier’sconnectortotheconnector  
on the cassette heater visible at the rear of the  
copier.  
Heater mounting hole  
Connector on  
the heater  
Connector on  
the copier  
Figure 5-608  
Cassette heater  
Figure 5-606  
9) Install the copier’s rear cover, front lower cover,  
and front cover.  
10) Slide both top and bottom cassettes back in.  
11) Open the copier’s top unit.  
7) Fix the mounting plate 1 in place to the copier’s  
side plate with two screws (white; M3×6).  
Screws  
Figure 5-607  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
12) Turn on the copier’s cassette heater switch. (Of  
the two switches, one at the rear; the heater will  
be supplied with power when the copier is  
switched off.)  
Switch for the  
cassette  
heater  
Figure 5-609  
13) Close the top unit of the copier.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
C. Installation (to a Cassette  
Feeding Module-A2/B2/  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)  
1) Remove the cassettes and all rear covers from  
the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.  
2) Remove the copier’s rear cover.  
3) Install the mounting plate 2 to the cassette  
heater with two screws (black; M4×6).  
Mounting plate 2  
Figure 5-611  
5) Open the cover on the front of the cassette  
feeding unit/module, and fix the mounting plate  
2 in place to the front side plate with two screws  
(white; M3×6).  
Screw  
Cassette heater  
Figure 5-610  
4) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater  
into the heater mounting slit in the rear side  
plate of the cassette feeding unit/ pedestal  
(bottom holder).  
Screws  
Figure 5-612  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
• Cassette Feeding Module-B2  
6) Close the cover.  
7) Connect the connector on the relay harness to  
the connector of the cassette heater (rear side  
plateofthecassettefeedingunit/module). (Con-  
nect the side where the harness is bundled with  
a tie-wrap.)  
Tie-wrap  
Cord clamp  
Figure 5-615  
9) Arrange the relay harness on the rear side plate  
as indicated (Cassette Feeding Unit-K1).  
Relay harness  
Connector  
Cord clamp  
Figure 5-613  
8) Install the cord clamp to the hole in the rear side  
plate of the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.  
• CassetteFeedingModule-A2/CassetteFeed-  
ing Unit-K1  
Figure 5-616  
Cord clamp  
Figure 5-614  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
10) Lead the other connector on the relay harness  
through the copier’s bottom plate as shown.  
12) Fix the relay harness in place to the rear side  
plate with the cord clamp.  
• Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
Copier's connector  
Molded member  
Copier's base plate  
Figure 5-617  
Figure 5-619  
11) Connect the connector on the relay harness  
with the copier’s connector.  
Caution:  
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the  
are indicated by dashed lines to prevent it from  
interfering with the feet of the cassette.  
Relay harness  
Figure 5-618  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
• Cassette Feeding Module-A2  
13) Install the rear cover of the cassette pedestal  
and all covers.  
14) Install the copier’s rear cover.  
Figure 5-620  
Caution:  
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the  
areaindicatedbydashedlinestopreventitfrom  
interfering with the feet of the cassette.  
• Cassette Feeding Module-B2  
Figure 5-621  
Caution:  
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the  
areaindicatedbydashedlinestopreventitfrom  
interfering with the feet of the cassette.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION PRO-  
CEDURE  
A. Unpacking  
Open the shipping box, and make sure that none of the parts indicated Fig. 5-701 is missing.  
2
1
4
3
6
5
7
8
Figure 5-701  
q Cassette Heater .................... 1  
w Power cord mount ................. 1  
e Stay ....................................... 1  
r Relay harness ....................... 1  
t Binding screw (white; M4×6) . 1  
y TP screw (black; M4×6) ........ 1  
u Cord clamp ............................ 1  
i Ratings label.......................... 1  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
4) Remove the paper deck.  
5) Installthepowercordmount. (Usethemounting  
screw removed from the face plate.)  
B. Installation  
1) Remove the copier’s bottom cassette.  
2) Removethetwoscrews,andremovethecopier’s  
front right cover; then, disengage the snap, and  
remove the front lower cover.  
Front right cover  
Power cord mount  
Mounting screws  
Figure 5-704  
Front lower  
cover  
6) Install the stay with one mounting screw (white;  
M4×6).  
Figure 5-702  
3) Remove the left cover (4 screws), front upper  
cover(2screws), frontleftcover(3screws), and  
rear cover (4 screws); then, remove the two  
screws, and remove the face plate.  
Screw  
Stay  
Rear cover  
Figure 5-705  
Front upper cover  
Face plate  
Left cover  
Front left cover  
Figure 5-703  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
7) Connect the relay harness to the heater.  
9) Connect the relay harness to the connector on  
the power cord mount, and keep it in place with  
two cord guides.  
Relay harness  
Cord guides  
Figure 5-706  
Figure 5-708  
8) Install the heater to the paper deck, and fix it in  
place with a screw (black; M4×6).  
10) Install the left cover, front left cover, front upper  
over, and rear cover.  
11) Install the copier’s front lower cover and front  
right cover.  
12) Slide in the copier’s bottom cassette.  
Screw  
Relay harness  
Heater  
Figure 5-707  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
C. Attaching the Ratings  
Label  
1) Peel the backing sheet from the label, and  
attach the label to the rear cover of the pedestal  
as indicated.  
6 mm  
Figure 5-709  
2) Connect the heater’s power plug to the power  
outlet.  
3) Turn on the heater’s power switch.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
B. Installation to the Copier  
VIII.INSTALLING THE RE-  
MOTE DIAGNOSTIC  
DEVICE II  
i
This model may not be available for sale in  
some areas.  
Caution:  
A. Unpacking  
Keep the following in mind when installing the  
RDD to the copier:  
1. This Accessory is to be installed by a qualified  
personal.  
q
2. Make sure the copier has been properly in-  
stalled before starting the work.  
3. Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected  
during the work.  
4. Be sure to use the appropriate screws (length,  
diameter).  
w
e
5. Make sure the computer in the service station  
has been properly loaded with the RDD’s set-  
tings data.  
1) Remove the two screws wto detach the RDD’s  
top cover q.  
w
q
w
r
t
y
Fig. 5-802  
2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector e  
to the RDD’s connector ras shown.  
u
r
Fig. 5-801  
q RDD ....................................................... 1 unit  
w Power Supply Unit ................................. 1 unit  
e Screw (M4×6) ........................................ 4 pcs.  
r Harness band ........................................ 2 pcs.  
t Switch setting label ................................ 1 pcs.  
y Grounding wire* ..................................... 1 pc.  
u Ferrite core ............................................ 1 pc.  
*Not used.  
e
Fig. 5-803  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
3) Remove the two screws y, and detach the face  
cover tfrom the copier’s rear cover.  
o
i
t
y
y
Fig. 5-804  
4) Open the ferrite core u, wind the RDD’s cable  
i three times, and close the ferrite core u;  
thereafter, connect the cable oon the copier  
side and the RDD’s cable i.  
u
Note:  
If a conversion connector is found on the cable  
!from the copier, remove it.  
Fig. 5-806  
5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover  
with four screws y; use the screws removed  
from the copier.  
o
Modular Jack on the Right  
y
Fig. 5-805  
y
Fig. 5-807  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
6) Remove the slack from the cable between the  
copier and the RDD; keep the excess cable to  
the RDD using the harness band !.  
8) If the ROM IC6 ! is mounted on the RDD’s  
PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 ! to ON;  
otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF.  
Note:  
1. If the ROM (IC6; !) is not mounted, you  
need not mount it.  
2. If you are mounting or replacing the ROM  
(IC6; ! for upgrading the RDD, be sure to  
shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !to ON.  
!
!
Fig. 5-808  
7) Shiftbit4oftheDIPswitch2!toONsothatthe  
communication mode between the RDD and  
the copier is IPC mode.  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
!
!
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-810  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !on the RDD’s  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
IC6  
CN4  
PCB as indicated in the table.  
SW1  
CN3  
CN2  
!
Fig. 5-809  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-811  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
11) Reset the RDD’s RAM.  
Set the bits on the DIP switch 2!  
Switch  
SW3-1  
SW3-2  
SW3-3  
Setting  
AII  
Description  
6
on the RDD’s  
PCB as indicated in the table, and press the  
push switch 4 ! to make sure that LED5 !  
(red) comes on.  
OFF  
ON  
bits on SW2  
SW2-1  
SW2-2  
SW2-3  
SW2-4  
SW2-5  
SW2-6  
SW2-7  
SW2-8  
Setting  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
selects push pulse for  
RDD circuit confihuration  
SW3-4  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
selscts dial pulse for  
RDD circuit confihuration  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
sets dial pulse speed to  
20 PPS  
See step 9).  
OFF  
SW3-5  
SW3-6  
sets dial pulse speed to  
10 PPS  
Table 5-802  
reserved  
Table 5-801  
10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug,  
!
and check that LED 1 !  
5
(green) on the RDD’s  
PCB comes on.  
!
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
!
1
1
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
2
!
IC6  
CN4  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
SW1  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
CN3  
CN2  
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
2
IC6  
CN4  
Fig. 5-813  
SW1  
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-812  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
12) After making sure that LED5 !  
8
(red) has come  
on the  
14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line.  
If you are connecting the RDD on its own,  
connect the modular jack cable to the RDD’s  
on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !  
6
RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press  
the push switch 4 ! to make sure that LED5 !  
(red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has  
been reset.  
connector @ (LINE).  
0
If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit,  
connect the existing telephone or fax machine  
to the RDD’s connector @ (TEL), and connect  
the telephone circuit to the RDD’s connector @  
(LINE).  
bits on SW2  
SW2-1  
SW2-2  
SW2-3  
SW2-4  
SW2-5  
SW2-6  
SW2-7  
SW2-8  
Setting  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
OFF  
ON  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
See step 9).  
OFF  
CN3  
CN2  
Table 5-803  
@
@
Fig. 5-816  
!
15) Call up the service station, and request the  
RDD’s initial settings. (LED 4 @ (red) starts to  
flash upon receipt.)  
!
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
2
!
IC6  
CN4  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
SW1  
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
CN3  
CN2  
@
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
Fig. 5-814  
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch 2 !  
9
on the RDD’s  
CN3  
CN2  
PCB to OFF.  
Fig. 5-817  
!
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-815  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
16) Call up the service station to check if the initial  
settings have been successfully made; if the  
attempt has failed, reset the RAM once again  
starting with step 11) through 13).  
19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make  
sure that LED3 @ (pink) flashes each time a  
copy is delivered.  
@
Important:  
You must confirm that the RDD’s settings are  
correct by calling the service station.  
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
17) Check that you can place a telephone call from  
the RDD to the computer in the service station.  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
Press the push switch 4 !. LED6 @ (red)  
3
should come on; it will go out when transmis-  
sion ends successfully, or will start to flash if  
transmission fails.  
CN3  
CN2  
Retransmission is executed in response to a  
Fig. 5-820  
press on the push switch 4 ! while LED6 @3 is  
7
flashing.  
20) Attach the Switch setting label @, to the RDD’s  
top cover q; then, record the setting of each  
Transmission is canceled in response to a  
press on the push switch 1 @  
flashing.  
4
while LED6 @ is  
3
switch on the label.  
w
@
LED1 LED2 LED3  
q
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
SW3  
SW2  
w
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
@
2
IC6  
CN4  
!
SW1  
@
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-818  
Fig. 5-821  
18) Check that the communications between the  
RDD and the copier are executed normally.  
Connect the copier’s power plug, and switch it  
21) Fix the RDD’s top cover q in place using two  
screws w. (Make sure that the Power Unit’s  
cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside  
the RDD and is not trapped by the top cover q.  
ontomakesurethatLED2@(orange)flashes.  
5
@
LED1 LED2 LED3  
2
6
1
BAT1  
1
1
2
SW3  
SW2  
LED5  
LED6  
LED4  
SW4  
IC6  
CN4  
SW1  
CN3  
CN2  
Fig. 5-819  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
5–34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 6  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS....... 6-1  
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ................ 6-1  
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES .......... 6-2  
A. Copier .................................................. 6-2  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2,  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 6-3  
III. BASIC SERVICING ................................... 6-4  
IV. SERVICING CHART ................................. 6-5  
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work ............ 6-5  
Cassette Feeding Module-A2,  
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 ............ 6-3  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS  
Ofthepartsusedinthemachine, thosegiveninthetablemustbereplacedonaperiodicalbasistomaintain  
a specific level of machine performance. (You must replace them regardless of the absence of exterior wear  
or damage, as they significantly affect the machine performance should they fail.)  
Schedule a visit so that you may replace the parts during periodical servicing.  
A. Periodically Replaced Parts  
As of FEB. 1998  
Remarks  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Static eliminator  
Q’ty  
1
Life  
Parts No.  
100,000  
FG5-2912-020  
Note:  
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1996 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES  
Of the parts used in the machine, those given in the table may prove to require replacement once or more  
over the period of warranty because of wear or damage; replace them as necessary referring to the guide.  
A. Copier  
As of FEB. 1998  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Pick-up roller  
Parts No.  
FB3-8771-00P  
FG5-6792-020  
FB1-8581-000  
Q’ty Life (copies)  
Remarks  
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
60,000  
Actual copies made.  
Actual copies made.  
Actual copies made.  
Actual copies made.  
2
Pick-up separation pad  
Multifeeder pick-up roller  
3
4
Multifeeder separation pad FB2-2167-000  
5
Halogen Lamp  
FB7-3271-000  
FB3-4494-00P  
FA0-0353-00P  
FB2-2223-000  
FG5-2928-140  
FB2-2316-000  
6
Fixing cleaning roller  
Oil-applying roller  
Transfer roller  
7
8
100,000  
200,000  
200,000  
200,000  
200,000  
200,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
100,000  
9
Fixing upper unit  
Lower fixing roller  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Upper fixing separation claw FB1-0301-000  
Lower fixing separation claw FB1-7275-000  
Pre-exposure lamp  
FG5-2891-000  
FG5-3275-04P  
FB2-3834-000  
FB2-3825-00P  
FG5-7012-00P  
FC2-8902-00P  
Developing assembly  
14-1 Developing cylinder  
14-2 Side seal  
Replace in units of  
12 or 12-1 through  
12-4.  
14-3 Developing blade unit  
15  
Scanner cooling fan filter  
Note:  
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2,  
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1  
As of FEB. 1998  
Remarks  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Pick-up roller  
Pick-up separation pad  
Q’ty  
Life (copies)  
100,000  
Parts No.  
Actual copies made.  
Actual copies made.  
FB2-2251-000 1 through 3  
2
1 through 3  
100,000  
FG5-3614-000  
Note:  
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.  
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1  
As of FEB. 1998  
Remarks  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Pick-up roller  
Q’ty  
1
Life (copies)  
100,000  
Parts No.  
Rear  
Front  
FF5-1220-000  
FF5-1221-000  
FB1-7061-000  
FB1-7060-020  
100,000  
1
2
3
Feeding roller  
1
100,000  
Separation roller  
1
100,000  
Note:  
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1996 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
III. BASIC SERVICING  
The machine does not have items to be serviced on a scheduled basis. However, it is desirable to go  
through the steps in the table when paying a visit to the user.  
Items  
Step  
1
Work  
Remarks  
Check the general  
condition.  
Meet the person in charge.  
Check the following:  
a. image density  
b. soiling of white  
background  
2
Make test copies in DIRECT,  
REDUCE, ENLARGE.  
c. clarity of characters  
d. leading edge non-  
image width  
standard: 2.5 ±1.5 mm  
(DIRECT, one-sided)  
standard: 2.5 ±1.5 mm  
e. left/right margin  
f. fixing/registration  
displacement, soiled  
back  
(DIRECT, one-sided)  
g. abnormal noise  
h. counter operation  
3
4
Clean the static eliminator and feeding  
assembly.  
Use the special brush  
(accessory) when  
cleaning the static  
eliminator.  
Clean the fixing/delivery assembly:  
• paper guide plate  
Use solvent.  
Use solvent.  
• separation claw  
5
6
Perform servicing according to the  
number of copies made.  
Clean the copyboard cover and  
copyboard glass.  
7
8
9
Make test copies.  
Make sample copies.  
Put sample copies in order and clean  
up the site of installation.  
10  
11  
Record the latest counter reading.  
Fill out the Servicing Sheet, and report  
to the person in charge.  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
IV. SERVICING CHART  
Caution:  
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.  
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work  
: clean  
: replace : lubricate  
: adjust  
: check or clean  
Remarks  
every  
every  
year  
every  
20,000  
every  
Unit  
Parts  
Copyboard glass  
Pick-up roller  
60,000  
100,000  
External  
Control  
Pick-up  
assembly  
Use alcohol.  
Use alcohol; then,  
apply lubricant.  
Scanner drive  
assembly  
Scanning rail  
Transfer guide assembly  
Feeding belt  
Feeding  
assembly  
Use a moist cloth.  
Feeding assembly PCB  
Scanning lamp reflecting plate  
Scanning lamp side  
reflecting plate  
Use a blower brush; if  
the dirt cannot be  
removed, use alcohol.  
Optical path  
No. 1 through No. 6 mirrors  
Lens  
Dust-proofing glass  
Clearner bottom  
Drum support shaft  
Charging roller  
Actual number of times  
the drum ikit has been  
used.  
Drum kit  
Use a cotton wad.  
Charging  
assembly  
Charging roller cleaner  
Static eliminator  
Developing  
assembly  
Developing roll  
Use cleaning oil.  
Use solvent..  
Lower fixing roller  
Separation claw (lower, upper)  
Fixing inlet guide  
Delivery guide/ tray  
Fixing feeding spacer  
Delivery roll  
Fixing  
assembly  
Delivery  
assembly  
Use alcohol.  
Use alcohol.  
Set-back roller  
Duplexing  
unit  
Re-pick-up roller  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1996 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
6–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..................... A-1  
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2  
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ........... A-2  
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............... A-5  
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM... A-7  
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-21  
F. CONTROL PANEL KEYPCB ................. A-27  
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......... A-31  
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-32  
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT  
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-33  
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2  
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-37  
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 DRIVER  
CIRSUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-38  
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-41  
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 ............ A-42  
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-45  
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1  
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-46  
R. SPECIAL TOOLS ................................... A-47  
S. SOLVENTS/OILS ................................... A-48  
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-34  
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2  
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-35  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART  
A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, cassette 1  
Power switch  
ON  
Copy start key  
ON  
Sequence  
STBY  
INTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
SCFW  
SCRV  
LSTR  
STBY  
AER  
Main motor (M1)  
1
2
Pre-exposure lamp  
Primary charging (APVC)  
Primary charging bias  
Scanning motor (M2)  
Scanning lamp  
3
Reverse  
Forward  
4
5
6
Image exposure  
Blanking shutter solenoid  
(SL3)  
7
Transfer reference bias  
(ATVC)  
8
9
Transfer cleaning bias  
Transfer bias  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Static eliminator bias  
Developing bias AC  
Developing bias DC  
Fixing heater (H1)  
-80 to -560V  
High  
Low  
Heat exhaust fan (FM1)  
Environment heater (H3)  
Scanner cooling fan (FM2)  
Scanner home position  
sensor (PS1)  
Registration sensor (PS6)  
20 Separation sensor (PS7)  
21 Delivery sensor (PS8)  
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch  
(CL2)  
22  
23  
24  
Vertical path roller clutch  
Registration clutch (CL1)  
0;Lqpplying solenoid (SL6)  
25  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS  
1. Signals  
A/A*  
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR PHASE A  
CSZ3  
CASSETTE SIZE signal 3  
ACBIAS  
AE  
AEREF  
ATTH  
B/B*  
BIASS  
DEVELOPING AC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal  
AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal AE  
AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal AE  
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR signal  
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR PHASE B  
DEVELOPING DC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal  
DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command  
BLANKING SHUTTER HOME POSITION signal  
BLANKING SHUTTER SOLENOID DRIVE command  
CASSETTE2 SIZE 1 signal  
CASSETTE2 SIZE 2 signal  
CASSETTE2 SIZE 3 signal  
CASSETTE2 SIZE 4 signal  
CASSETTE3 PAPER DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE3 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command  
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION1 signal  
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION2 signal  
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION3 signal  
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION4 signal  
CASSETTE3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE4/5 PAPER DETECTION 1 signal  
CASSETTE4/5 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command  
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 1 signal  
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 2 signal  
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 3 signal  
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 4 signal  
CASSETTE4 VERTICAL PAPER DETECTION 1 signal  
CASSETTE5 VERTICAL PAPER DETECTION 1 signal  
CONTROL CARD DRIVE command  
CSZ4  
CVOP  
DEL  
DEOP  
DEPRL  
DLD  
DPD  
DUEX  
DUIN  
CASSETTE SIZE signal 4  
CCPYBOARD COVER OPEN signal  
DECK LIFTER LIMIT signal  
DECK OPEN signal  
DECK PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE command  
DECK LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal  
DELIVERY DETECTION signal  
DUPLEX PAPER EXIT DETECTION signal  
DUPLEX PAPER INLET DETECTION saignal  
DUPLEXING UNIT PRE-REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal  
DUPLEX REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal  
DECK VERTICAL ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal  
EARTH RL DRIVE command RL2  
BPWM  
BSHP  
BSSLD  
C2SZ1  
C2SZ2  
C2SZ3  
C2SZ4  
C3PD  
DUPD  
DURG  
DVRPD  
EHTRL  
FDFD  
FFA/FFA*  
FFB/FFB*  
FFCB/FFCA  
FFD  
FLHTOFF  
FLON  
FLPRHT  
FLS  
FLTH  
FLTHON  
FMD  
HEFD  
HTON  
HTRD  
JCTL  
JLVCTL  
LHP  
LID  
LNSA/LNSA*  
LNSB/LNSB*  
LNSCA  
LNSCB  
LOCK  
FEEDING FAN DRIVE signal  
C3PUCLD  
C3SZ1  
C3SZ2  
C3SZ3  
C3SZ4  
C3VPD  
C4PD/C5PD  
C4PUCLD/C5PUCLD  
C4SZ1/C5SZ1  
C4SZ2/C5SZ2  
C4SZ3/C5SZ3  
C4SZ4/C5SZ4  
C4VPD  
C5VPD  
CCD  
CCDT  
CDC  
CHSLD  
CL1D  
CL2D  
CL3D  
CL4D  
CL5D  
CL6D  
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A/A*  
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command B/B*  
FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command A/B  
FIXING FILM POSITION signal  
FLUORESCENT LAMP HEATER OFF command  
FLUORESCENT LAMP ON command  
FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE-HEAT command  
FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal  
FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal  
FLUORESCENT LAMP HEATER ON command  
FUSER FILM MOTOR DRIVE command  
HEATER EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command  
HEATER ON DETECTION signal  
HEATER DRIVE command  
DISCHARGE BIAS DRIVE command  
CONTROL CARD DETECTION signal  
COPY DENSITY CORRECTION signal  
CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE command  
DISCHARGE BIAS CHARGE command  
LENS HOME POSITION DETECTION signal  
LIGHT INTENSITY signal  
LENS MOTOR PULSE command A/A*  
LENS MOTOR PULSE command B/B*  
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command A  
DECK PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command  
DECK VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command  
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 3 CLUTCH DRIVE command  
DECK LIFTER CLUTCH DRIVE command  
CASSETTE2 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command  
DUPLE XING UNIT HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command  
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command  
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A/A*  
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B/B*  
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR COMMON A signal  
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR COMMON B signal  
CASSETTE PAPER1 DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE PAPER2 DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION command  
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION2 command  
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION3 command  
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION4 command  
CASSETTE4 PAPER DETECTION signal  
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command B  
PEDESTAL MOTOR ERROR signal  
MFPD  
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal  
MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command  
MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal  
MULTIFEEDER SOLENOID DRIVE command  
MAIN MOTOR SPEED STATUS signal  
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal  
CL7D  
MFPUCLD  
MFPWD  
MFSLD  
MLOCK  
MMD  
MMCLK  
MPWN  
PCLSLD  
PCTRLS  
PCURS  
PDCS  
CMA/CMA*  
CMB/CMB*  
COMA  
COMB  
CPD1  
CPD2  
CRDOP  
CS  
CS2  
CS3  
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal  
MAIN PULSE command  
PRIMARY CORONA ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID command  
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT PULSE command  
PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT BUFFER signal  
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT command  
PEDESTAL MOTOR DRIVE command  
PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command  
CASSETTE1 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command  
CS4  
CS4PD  
CSZ1  
PEDMD  
PEXD  
PUCLD1  
CASSETTE SIZE signal 1  
CASSETTE SIZE signal 2  
CSZ2  
A–2  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PWSW  
RDOP  
RGCLD  
RGHP  
RPD  
SCA/A*  
SCB/B*  
SCHP  
SELECT  
SIZE1  
SIZE2  
SIZE3  
SIZE4  
SL6D  
POWER SWITCH command  
RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal  
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command  
DUPLEXING UNIT REGISTRATION ROLLER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal  
REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal  
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A/A*  
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B/B*  
SCANNER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal  
CASSETTE4/5 SELECT signal  
ORIGINAL SIZE1 DETECTION signal  
ORIGINAL SIZE2 DETECTION signal  
ORIGINAL SIZE3 DETECTION signal  
ORIGINAL SIZE4 DETECTION signal  
DUPLEXING UNIT CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE signal  
DUPLEXING UNIT FLAPPER SOLENOID DRIVE signal  
PAPER DEFLECTING PLATE SOLENOID DRIVE signal  
SEPARATION DETECTION signal  
SL7D  
SL8D  
SPD  
SRSW  
TCNTD  
TEP  
SERVICE MODE SWITCH signal  
TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE command  
TONER EMPTY signal  
TFWON  
TFWPWN  
TFWS  
TH1  
TRANSFER BIAS ON/OFF command  
TRANSFER BIAS LOW VOLTAGE signal  
TRANSFER BIAS PULSE command  
FIXING HEATER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal  
FIXING HEATER END TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal  
TRANSFER REVERSE ON command  
TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER RELEASING signal  
VERTICAL PATH1 PAPER DETECTION signal  
VERTICAL PATH2 PAPER DETECTION signal  
TH2  
TREVON  
TRSLD  
VP1P  
VP2P  
3. Abbreviations  
AER  
AE ROTATION  
INTR  
LSTR  
SCFW  
SCRV  
STBY  
INITIAL ROTATION  
LAST ROTATION  
SCANNER FORWARD  
SCANNER REVERSE  
STANDBY  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
not available  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
VCC  
R301  
ZERCRSS  
PI[0..7]  
DC Controller (1/14)  
LINK  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
XR331.SCH  
XR332.SCH  
XR333.SCH  
XR334.SCH  
XR335.SCH  
XR336.SCH  
XR337.SCH  
XR338.SCH  
XR339.SCH  
XR3310.SCH  
XR3311.SCH  
XR3312.SCH  
XR3313.SCH  
+
CSGA  
CSIPC  
CSRAM  
CSROM  
C391  
C392  
PI[0..7]  
C301  
C353  
TP[2..15]  
TP[2..15]  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
L1  
L2  
INDUCTOR  
C311  
C302  
L3  
INDUCTOR  
VCC  
R303  
C303  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
84  
R304  
R302  
VCC  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6  
PB7  
VSS  
PC0  
PC1  
PC2  
PC3  
PC4  
PC5  
PC6  
PC7  
RES0  
TXD0  
TXD1  
RXD0  
RXD1  
IRQ4  
IRQ5  
VSS  
D0  
AVCC  
MD2  
MD1  
TP8  
TP9  
83  
82  
81  
80  
79  
78  
77  
76  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
TP10  
TP11  
TP12  
TP13  
TP14  
TP15  
C304  
C305  
MD0  
CP-SOUT  
DTC114EU  
Q303  
LWR/LW/LCAS  
HWR/UW/UCAS  
RD/CAS/WE  
AS  
WR  
RD  
R305  
X301  
VCC  
XTAL  
EXTAL  
VSS  
NMI  
RES  
STBY  
FAI  
BACK  
BREQ  
WAIT  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
A15  
A14  
A13  
A12  
DIPD-I  
R306  
DEPD-I  
R307  
VCC  
UP-FEDDT-I  
LW-FEDDT-I  
COVDT-I  
WATDG  
PH8  
VCC  
RES  
Q301  
C306  
DERS-I  
R349  
R308  
R309  
R310  
R311  
R312  
R313  
R314  
R315  
ADD19  
ADD18  
ADD17  
ADD16  
ADD15  
ADD14  
ADD13  
ADD12  
R348  
VCC  
CP-SIN  
C310  
SCI  
R316  
D1  
A11  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
C307  
DTA114EU  
Q302  
R317  
CP-SCLK  
DTC114EU  
Q304  
R318  
CLCK  
ADD[1..15]  
ADD[0..14]  
ADD[1..18]  
ADD[0..7]  
GA  
R347  
RAM  
ROM  
IPC  
SCI  
C309  
VCC  
IPC  
DATA[8..15]  
VCC  
L4  
INDUCTOR  
C308  
RAM  
ROM  
GA  
DATA[8..15]  
DATA[0..15]  
DATA[8..15]  
VCC  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (2/14)  
VCC  
ADD[1..18]  
VCC  
R355  
R401  
C314  
Q307  
1
VPP  
VCC 40  
R402  
Q306  
ADD18  
ADD17  
ADD16  
ADD15  
ADD14  
ADD13  
ADD12  
ADD11  
ADD10  
ADD9  
ADD8  
ADD7  
ADD6  
ADD5  
ADD4  
ADD3  
ADD2  
ADD1  
39 A17  
38 A16  
37 A15  
36 A14  
35 A13  
34 A12  
33 A11  
32 A10  
RES  
DATA15  
DATA14  
DATA13  
DATA12  
DATA11  
DATA10  
DATA9  
DATA8  
DATA7  
DATA6  
DATA5  
DATA4  
DATA3  
DATA2  
DATA1  
DATA0  
D15  
D14  
D13  
D12  
D11  
D10  
D9  
D8 10  
D7 12  
D6 13  
D5 14  
D4 15  
D3 16  
D2 17  
D1 18  
D0 19  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MR  
Q305  
RES  
VCC  
R354  
WATDG  
Q398  
31 A9  
29 A8  
28 A7  
27 A6  
26 A5  
25 A4  
24 A3  
23 A2  
22 A1  
21 A0  
DATA[0..15]  
Q399  
VCC  
R356  
DATA[0..15]  
2
CE  
CSROM  
20 DE  
11 VSS  
VSS 30  
VCC  
ADD[0..14]  
R357  
D301  
Q309  
Q310  
RES  
Q308  
ADD14  
1
A14  
26 A13  
A12  
VDD 28  
ADD13  
ADD12  
ADD11  
ADD10  
ADD9  
ADD8  
ADD7  
ADD6  
ADD5  
ADD4  
ADD3  
ADD2  
ADD1  
ADD0  
2
23 A11  
21 A10  
24 A9  
25 A8  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1/07 19  
1/06 18  
1/05 17  
1/04 16  
1/03 15  
1/02 13  
1/01 12  
1/00 11  
DATA15  
DATA14  
DATA13  
DATA12  
DATA11  
DATA10  
DATA9  
D302  
R358  
C313  
A7  
A6  
A5  
A4  
A3  
A2  
A1  
C315  
BAT301  
DATA8  
Q300  
10 A0  
1
2
CSRAMOU  
4
20 CE  
22 DE  
27 R/W  
RD  
VSS 14  
RAMWR  
DATA[8..15]  
RES  
A–8  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (3/14)  
VCC  
L5  
DATA[8..15]  
INDUCTOR  
C316  
VCC  
ADD[0..7]  
ADD[0..7]  
R360  
WR  
RD  
CSIPC  
PD[0..7]  
PD[0..7]  
VCC  
R361  
DATA9  
DATA8  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
ADD7  
PD0  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD4  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
PE0  
PE1  
PE2  
PE3  
PE4  
PE5  
PE6  
PE7  
PH0  
DO1  
DO0  
W
R
S
A7  
PA0  
PA1  
PA2  
PA3  
PA4  
PA5  
PA6  
PA7  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6  
PB7  
PO0  
R362  
R368  
R374  
R363  
R367  
R375  
PE[0..7]  
PE[0..7]  
AST-RXD  
C317  
C318  
C319  
BM  
VCC  
INTR  
RXD3  
TXD3  
RXD2  
TXD2  
RXD1  
TXD1  
CTS3  
CTS2  
CTS1  
CLK  
PI2  
Q311  
PH[0..7]  
PH[0..7]  
R364  
Q312F  
Q312E  
Q312D  
AST-TXD  
S-RXD  
S-TXD  
Q313  
R365  
R372  
R377  
12  
10  
8
13  
11  
9
VCC  
R366  
R371  
R378  
R369  
VCC  
C379  
RES  
C320  
R370  
Q314  
X302  
C321  
C322  
VCC  
R373  
D-RXD  
VCC  
R376  
Q315  
D-TXD  
VCC  
C323  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R383  
DC Controller (4/14)  
RES  
PT40  
C324  
VCC  
C328  
PT[60..67]  
PT[60..67]  
VCC  
VCC  
PT41  
P[30..37]  
PT[0..7]  
P[30..37]  
PT[0..7]  
PT57  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
108  
107  
106  
105  
104  
103  
102  
101  
100  
99  
98  
97  
96  
95  
94  
93  
92  
91  
90  
89  
88  
87  
86  
85  
84  
83  
82  
81  
80  
79  
78  
77  
76  
75  
VSS  
VDD  
PT56  
PT55  
PT54  
PT53  
PT52  
VSS  
PT51  
PT50  
PT27  
PT26  
PT25  
PT24  
PT23  
PT22  
PT21  
PT20  
VDD  
PT17  
PT16  
PT15  
PT14  
PT13  
PT12  
PT11  
VCC  
P37  
P36  
P35  
P34  
P33  
P32  
P31  
P30  
PT56  
PT55  
PT54  
PT53  
PT52  
PT37  
PT36  
PT35  
PT34  
PT33  
PT32  
PT31  
PT30  
VSS  
PTO7  
PTO6  
PTO5  
PTO4  
PTO3  
PTO2  
PTO1  
PTO0  
VDD  
PC15  
PC14  
PC13  
PC12  
PC11  
PC10  
PC9  
PC[0..12]  
PC[0..12]  
PT51  
PT50  
PT27  
PT26  
PT25  
PT24  
PT23  
PT22  
PT21  
PT20  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
PT7  
PT6  
PT5  
PT4  
PT3  
PT2  
PT1  
PT0  
VCC  
VCC  
Q316  
PT17  
PT16  
PT15  
PT14  
PT13  
PT12  
PT11  
PT10  
MO  
C327  
C329  
PC12  
PC11  
PC10  
PC9  
PC8  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
PC0  
PT10  
RLOFOU  
VSS  
PC8  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
HTOFFOUT  
HTNG  
HTOFOU  
HTOFIN  
ACCRIN  
ADD15  
ADD14  
ADD13  
ADD12  
VSS  
ADD15  
ADD14  
ADD13  
ADD12  
74  
73  
PC0  
VDD  
VCC  
VCC  
C330  
L7  
INDUCTOR  
OPTPHA  
OPTPHB  
OPTENB  
VCC  
C325  
R384  
ADD[11..15]  
DATA[8..15]  
ADD[11..15]  
CSRAMOU  
DATA[8..15]  
RAMWR  
VCC  
VCC  
L6  
INDUCTOR  
C326  
R382  
CSGA  
VCC  
R380  
CSRAM  
CLCK  
WR  
RD  
A–10  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (5/14)  
DUPLEX-COMA  
DUPLEX-COMB  
DUPLEX-A  
+24VF2  
+24VF1  
VBG  
+34V  
+
C394  
C393  
F303  
JUMPER  
R409  
R410  
R411  
R412  
R386  
TP8  
Q334  
R387  
C387  
D303  
C388  
Q323  
+
VCC  
C331  
C332  
TP7  
Q322  
VBG  
DUPLEX-A  
DUPLEX-B  
DUPLEX-B  
GND34  
TP9  
Q335  
PT21  
Q324  
VBG  
R388 R389 R390 R391 R392 R393  
Q325  
TP7  
D304  
D305  
D306  
D307  
TP10  
Q336  
VCC  
SC-A  
SC-A  
SC-B  
SC-B  
PT55  
VBG  
C333  
TP4  
TP5  
TP6  
PT57  
MO  
TP11  
Q337  
R394  
VBG  
D308  
D309  
D310  
D311  
C334  
R350  
R351  
Q351  
LENS-COMA  
LENS-COMB  
LENS-A  
R396  
Q350  
R395  
+34V  
GND34  
+24V2  
R397  
R398  
R399  
R400  
TP12  
TP13  
TP14  
TP15  
Q318  
R352  
R426  
GND34  
LENS-A  
LENS-B  
LENS-B  
R427  
R428  
Q319  
PT56  
Q400  
GND34  
GND34  
Q320  
+24VF2  
VBG  
GND34  
+
C390  
C389  
Q321  
GND34  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
+24V2  
DC Controller (6/14)  
+24V2  
VCC  
D315  
PT23  
OPCNTD  
VCC  
R416  
Q344  
ZD303  
Q345  
OPCNTPR  
R415  
Q346  
R417  
ZD302  
1
3
2
4
6
7
5
16  
SLNOID  
MF PUCL  
PT10  
PT20  
PT12  
PT16  
VBG  
Q338A  
PE4  
Q347  
VBG  
+24V2  
14  
DSR-CL  
Q338C  
MTR-COM  
ZD304  
OPTENB  
Q352  
15  
RGCL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16  
Q338B  
PE5  
CL1  
Q401A  
VBG  
13  
LWPU-CL  
Q338D  
15  
PE6  
OPTPHA  
OPTPHB  
PE3  
CL2  
CL3  
CL4  
CCD  
FL-S  
Q401B  
11  
+24V2  
Q338F  
VCC  
14  
D313  
Q401C  
PT22  
TCNTD  
10  
R413  
Q341  
Q338G  
Q342  
TCNTRPR  
Q343  
R414  
13  
ZD301  
Q401D  
12  
VBG  
Q338E  
12  
Q401E  
11  
PAPFAN  
TP2  
Q401F  
R418  
PD3  
Q339  
VBG  
10  
Q401G  
APGND  
R419  
Q340  
PD7  
C397  
A–12  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (7/14)  
VCC  
2
4
5
3
6
7
1
15  
CHNG-SL  
TRCLSL  
PT51  
PT27  
PT17  
Q348B  
PT13  
Q353  
PR-EXP  
R425  
13  
MMD  
R420  
R385  
R591  
Q348D  
PT25  
PT54  
PT52  
Q359  
AST-CNTP  
12  
MFMRLSL  
VBG  
Q348E  
PE2  
PE1  
PE0  
Q356  
EPD-SL  
14  
Q348C  
Q327  
CP-DATA0  
11  
PD2  
PD1  
Q360  
Q348F  
VBG  
CRCLSL  
10  
Q348G  
ZD305  
CP-REQ  
+24V2  
Q405  
16  
Q357  
PT50  
Q348A  
VBG  
VBG  
EXFAN  
R421  
PT24  
Q361  
ZD306  
VCC  
+24V2  
VBG  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
R575  
R575  
Q362  
Q363  
Q364  
1
3
16  
R422  
BLNKST-SL  
PUCL  
PT26  
VBG  
PT11  
CSCEP  
Q349A  
14  
R423  
5
12  
Q349E  
PD0  
Q349C  
EEP-SCLK  
EEP-SO  
4
2
6
7
13  
UPFED-CL  
PT15  
R424  
Q349D  
DPT-FAN  
15  
Q349B  
R381  
PE7  
Q402  
11  
Q349F  
VBG  
10  
Q349G  
SOL-OIL  
R403  
PT40  
Q330  
VBG  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (8/14)  
VCC  
2
4
5
3
6
7
1
15  
CHNG-SL  
TRCLSL  
PT51  
PT27  
PT17  
Q348B  
PT13  
Q353  
PR-EXP  
EPD-SL  
CRCLSL  
R425  
13  
MMD  
R420  
R385  
R591  
Q348D  
PT25  
PT54  
PT52  
Q359  
AST-CNTP  
12  
MFMRLSL  
VBG  
Q348E  
PE2  
PE1  
PE0  
Q356  
14  
Q348C  
Q327  
CP-DATA0  
11  
PD2  
PD1  
Q360  
Q348F  
VBG  
10  
Q348G  
ZD305  
CP-REQ  
+24V2  
Q405  
16  
Q357  
PT50  
Q348A  
VBG  
VBG  
EXFAN  
R421  
PT24  
Q361  
ZD306  
VCC  
+24V2  
VBG  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
R575  
R575  
Q362  
Q363  
Q364  
1
3
16  
R422  
BLNKST-SL  
PUCL  
PT26  
VBG  
PT11  
CSCEP  
Q349A  
14  
R423  
R424  
5
12  
Q349E  
PD0  
Q349C  
EEP-SCLK  
EEP-SO  
4
2
6
7
13  
UPFED-CL  
PT15  
Q349D  
DPT-FAN  
15  
Q349B  
R381  
PE7  
Q402  
11  
Q349F  
VBG  
10  
Q349G  
SOL-OIL  
R403  
PT40  
Q330  
VBG  
A–14  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (9/14)  
PC[0..12]  
VCC  
R487  
R489  
R491  
R493  
PH0  
PH1  
PH2  
PH3  
PH4  
PH5  
PH6  
RGPD  
PAP-EX  
LENS-HP  
BLNKST-HP  
L-CHECK  
R540  
R539  
R538  
R537  
R536  
R535  
R534  
R533  
R532  
R531  
R530  
R529  
R589  
R488  
PC0  
PC1  
PC2  
PC3  
PC4  
PC5  
PC6  
PC7  
PC8  
PC9  
PC10  
PC11  
PC12  
M0  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
M10  
M11  
M12  
R490  
R492  
CP-ACK  
HTON  
R484  
C338 C339 C340 C341 C342 C343 C344  
Q384  
DTC114EU  
VCC  
A-TH  
M-TH  
PI0  
PI1  
PI2  
PI3  
PI4  
PI5  
PI6  
PI7  
R498  
MAIN-TH  
AUX-TH  
AE-DATA0  
R404  
R505  
R500  
R502  
R504  
C364 C365 C366 C367 C368 C369 C370 C371 C372 C373 C374 C375 C300  
MFPWD  
KVR  
TNEMP  
PI[0..7]  
C345  
C346  
C347  
C348  
C350  
C352  
VCC  
VCC  
M0  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
R586  
KR0  
R528  
R587  
VCC  
KR1  
COVDT-I  
COVDT  
Q312B  
R527  
4
3
KR2  
KR3  
KR4  
SCI  
SC-HP  
EEP-SI  
C395  
R506  
Q312C  
Q312A  
6
5
2
1
Q385  
DTC114EU  
ZERCRSS  
R526  
AC-MNTR  
PH8  
C312  
C363  
R525  
VCC  
M[0..12]  
M[0..12]  
R517  
R518  
R519  
DIPD-I  
DEPD-I  
DERS-I  
DIPD  
DEPD  
DERS  
R521  
R523  
UP-FEDDT-I  
LW-FEDDT-I  
UP-FEDDT  
LW-FEDDT  
C356  
C358  
C360  
C361  
C362  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (10/14)  
PT[0..7]  
VCC  
PT[0..7]  
Q381H  
Q381G  
Q381F  
Q381E  
Q381D  
Q381C  
Q381B  
Q381A  
P[30..37]  
P[30..37]  
P30  
P31  
P32  
P33  
P34  
P35  
P36  
P37  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
SEG0  
SEG1  
SEG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
SEG6  
SEG7  
DG0  
DG1  
DG2  
Q373  
PT0  
PT1  
KS0  
KS1  
KS2  
Q365  
Q381  
Q374  
VCC  
Q366  
C337  
R592  
R594  
R596  
R582  
Q375  
PT2  
PT3  
PT4  
Q367  
Q368  
Q369  
DG3  
R593  
Q376  
Q377  
KS3  
KS4  
DG4  
D321  
R595  
FAC0  
C386  
R598  
DG5  
KS5  
D322  
D323  
D324  
R597  
Q378  
PT5  
PT6  
PT7  
FAC1  
FAC2  
FAC3  
Q370  
Q371  
Q372  
C398  
DG6  
DG7  
KS6  
Q379  
Q382E  
Q382D  
Q382C  
Q382B  
Q382A  
P[60..67]  
PT67  
PT66  
PT65  
PT64  
PT63  
PT62  
PT61  
PT60  
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
8
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
SEG8  
KS7  
Q380  
SEG9  
Q382  
SEG10  
SEG11  
SEG12  
SEG13  
SEG14  
SEG15  
VCC  
C335  
TD62380P  
Q382F  
13  
Q382G  
Q382H  
12  
11  
TD62380P  
A–16  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (11/14)  
KS0  
M6  
SIZE1  
SIZE2  
SIZE3  
SIZE4  
CNCT1  
CNCT2  
M7  
R450  
R451  
R452  
R454  
R455  
R456  
M8  
D325  
D327  
D329  
D331  
M6  
M7  
M8  
PAPER1  
FEED1  
M9  
D326  
D330  
M10  
M11  
MTRLOK  
M10  
M11  
M12  
TCNTRPR  
APS-L1  
CPDL  
D316  
KS6  
KS1  
R469  
R470  
R471  
R472  
R473  
R474  
R457  
R458  
R459  
R460  
R462  
R463  
D352  
D354  
D356  
M6  
D332  
D334  
OPCNTCN1  
OPCNTCN2  
DIST1  
D353  
D355  
D357  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
UPLIMIT  
FEED2  
DROPN  
SRSW  
M7  
D333  
D335  
D337  
M8  
M9  
DIST2  
M10  
M11  
DIST3  
D317  
RDROPN  
M11  
M12  
APS-L2  
D338  
OPCNTPR  
KS2  
R465  
R466  
KS7  
D339  
D341  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
UPCSZ-1  
UPCSZ-2  
UPCSZ-3  
UPCSZ-4  
D340  
D342  
D344  
R475  
R477  
R478  
R479  
R359  
D358  
D360  
D362  
D320  
M6  
MFPD  
M8  
PCBCH  
SPD  
D361  
D363  
D318  
M9  
M11  
M12  
APS-L3  
CPDU  
D345  
M10  
M11  
M12  
CCDT  
MMLOCK  
FACTORY  
KS3  
R467  
R468  
D346  
D348  
D350  
M6  
LWCSZ-1  
LWCSZ-2  
LWCSZ-3  
LWCSZ-4  
D347  
D349  
D351  
M7  
M8  
M9  
M10  
M11  
D319  
APS-L4  
JPPGP  
PGP  
M[6..12]  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (12/14)  
VCC  
M-TH  
VCC  
HTNG  
HTNG  
C351  
VCC  
R439  
R440  
R407  
R429  
RES  
R556  
5
6
Q386B  
+
7
R567  
6
5
HEAT-PROT  
Q329B  
R408  
R431  
+
7
6
5
R557  
D312  
Q331B  
R406  
+
7
+24V2  
D364  
M-TH  
PT41  
Q389  
Q354  
C377  
VCC  
VCC  
R553  
R430  
D328  
5
6
R555  
Q328B  
7
+
R453  
HTNG  
3
2
HTNG  
Q386A  
1
+
C354  
R433  
R436  
D336  
R554  
HTOFFOUT  
2
3
Q331A  
+
R435  
R434  
1
2
3
VCC  
Q329A  
1
D314  
R432  
+
A-TH  
D368  
Q326  
+24V2  
+24V2  
R438  
R437  
L-CHECK  
R571  
R574  
D366  
D367  
R503  
R573  
LAMP-ON  
PT14  
VCC  
LAMP-CHECK  
Q392  
Q394  
+
VCC  
C385  
R507  
C336  
C384  
C376  
R570  
R568  
R566  
Q395  
MMLOCK  
Q391  
JP1  
MMLOCK  
R569  
PT53  
HTTRIG  
Q393  
+24V2  
+24V2  
+24V2  
R572  
C378  
R559  
AE-REF  
Q317  
VCC  
C381  
Q390  
3
2
+24V2  
Q387A  
1
+
R561  
R562  
C349  
C379  
R560  
5
6
Q387B  
7
+
R564  
R405  
2
AE-DATA0  
Q328A  
1
SW303  
+
AE-DATA  
1
2
4
3
HTNG  
OPCNTCN2  
OPCNTCN1  
3
R565  
SW DIP-2  
R563  
C380  
A-TH  
A–18  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (13/14)  
MOLEX 53258-0620  
J301  
VCC  
+
24VFI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
J307  
VCC  
1
+
HEAT-PROT  
TNEMP  
2
3
34V  
J310  
LAMP-CHECK  
CP-REQ  
FL-S  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
VCC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
APGND  
VCC  
APS-L4  
APGND  
VCC  
APS-L3  
APGND  
VCC  
APS-L2  
APGND  
VCC  
LENS-HP  
GND  
GND34  
GND  
VBG  
MR  
+
24V2  
CP-DATA0  
CP-ACK  
CP-SIN  
CP-SOUT  
CP-SCLK  
AC-MNTR  
GND  
OPT-FAN  
VBG  
AE-REF  
AE-DATA  
+
24V2  
9
J302  
GND  
COVDT  
VCC  
10  
11  
12  
SC-B  
SC-B  
SC-A  
SC-A  
1
2
3
4
5
APS-L1  
J303  
+24VF1  
+24VF1  
VBG  
1
2
3
4
J308  
J311  
KS4  
FEED1  
CL1  
22  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND  
KS5  
MTRLOK  
SLNOID  
KS4  
/MTR-COM  
CL4  
CL3  
CNCT2  
SIZE4  
VBG  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
VBG  
24V2  
GND  
AST-RXD  
AST-TXD  
AST-CNTP  
VCC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
PAPER1  
CNCT1  
DROPN  
FEED2  
CL2  
UPLIMIT  
SIZE1  
SIZE2  
9
10  
11  
GND  
J304  
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIZE3  
+24VF1  
VBG  
+34V  
GND34  
VCC  
VCC  
J312  
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
24V2  
DSR-CL  
24V2  
J305  
+
J309  
MFPUCL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
DG7  
DG6  
DG5  
DG4  
DG3  
DG2  
DG1  
DG0  
SEG15  
SEG14  
SRG13  
R580  
SEG0  
SEG1  
SRG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
SEG6  
SEG7  
SEG8  
SEG9  
SEG10  
SEG11  
SRG12  
+
24V2  
MF MRLSL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
PUCL  
24V2  
GND  
CPDL  
GND  
LW-FEDDT  
VCC  
+
24V2  
LWPU-CL  
+
RGCL  
MMLOCK  
MMD  
GND  
VCC  
24V2  
UPFED-CL  
+
24V2  
R581  
R583  
9
GND  
CPDU  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GND  
RDROPN  
GND  
PAP-EX  
J306  
KR0  
1
KR1  
2
KR2  
3
KR3  
4
KR4  
5
SRSW  
VCC  
KVR  
GND  
GND  
VCC  
CCDT  
CCD  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Controller (14/14)  
F302  
J318  
J324  
+
+
24V2  
24VF2  
KS2  
1
UPCSZ-1  
UPCSZ-2  
UPCSZ-3  
UPCSZ-4  
GND  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAIN-TH  
GND  
24V2  
SOL-OIL  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
CHNG-SL  
+
24V2  
LENS-COMB  
LENS-B  
LENS-B  
LENS-COMA  
LENS-A  
+
J351  
KS3  
AUX-TH  
CRCLSL  
DIST1  
DIST2  
DIST3  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
LWCSZ-1  
LWCSZ-2  
LWCSZ-3  
LWCSZ-4  
GND  
J313  
+
24V2  
LENS-A  
1
2
3
4
D-TXD  
GND  
D-RXD  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
GND  
J314  
1
VCC  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CSEEP  
EEP-SCLK  
EEP-SI  
EEP-SO  
GND  
24V2  
PAPFAN  
VCC  
J319  
1
2
3
4
5
HTON  
GND  
HTTRIG  
VCC  
J325  
1
2
3
GND  
DEPD  
VCC  
+
J352  
FAC0  
FAC1  
FAC2  
FAC3  
FACTORY  
PCBCH  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
DERS  
GND  
VCC  
PU-FEDDT  
GND  
J320  
1
2
3
4
5
VCC  
DIPD  
GND  
24V2  
EPD-SL  
J326  
+
DUPLEX-COMA  
DUPLEX-COMB  
DUPLEX-A  
DUPLEX-A  
DUPLEX-B  
1
2
3
4
5
6
J315  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
+
24V2  
DUPLEX-B  
TCNTD  
+
24V2  
GND  
BLNKST-HP  
VCC  
J353  
OPCNTD  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
VCC  
+
SC-HP  
VCC  
24V2  
34V  
BLNKST-SL  
+
+
24V2  
J321  
+
24V2  
GND  
PR-EXP  
+
+
24VF2  
24VF2  
1
2
3
4
EXFAN  
24V2  
+
VBG  
VBG  
J316  
VCC  
1
2
3
TRCLSL  
+24V2  
SPD  
R585  
R584  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GND  
J322  
VCC  
MFPWD  
GND  
MFPD  
GND  
+
1
2
3
4
24VF2  
24VF2  
+
VBG  
VBG  
VCC  
RGPD  
GND  
J317  
1
2
3
4
S-TXD  
GND  
S-RXD  
GND  
A–20  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
Composite Power Supply PCB (1/6)  
6
+30VSEC  
7
8
+BATT  
15  
+24VSEC  
11  
18  
17  
D84  
R1  
D1  
VCC-PRIN  
-BATT  
R2  
9
Q1  
D2  
D3  
R3  
T1  
L1  
4
3
2
C1  
R4  
+
+
+ C4  
C5  
C6  
C2  
RV1  
C7  
9
8
C3  
HOT  
D4  
1
R5  
C8  
C9  
F1  
F2  
F3  
D5  
Q2  
R8  
D85  
D7  
R7  
2
4
5
R9  
C11  
1
C12  
T2  
U1  
R10  
R11  
R12  
5
4
3
2
1
-BATT  
C13  
VAUX  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VFEEBBK  
R207  
COMP VREF  
VFS  
IS  
2
1
VI  
OUT  
GNS  
Q5  
J1  
OSC  
R14  
D6  
C10  
1
2
1
2
R19  
WHITE  
W4  
W15  
W1  
W3  
W2  
+
1
2
3
C136  
C16  
C18  
C141  
C135  
C15  
C17  
D8  
R15  
D77  
BLACK  
D90  
C14  
R17  
Q6  
R224  
HOT  
+
3
2
1
VREF-U1  
OSC-U1  
W5  
W6  
D86  
VAUX  
D9  
L2  
D10  
VCC-PRIN  
COLD-LINE  
HOT-LINE  
D87  
+
D11  
+
R220  
C20  
C19  
Q52  
D88  
24V  
R21 R20  
4
5
-BATT  
Q51  
D12  
D89  
R222  
K1  
ZD11  
Q53  
R221  
Q54  
R22  
+
Q7  
HEAT-PROT  
OVERC  
R223  
C140  
R46  
R23  
-BATT  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–21  
1/6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composite Power Supply PCB (2/6)  
36V  
R24  
24V  
R27  
R28  
C22  
R29  
R25  
R31  
R26  
R32  
+
C23  
D14  
C24  
+
24V  
7
3
1
C25  
C26  
+
-
+30VSEC  
1
L3  
6
D13  
U2A  
5
6
2
3
C27  
R30  
C28  
R40  
R41  
R42  
11  
10  
14  
15  
R45 C36  
5
1
VFEEDBK  
-BATT  
24V  
4
6
2
3
C29  
R33  
R34  
1
U3  
3
1
U4  
+24VSEC  
C139  
R36  
R37  
D15  
R47  
R38  
R43  
R39  
R44  
R35  
C33  
+
C30  
C31  
5
4
+
D16  
+
-
2
C34  
U2D  
C32  
U2B  
11  
10  
C35  
+
-
13  
D17  
+
5FBT  
+
R208  
C37  
R51  
R52  
24V  
MRES  
R209  
R49  
R50  
D18  
24V  
R48  
24V  
L4  
U6  
U5  
24V  
D19  
D20  
ZD1  
36V  
4
3
1
2
OVERC  
R53  
R54  
16  
R57  
GND  
9
8
11  
+
-
VS  
14  
15  
5
-BATT  
GND  
GND  
GND  
36V  
U2C  
ZD2  
ZD3  
R55  
6
Q8  
19  
N.C.  
C39  
C40  
+
+
5FBT  
R56  
C41  
C42  
C43  
24V  
D21  
1
C44  
R61  
R58  
C50  
2
R60  
C48 C45 C46  
C47  
C49  
R210  
U20  
4
3
1
2
VREF-UI  
OSC-UI  
R211  
24V  
R59  
R62  
Q9  
R63  
Q10  
FAN-ON  
Q11  
CP-DATAO  
D22  
A–22  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composite Power Supply PCB (3/6)  
24V  
24V  
AC+DC BIAS  
J2  
F4  
R64  
R65  
R66  
C51  
R67  
Q14  
C53  
Q12  
T3  
R6  
C52  
R70  
R69  
3
4
2
1
AC-BCAS  
MRES  
+
Q13  
V9  
H.V.GENERATOR  
Q15  
C54  
L5  
R71  
MV-L  
R72  
Q16  
D23  
C55  
ACBIAS-ON  
T4  
+
5FBT  
R73  
8
10  
2
HV-L  
C56  
R74  
7
6
1
5
R77  
HV-H  
HV-L  
Q17  
R75  
R76  
R78  
HV-H  
4
+
5FBT  
24V  
R79  
C57  
D25  
2
2
R80  
D27  
PRIMARY  
R81  
R82  
Q18  
Q19  
3
+
-
1
2
J3  
R84  
R85  
U7A  
R83  
1
2
3
C58  
+
5FBT  
C59  
C60  
R88  
BIAS-S  
R86  
D26  
C62  
+
R89  
R90  
R87  
PDC-S  
C64  
C61  
HV-H  
HV-L  
R92  
D27  
R91  
C63  
C65  
R93  
24V  
R94  
R95  
Q20  
R99  
R96  
R97  
P-CUR-S  
PDC-S  
+
5
6
+
7
-
P-CTRL-S  
C66  
C67  
C68  
R98  
C69  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composite Power Supply PCB (4/6)  
DISCHARGE  
C71  
C72  
C70  
C73  
R100  
R101  
-
MV L  
D30  
D31  
D28  
C74  
D29  
D32  
D33  
D34  
D35  
J4  
R102  
-
MV H  
C75  
C76  
C77  
+
5FBT  
R103  
R106  
Q21  
R104  
D37  
24V  
C78  
D36  
R105  
C79  
R107  
R108  
J5  
C80  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
R109  
R110  
+
5FBT  
HEAT-PROT  
TNEMPM  
LAMP-CHECK  
CP-REQM  
FL-S  
D38  
3
+
-
1
2
R111  
U8A  
MRES  
8
J-CTRL  
CP-DATAO  
CP-ACKM  
CP-SIN  
7
6
5
HEADER 17  
CP-SOUT  
CP-SCLK  
ZERO-CROSS  
4
3
2
1
J-LVL-CTRL  
J-CTRL  
BIAS-S  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
R113  
R114  
P-CTRL-S  
ACBIAS-ON  
P-OUR-S  
T-REV-ON  
T-FV-ON  
T-FV-S  
T-CTRL-S  
CP-SCLK  
CP-SOUT  
CP-SIN  
24V  
J9  
R115  
24V  
4
3
2
1
C81  
J-LVL-CTRL  
Q22  
24V  
R116  
J8  
+
5FBT  
5
6
+
-
36V  
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
U8B  
4
3
2
1
CP-ACKM  
CP-BATAO  
+
5FBT  
J7  
R201  
Q46  
R202  
HEADER 17  
36V FOR BRUSHLESS MOTOR  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
CP-REOM  
J11  
1
Q45  
FL-LIGHT-ONM  
MRES  
24V  
2
FL-LIGHT-ON  
*
+
5FBT  
J12  
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
R203  
FAN-ON  
FAN-EN  
4
3
2
FAN-EN  
1
J10  
A–24  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composite Power Supply PCB (5/6)  
-
-
T MAX 6.0KV < 20 UA>  
24V  
-
-
+
T TYP. 4KV < 6 UA>  
C82  
D40  
C83  
+
T CL 3KV < 10 UA>  
T Lconst < 10 UA>  
T5  
-
TRANSFER  
R117  
-
T FEEDBACK  
1
D39  
D41  
D42  
5
6
150M  
C86  
C87  
R118  
24V  
R119  
Q23  
24V  
T-REV  
MV-L  
C84  
C85  
C89  
+
D43  
5FBT  
2
7
D44  
D45  
+
C88  
R120  
R121  
D46  
Q25  
Q24  
R122  
U9  
R124  
R123  
Q26  
C90  
+
5FBT  
7
3
-
T PROTECT  
DIS  
Q
6
5
D47  
C91  
THR  
CV  
R125  
2
R126  
D48  
-
-
TR  
T FW ON  
R127  
R128  
Q28  
C92  
R129  
6
5
Q27  
-
7
R131  
5FBT  
Q29  
ZD4  
+
C93  
C94  
R130  
U10B  
24V  
+
R133  
R132  
D50  
C95  
R135  
R134  
C97  
-
-
T REV ON  
C96  
2
3
R136  
R137  
-
R138  
R139  
1
+
U11A  
D51  
R141  
R140  
R142  
+
5FBT  
C98  
6
-
7
5
+
U11B  
D52  
R143  
24V  
R144  
-
T PROTECT  
24V  
TRANSFER  
R145  
R146  
R147  
R148  
R149  
Q30  
R150  
C99  
-
-
T FW S  
24V  
D53  
C101  
C100  
3
2
U12B  
+
-
1
R152  
5
C102  
+
-
7
U10A  
6
Q31  
24V  
U12A  
C103  
C104  
R153  
3
+
-
T-CTRL-S  
1
R154  
C106  
-
T FEEDBACK  
2
C105  
R155  
D54  
R156  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composite Power Supply PCB (6/6)  
24V  
R213  
J13  
D58  
D62  
D61  
D63  
R205  
1
2
3
15V  
U21  
LAMP-  
CHECK  
4
3
1
2
R158  
R159  
C107  
R171  
Q40  
ZD6  
24VAUX  
R157  
24V  
HOT-LINE  
R169  
R160  
R166  
24VAUX  
R173  
COLD-LINE  
D56  
D57  
R212  
R214  
R172  
R170  
U16  
Q39  
1
5
R219  
D55  
ZERO-CROSS  
Q47  
C109  
2
3
4
6
L6  
Q34  
24V  
D61  
D78  
R168  
R215  
Q32  
ZD5  
R165  
24VAUX  
R164  
R162  
R161  
R163  
24VAUX  
24VAUX  
+
U13B  
Q48  
6
5
R175  
U13A  
FL-LIGHT-D  
Q33  
7
3
2
+
-
1
R167  
R176  
+
R174  
C108  
U15  
R216  
BTA12-600C  
Q49  
1
2
3
6
5
4
15V  
D79  
R179  
R178  
C110  
R181  
R177  
C113  
R217  
C137  
ZD7  
C136  
R218  
R182  
R184  
ZD8  
ZD9  
D90  
24V  
C111  
1/2V NO FLAME  
U14  
R204  
1
5
2
3
+
4
6
FL-S  
R183  
C112  
A–26  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F. CONTROL PANEL KEY PCB  
Control Panel Key PCB (1/3)  
DG2C  
DG1C  
DG0C  
ILINK  
I TAST1.SCH  
I TAST2.SCH  
J801  
DG3C  
DG3B  
SEG0  
SEG1  
SEG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
SEG6  
SEG7  
SEG8  
SEG9  
SEG10  
SEG11  
SEG12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
L800  
R801  
R803  
R805  
R807  
SEG0  
SEG1  
SEG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
SEG6  
SEG7  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
R802  
R804  
R806  
R808  
J802  
SEG13  
SEG14  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
DG0  
DG1  
DG2  
DG3  
DG4  
DG5  
DG6  
DG7  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
R809  
R811  
R813  
R815  
SEG8  
SEG9  
S8  
R810  
R812  
R814  
J803  
S9  
KR0  
KR1  
KR2  
KR3  
KR4  
1
2
3
4
5
SEG10  
SEG11  
SEG12  
SEG13  
SEG14  
S10  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
DG0B  
DG1B  
DG2B  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel Key PCB (2/3)  
DG4C  
DG4B  
DG5C  
DG5B  
DG6C  
DG6B  
DG7C  
DG7B  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S0  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
S8  
S9  
S9  
S10  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
S10  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
A–28  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel Key PCB (3/3)  
VCC  
VCC  
R832  
R816  
Q800  
R833  
R817  
KS0  
DG0  
VCC  
DG0  
VCC  
Q808  
1
2
3
4
5
DG0B  
DG0C  
D800  
SW804  
SW803  
SW802  
SW807  
SW806  
KS0  
KS1  
KS2  
KS3  
KS4  
KS5  
KS6  
R834  
R835  
R818  
Q801  
R819  
KS1  
6
7
8
9
0
DG1  
VCC  
DG1  
VCC  
Q809  
Q810  
Q811  
Q812  
Q813  
Q814  
Q815  
DG1C  
DG1B  
DG2B  
DG3B  
D801  
SW805  
SW810  
SW809  
SW808  
SW812  
R820  
R836  
R837  
Q802  
R821  
KS2  
CLEAR  
SW813  
STOP  
COPY  
OK  
DG2  
VCC  
RESET  
SW816  
DG2  
VCC  
DG2C  
SW814  
SW815  
SW819  
D802  
R838  
R839  
R822  
Q803  
Q804  
Q805  
Q806  
R823  
KS3  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
REDUCTION  
SW825  
ENLARGMENT  
SW823  
1:1  
DARK  
DG3  
VCC  
DG3  
VCC  
DG3C  
D803  
SW824  
SW826  
SW827  
R824  
R840  
R841  
R825  
R827  
R829  
R831  
KS4  
DG4  
VCC  
LIGHT  
TWO-SIDE  
SW829  
TWO-SIDE-NUM  
SW830  
INTERRUPT  
SW811  
SORTER  
SW833  
DG4  
VCC  
DG4C  
DG4B  
DG5B  
DG6B  
D804  
D805  
D806  
SW828  
R842  
R843  
R826  
KS5  
ENERGY  
SAVING  
%
ADD-FUNC  
SW834  
AMS  
TRANSP  
SW832  
DG5  
VCC  
DG5  
VCC  
DG5C  
SW817  
SW820  
SW801  
R844  
R845  
R828  
KS6  
COMB-NUM  
SW813  
ZOOM +  
SW818  
ZOOM -  
SW821  
CASS-SELEC  
SW822  
DG6  
VCC  
DG6  
VCC  
DG6C  
R830  
R846  
R847  
DG7  
DG7  
Q807  
KR0  
KR0  
KR1  
KR2  
KR2  
KR3  
KR3  
KR4  
KR1  
KR4  
DG7B  
DG7C  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
+24V  
1
J601  
R601  
R603  
+24V  
R602  
8
4
2
-
R605  
1
PD601  
2
AEDATA  
J601  
3
+
C601  
Q601  
+24V  
8
4
6
5
-
7
R604  
3
+
J601 AEREF  
Q601  
C602  
4
J601  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
D402  
D401  
+
5V  
R402  
R403  
Q401  
J401  
R401  
+
5V  
1
2
1
4
3
2
HTON  
GND  
4
3
HTON  
GND  
HTTRIG  
J402  
1
2
D404  
D403  
WHITE  
W1  
J403  
Q402  
R404  
1
2
6
1
HTTRIG  
GND  
W2  
L401 140uH 7A  
Q403  
C402  
AC INPUT CABLE  
2
3
4
5
3
FROM  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
R406  
R405  
C401  
BLACK  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
R769  
+24V  
Q753  
R761  
R760  
R759  
+24V  
+24V  
C757  
C756  
+24V  
Q753  
C755  
R767  
R757  
C763  
R765  
C753  
R755  
R766  
R756  
2
1
2
1
+24V  
+24V  
Q7623  
Q7523  
Q761  
Q751  
2
1
2
1
R764  
R754  
3
3
3
D762  
D763  
D752  
D753  
2
1
R771 VR762 R762  
D761  
R751  
R752  
D751  
C750  
+24V  
C751  
J753  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
J1  
I/F Cable -1  
J2  
J100F J101F  
J102F  
J216F  
3
2
1
Feed  
Detector1  
PS1  
1
5V  
GND  
2
J217F  
3
FEED1  
5V  
GND  
PAPER1  
KS4  
4
3
2
1
PCB1  
OPCST Driver-1  
Paper  
Detector1  
5
PS2  
6
7
J110F  
8
SIZE1-1  
SIZE2-1  
SIZE3-1  
SIZE4-1  
GND  
9
J218F  
PCB2  
10  
11  
12  
6
5
4
3
2
1
Paper Size  
Detector1  
J115F  
J114F  
J115FP  
J115P  
Feed  
Clutch1  
CL  
M
Feed  
Motor  
CL1  
M1  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2 DRIVER  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
Driver Circuit Diagram (1/2)  
R111  
+5V  
1
2
3
5V  
GND  
FEED1  
J110  
J110  
J110  
Feed  
Detector1  
R112  
+5V  
4
5
6
J110  
J110  
J110  
Paper  
Detector 1  
GND  
PAPER1  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
KS4  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
D111  
D112  
D113  
D114  
SIZE1-1  
SIZE2-1  
SIZE3-1  
SIZE4-1  
GND  
Paper Size  
Detector 1  
1
2
+24V  
CLUTCH1  
Paper Feed J115  
Clutch 1  
J115  
MTR-B  
MTR-A  
MTR-COM  
to A503  
C104  
+5V  
C103  
C102  
+34V  
C101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Driver Circuit Diagram (2/2)  
Paper Feed Motor  
C100  
R102  
Q102  
+34V  
C110  
C109  
C112  
C111  
R101  
C106  
R106  
+5V  
C108 R132  
R108  
R109 R110  
+5V  
Q101  
R107  
R131  
C107  
R103  
R104  
Q104  
Q103  
+5V  
+5V  
R105  
+5V  
C105  
from A502  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 GENERAL  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
J1  
I/F Cable -2  
J2  
J2226F  
1
2
3
Feed  
Detector2  
Paper  
J100F J101F  
J218F  
J102F  
J103F  
PS3  
Size  
Detector1  
KS4  
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIZE1-1  
SIZE2-1  
SIZE3-1  
SIZE4-1  
GND  
J2227F  
J118F  
PCB2  
1
2
3
Paper  
Detector2  
PS4  
FEED2  
GND  
5V  
PAPER2  
GND  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
Paper  
Detector1  
J228F  
J217F  
PCB1  
5V  
GND  
OPCST Driver-2  
5V  
GND  
PAPER1  
N.C  
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
J120  
SIZE4-1  
SIZE3-1  
SIZE2-1  
SIZE1-1  
KS4  
DROPN  
GND  
5V  
8
PS2  
J117F  
J116F  
7
Paper  
Size  
PCB3  
6
Detector2  
5
4
Feed  
Detector1  
3
J216F  
2
3
2
1
5V  
GND  
FEED1  
1
2
3
1
J229F  
PS1  
1
2
3
Right  
Door  
PS5  
Open  
Detector  
J125F  
J114F  
J215FP  
F215P  
J225FP  
J225P  
Feed  
Clutch1  
Feed  
Clutch2  
CL  
CL  
M
Feed  
Motor  
CL1  
CL2  
M1  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 DRIVER  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
Driver Circuit Diagram (1/2)  
R123  
+5V  
1
2
3
5V  
Right Door  
Open  
Detector  
J120  
J120  
J120  
GND  
DROPN  
4
5
6
7
8
9
KS5  
J120  
J120  
J120  
J120  
J120  
J120  
SIZE1-2  
SIZE2-2  
SIZE3-2  
SIZE4-2  
GND  
D121  
D122  
D123  
D124  
Paper Size  
Detector 2  
R122  
+5V  
10  
11  
12  
5V  
GND  
PAPER2  
J120  
J120  
J120  
Paper  
Detector 2  
R121  
+5V  
13  
14  
15  
5V  
GND  
FEED2  
J120  
J120  
J120  
Feed  
Detector 2  
R111  
+5V  
1
2
3
5V  
GND  
FEED1  
J110  
J110  
J110  
Feed  
Detector 1  
R112  
+5V  
4
5
6
5V  
GND  
PAPER1  
J110  
J110  
J110  
Paper  
Detector 1  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
KS4  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
J110  
D111  
D112  
D113  
D114  
SIZE1-1  
SIZE2-1  
SIZE3-1  
SIZE4-1  
GND  
Paper Size  
Detector 1  
1
2
+24V  
CLUTCH1  
Paper Feed  
Clutch 2  
J125  
J125  
1
2
+24V  
CLUTCH2  
Paper Feed  
Clutch 1  
J125  
J125  
MTR-B  
MTR-A  
MTR-COM  
to A503  
C104  
+5V  
C103  
R100  
D120  
C102  
+34V  
C101  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Drivcr Circuit Diagram (2/2)  
Paper Feed Motor  
C100  
R102  
Q102  
+34V  
C110  
C109  
C112  
C111  
R101  
C106  
R106  
+5V  
C108 R132  
R108  
R109 R110  
+5V  
Q101  
R107  
R131  
C107  
R103  
R104  
Q104  
Q103  
+5V  
+5V  
R105  
+5V  
C105  
from A502  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
Cassette 5 size  
detection PCB  
Cassette 5 paper  
detection  
Cassette 5 vertical path  
detection  
Cassette 3 size  
detection PCB  
Cassette 3 paper  
detection  
Cassette 3 vertical path  
detection  
PS7  
PS6  
PS2  
PS1  
PCB2  
PCB4  
Pick-up motor 2  
M2  
Pick-up motor 1  
M1  
J238F  
J218F  
J237F  
J236F  
J217F  
J216F  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
M
M
6
1
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
1
6
12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1  
To copier  
J234F  
J230F  
J114F  
J110F  
10  
1
2
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
5VF3  
GND  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
GND  
7
C5VPD  
5VP3  
GND  
9
C3VPD  
C3PUCLD  
C3PD  
J102F  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
C4/5PD  
CS4/CS5  
CNCT1  
CRDOP  
C4VPD  
J130F  
C4SZ1/C5SZ1  
C4SZ2/C5SZ2  
C4SZ3/C5SZ3  
C4SZ4/C5SZ4  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
C4/5PUCLD  
C4/5PD  
SIZE1  
SIZE2  
I/F Cable  
COM A  
SIZE3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cassette pedestal controller PCB  
A
SIZE4  
A
CNCT2  
C5VPD  
SELECT3  
CS4/CS5  
CS3  
8
J103F  
COM B  
7
J134F  
B
B
6
5
4
MTR-COM  
MTR-A  
MTR-B  
3
J215P  
J225P  
J235P  
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch  
CL1 CL  
2
1
2
2
1
1
+24V  
C3PUCLD  
+24V  
GND  
+34V  
4
6
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
J101F  
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch  
CL2  
1
2
2
1
C4/5PUCLD  
+24V  
8
J135F  
CL  
FGND  
C4/5PUCLD  
J120F  
J335P  
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch  
CL3  
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
CL  
J2  
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
J229F  
J227F  
J226F  
J228F  
PCB3  
PS5  
PS4  
PS3  
Cassette night  
door senson  
Cassette 4 size  
detection PCB  
Cassette 4 paper  
detection  
Cassette 4 vertical path  
detection  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (1/3)  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
R112  
R111  
R121  
R122  
R123  
R132  
R131  
+34V  
1
+34V  
J101  
+
2
GND  
C101  
C102  
J101  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
C4VPD  
CRDOP  
CNCT1  
C3PD  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
D101  
R101  
C3PUCLD  
C3VPD  
GND  
GND  
+24Çu  
+5Çu  
+5V  
C104  
CLUTCH2  
CLUTCH3  
+
C103  
PAPER2  
PAPER3  
1
MTR-B  
MTR-A  
MTR-COM  
CS3  
KS5  
KS6  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
2
3
4
5
CS4/CS5  
SELECT3  
C5VPD  
CNCT2  
SIZE4  
to A503  
6
SELECT3  
7
8
D102  
R102  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
SIZE3  
SIZE2  
SIZE1  
CLUTCH2/3  
PAPER2/3  
KS5/6  
C4/5PD  
C4/5PUCLD  
MTRCOM  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Q103  
Q104  
Q107  
Q117  
R103  
R104  
to A504  
A–42  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (2/3)  
+5V  
+5V  
SELECT3  
R106  
Q105  
Q110  
CLUTCH2  
R124  
CLUTCH2/3  
17  
3
Q124  
19  
Q110  
2
CLUTCH3  
R134  
18  
Q134  
+5V  
1
Q125  
Q110  
PAPER2/3  
R125  
PAPER2  
5
15  
19  
+5V  
Q110  
to A502  
+5V  
20  
10  
VCC  
GND  
C110  
Q110  
4
R135  
PAPER3  
16  
Q135  
1
to A502  
+5V  
Q110  
13  
KS5/6  
7
Q126  
KS5  
19  
+5V  
Q110  
6
14  
Q136  
KS6  
1
Q110  
11  
9
N.C.  
19  
Q110  
8
MTR-COM3  
to A504  
MTR-COM  
12  
Q137  
1
R105  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (3/3)  
+34V  
+5V  
R209  
R210  
R207  
R208  
R201  
Q202  
MTR-COM1  
R202  
MTR-A  
MTR-A  
MTR-B  
MTR-B  
to A502  
+5V  
Q201  
R206  
1
3
OUTA  
COM A  
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
TdA  
GND  
INA  
J114  
J114  
J114  
J114  
J114  
J114  
VrefA  
INA  
4
C206  
C209  
C211  
C210  
5
A
6
+5V  
7
VSA  
RSA  
OUTB  
TdB  
C207  
R231  
8
OUTA  
RSB  
VSB  
9
A
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
11  
13  
15  
17  
R205  
R232  
COM B  
VrefB  
INB  
GND  
INB  
C205  
C212  
+34V  
C208  
B
B
OUTB  
+5V  
R309  
R310  
R307  
R308  
R301  
Q302  
to A503  
MTR-COM3  
R302  
+5V  
Q301  
R306  
1
3
OUTA  
VrefA  
INA  
COM A  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
TdA  
GND  
INA  
J134  
J134  
J134  
J134  
J134  
J134  
J134  
4
C306  
C309  
C311  
C310  
C312  
5
A
6
+5V  
7
VSA  
RSA  
OUTB  
TdB  
C307  
R331  
8
OUTA  
RSB  
VSB  
9
A
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
R305  
C305  
11  
13  
15  
17  
R332  
COM B  
VrefB  
INB  
GND  
INB  
C308  
B
B
OUTB  
N.C.  
A–44  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
PS1  
CL2  
Vertical path roller 3  
M1  
Right door open  
sensor  
drive clutch  
J92F  
3
Pedestal motor  
PS17  
2
1
CL  
Deck paper  
sensor  
J81R  
J81P  
J81F  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J36F  
M
5
1
2
3
J35F  
J94F  
3
J35R  
J35P  
PS19  
2
3
1
2
2
1
Deck lifter  
upper limit  
sensor  
J222F  
J221F  
1
2
3
4
1
2
12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
J32F  
J32R  
J32P  
J95F  
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
PS20  
2
1
Deck open  
sensor  
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
J80R  
J80P  
J50R  
J50P  
J50F  
J91F  
3
To copier  
J80F  
PS16  
1
2
3
3
2
1
GND  
DVRPD  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
J111F  
J202F  
J201F  
Deck vertical  
path roller  
paper sensor  
2
1
+5V  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
2
+24V  
GND  
DPD  
+5V  
GND  
3
GND  
7
J112F  
FEED1  
CLUTCH1  
PAPER1  
CNCT1  
DROPN  
FEED2  
9
J93F  
3
J102F  
GND  
DLP  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
PS18  
2
1
Deck lifter  
position  
sensor  
KS5  
J61R  
J61P  
J61F  
GND  
DEL  
1
2
11  
10  
9
1
2
CLUTCH2  
UPLIMIT  
SIZE1  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
1
J83R  
J83P  
+5V  
3
3
2
J83F  
+24V  
CL7D  
+24V  
CL8D  
GND  
DEOP  
KS5  
CL7  
4
8
4
1
2
3
SIZE2  
Deck pick-up  
clutch  
5
CL  
CL  
7
5
4
2
1
Deck Driver  
J1 Deck I/F Cable  
6
SIZE3  
6
6
5
J113F  
J84R  
J84P  
SIZE4  
7
5
7
6
J84F  
1
8
CNCT2  
MTRLOCK  
SLNOID  
KS5  
4
CL8  
8
7
2
1
J103F  
9
3
9
Deck vertical  
path roller drive  
clutch  
8
2
10  
11  
2
10  
11  
9
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
N.C  
KS4  
J69R  
J69P  
MTR-COM  
CLUTCH3  
CLUTCH4  
J90F  
3
J69F  
SIZE2  
SIZE1  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW103  
2
1
Deck size  
switch PCB  
+24V  
GND  
+34V  
4
6
1
2
J114F  
CL9D  
+24V  
J101F  
J86R  
J86P  
J86F  
CL9  
1
2
2
1
DEPRL  
FGND  
8
Deck lifter drive  
clutch  
CL  
SL  
J2  
J87R  
J87P  
J87F  
SL11  
1
2
2
1
Deck pick-up  
roller release  
solenoid  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
+5V  
+24V  
+24V  
+24V  
+24V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
J102  
+24Çu  
GND  
+
C101  
C102  
+5V  
GND  
Q120  
FEED1  
CLUTCH1  
PAPER1  
CNCT1  
DROPN  
FEED2  
14  
7
VCC  
GND  
C120  
1
2
3
+5V  
5
+5V  
N.C  
Q121  
+5V  
D111  
D112  
Q121  
4
13  
12  
14  
7
VCC  
GND  
R101  
R102  
Q121  
Q121  
C121  
6
11  
Q103  
Q102  
Q101  
D101  
Q106  
Q107  
D107  
Q105  
D105  
D103  
D102  
D106  
CLUTCH2  
UPLIMIT  
SIZE1  
1
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
J103  
2
3
SIZE2  
4
+5V  
SIZE3  
5
SIZE4  
6
N.C  
N.C  
CNCT2  
MTRLOCK  
SLNOID  
KS5  
7
R110  
8
9
Q110  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
KS4  
MTR-COM  
CLUTCH3  
CLUTCH4  
+5V  
4
+5V  
Q120  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
PR  
R104  
R103  
D114  
D113  
Q121  
2
3
5
6
D
Q
Q
9
8
10  
CK  
Q120  
PR  
10  
Q111  
GND  
+34V  
1
2
Q112  
J101  
J101  
R105  
12  
11  
9
8
C105  
+5V  
D
Q
CLR  
1
Q109  
R109  
CK  
R111  
Q
Q114  
C104  
+
CLR  
C103  
Q113  
13  
Q115  
+5V  
A–46  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
R. SPECIAL TOOLS  
See the table for the special tools used to service the machine in addition to the standard tools set.  
Tool No.  
Shape  
Rank  
A
Remarks  
No.  
1
Tool name  
TKN-0093-000  
Door switch  
actuator  
B
A
B
B
For adjusting the  
distance between No.  
1 and No. 2 mirrors.  
2
3
Mirror positioning  
tool (comes in  
pairs; front, rear)  
FY9-3009-040  
FY9-3010-000  
A
B
For fixing the scanning  
cable in place.  
Pulley clip  
(front, rear)  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
S. SOLVENTS/OILS  
Name  
Use  
Composition  
C2 H5 OH  
Description  
• Flammable.  
• Use in a well-ventilated area.  
• Avoid breathing concentrated  
vapor.  
No.  
Ethyl alcohol  
(Ethanol)  
Cleaning:  
copyboard glass,  
mirror, etc.  
1
(CHZ3)2 CHOH  
Isopropyl  
alcohol  
(Isopropanol)  
2
MEK  
Removing toner or  
oil stains  
CH3 • CO • C2H5  
Methylethyl ketone  
• Flammable.  
• Use in a well-ventilated area  
and avoid breathing concen-  
trated vapor.  
• Avoid contact with eyes or  
skin.  
• Do not use for cleaning the  
drum, plastic molded parts, or  
corona wires.  
3
Heat-resistant Lubricating the  
Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g can)  
(Equivqlent grease may be  
used, able to withstand 200°C  
for extended periods of time.)  
grease  
drive mechanisms;  
e.g., copyboard  
driving gear, fixing  
drive gear, fixing  
ass’y, etc.  
Lubricating oil Lubrication points:  
(low viscosity) Scanner rail, etc.  
ISO VG 68 oil  
Equivalent oil may be used.  
Tool No.: CK-0451 (100cc)  
4
5
ESSO Febis K68  
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 2  
SHELL Tonna oil T68  
Lubricating oil Lubrication point:  
(low viscosity) one-way clutch in  
pick-up control  
ISO VG 220 oil  
ESSO Febis K220  
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 4  
Equivalent oil may be used.  
Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc).  
assembly  
Lubricating  
grease  
Lubrication point:  
friction parts  
Silicone oil  
Silicone oil  
Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g)  
Tool No.: CK-0438 (100g)  
6
7
Conductive  
grease  
COPYRIGHT  
©
1998 CANON INC.  
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)  
A–48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prepared by  
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1  
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION  
CANON INC.  
Printed in Japan  
REVISION 0 (FEB. 1998) (31625)  
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi Ibaraki, 302 -0023 Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This publication is printed on  
70% reprocessed paper.  
PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)  
0398S1.11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Blodgett Convection Oven CTBR Series User Manual
Bontrager Bicycle Race XXX Lite User Manual
Boston Acoustics Speaker I DS3 plus User Manual
Brother All in One Printer 885MC User Manual
Brother Sewing Machine 882 U70 User Manual
Bush Hog Lawn Aerator 720 User Manual
Bushnell Digital Camera 119425C User Manual
Cannon Electric Pressure Cooker 10250G User Manual
Carrier Thermostat 33CS User Manual
Chauvet Wheelchair LED FS1 User Manual